JP2020081430A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To enhance interest in a game.SOLUTION: A game machine to make it possible to play a game comprises: game state control means to control game states; variable display execution means to perform variable display of identification information and to perform derived display of a display result; and performance execution means. The game state control means can perform control to an advantageous state advantageous to a player, a peculiar state different from the advantageous state, a special state to be easily controlled to the peculiar state, and a non-special state different from the special state. The variable display is not performed in the advantageous state and in the peculiar state. The performance execution means can execute a special performance corresponding to the control of the peculiar state when controlled to the peculiar state in the special state, and can execute a suggestive performance, which is different from the special performance, when controlled to the peculiar state in the non-special state.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

Conventionally, when a game ball shot in a game area wins a predetermined winning opening, identification information is variably displayed, and when the display result of the variable display is a predetermined display result, a game corresponding to the display result is generated. There are known pachinko machines that let you play. The predetermined display result is, for example, a display result showing a big hit or a display result showing a small hit. In addition, the pachinko game machine, the game state, the normal state,
Control to any one of a plurality of gaming states such as a time saving state and a probability variation state.

For example, a pachinko gaming machine is known in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be variably displayed at the same time, and a small hit is frequently generated in a probability changing state (for example, refer to Patent Document 1).

JP, 2008-033787, A

However, when a small hit game is executed in which the game balls hardly win, the variable display is not performed during the small hit game, which gives the player the impression that the game is not progressing smoothly. There is a risk. For this reason, the player may feel uncomfortable and the interest in the game may be reduced.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the enjoyment of the game.

(A) In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine capable of playing a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 capable of playing a game), and performs variable display. , A variable display executing means for deriving and displaying the display result (for example, a portion for executing steps S25A and S25B in the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) shown in FIG. 4), which is advantageous for the player. Advantageous state (for example, big hit game state), special state different from the advantageous state (for example, small hit game state), and non-special state different from the advantageous state and the special state (for example, first KT state) , A game state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 6 (specifically, a game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 6) that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a second KT state) that is more easily controlled to the special state than the non-special state. Is CPU1
03) in which the steps S120 to S128 are executed), determining means for determining whether or not to control the advantageous state (for example, the game control microcomputer 100), and the advantageous state before the determination of the determining means. It is provided with a determination means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100) for determining whether or not to be controlled by (for example, a look-ahead determination) and an effect execution means (for example, an effect control CPU 120), and the advantageous state and The special state is a state in which the variable display is not performed, and when the effect execution unit is controlled to the special state in the special state, the special effect corresponding to the control of the special state (for example, FIG. 10). -9
, The small hit notification image 020SH202, the small symbol 020SH201, and the winning effect image 020SH203) can be executed. When the special state is controlled in the non-special state, It is possible to execute a suggestion effect (for example, the pending change suggestion effect shown in (E) of FIG. 11-11) that suggests that the advantageous state is controlled.
According to such a configuration, even if the special state control (small hit game) is repeatedly executed in the non-special state (for example, the first KT state), the player is given an impression that the game is progressing smoothly. That is, it is possible to suppress the player from feeling uncomfortable with the progress of the game by controlling the special state in the non-special state. In particular, with such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest when the special state is controlled in the non-special state by the suggestive effect.

(1) A gaming machine according to another invention of the present application is a gaming machine capable of playing a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 capable of playing a game), and a gaming state controlling game state. State control means (for example, game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 6 (specifically, C
A variable display execution means (for example, a portion for executing steps S120 to S128 in PU 103) and a variable display of identification information (for example, a special symbol) and deriving and displaying a display result (for example,
The game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) that executes steps S25A and S25B shown in FIG. 4 and a performance executing means (for example, a performance control CPU 120) are provided, and the game state is provided. The control means has an advantageous state advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit game state), a special state different from the advantageous state (for example, a small hit game state), a non-special state (first KT state), and the non-state. It is possible to control to a special state (for example, the second KT state) that is more easily controlled to the special state than the special state, and the advantageous state and the special state are states in which the variable display is not performed, and the performance execution When the means is controlled to the special state in the special state, the special effect corresponding to the control of the special state (for example, the small hit notification image 020SH202 and the small symbol 020SH20 shown in FIG. 10-9).
1, and the winning effect image 020SH203) can be executed, and when the non-special state is controlled to the special state, a suggestion effect that is different from the special effect and suggests advantageous contents for the player ( For example, the pending change suggestion effect shown in (E) of FIG. 11-11 can be executed.
According to such a configuration, even if the special state control (small hit game) is repeatedly executed in the non-special state (for example, the first KT state), the player is given an impression that the game is progressing smoothly. That is, it is possible to suppress the player from feeling uncomfortable with the progress of the game by controlling the special state in the non-special state. In particular, according to such a configuration, the player is expected to be controlled in the advantageous state by the suggestive effect,
It is possible to improve the interest in controlling the special state in the non-special state.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above, the effect performing means can perform variable display of decoration identification information (for example, decorative pattern) in correspondence with the variable display of the identification information, and When the special state is controlled in the special state, a special display result (for example, a fixed symbol "1, 3, 5" which is a combination indicating a small hit game) is displayed as the display result of the decoration identification information, and the non-display is performed. When the special state is controlled in the special state, a predetermined display result (combination of decorative patterns indicating a gap) different from the special display result is displayed as the display result of the decoration identification information.

According to such a configuration, in the non-special state, it is difficult for the player to be advantageous even if the special state is controlled (because almost no expectation of winning a game ball at the special winning opening during a small hit game can be expected). ), by forcibly displaying a predetermined display result (for example, a lost pattern),
It is possible to avoid overly expecting the player.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above, with respect to the variable display that has not been started yet, it is determined whether the display result of the variable display is the display result indicating that the advantageous state is controlled. (For example, pre-reading determination) before start determination means, the effect execution means, the suggestion effect for suggesting the pre-start determination means (for example, as a suggestion effect based on the determination result of the pre-reading determination, FIG. It is possible to execute the hold change suggestion effect shown in (E) of -10.

According to such a configuration, since it is possible to perform the suggestive effect of making a suggestion regarding the pre-start determination means, it is possible to increase the expectation for the variable display that has not been started yet. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in controlling the special state in the non-special state.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above, a holding storage unit that stores information regarding variable display as holding storage information is provided, and the effect execution unit is stored in the holding storage unit. The pending storage information that is being displayed is displayed as a pending display (for example, a pending display 020SH206 shown in (A) of FIG. 11-10), and in the suggestive presentation, an effect production that acts on the pending display (for example, of FIG. 11-10). The action effect image 020SH213 shown in (E) can be executed, and there are a case where the display mode of the hold display changes and a case where the display mode of the hold display does not change.

According to such a configuration, a series of effects including an effect and an effect of changing the display mode of the hold display can be performed, so that the hold display can be focused and the expectation for the hold storage information can be increased. it can. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in controlling the special state in the non-special state.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4), a setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values having different degrees of advantage for a player is provided, and the effect execution is performed. The means is the suggestion effect for making a suggestion regarding the setting means (for example, (E) in FIG. 11-12).
The setting value suggestion image 020SH220) shown in FIG.

With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player guess the set value when the special state is controlled in the non-special state (for example, the first KT state). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in controlling the special state in the non-special state.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above, the non-special state includes a first
A non-special state (for example, a non-probable variation state: low probability/first KT state) and a second non-special state (for example, a probable variation state: high probability/first KT) that is more easily controlled to the advantageous state than the first non-special state.
State), and when the effect execution means is controlled to the first non-special state,
A common effect (chance time mode) can be executed when the second non-special state is controlled, and the suggestive effect suggests that the second non-special state is controlled (
For example, the probability variation suggestion image 020SH230 shown in (E) of FIGS.

According to such a configuration, it is common when controlled to either the first non-special state (for example, high probability/first KT state) or the second non-special state (for example, low probability/first KT state). When the production is executed and the special state is controlled, it is possible to suggest that the second non-special state is controlled (for example, the probability variation suggestion production is executed). Therefore, the first non-special state and the second non-special state When the state is controlled to the special state, the player can infer whether or not the control is performed in the second non-special state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in controlling the special state in the non-special state.

(7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6) above, the effect execution means, as the suggested effect, a plurality of types of suggested effects (for example, in (B) of FIG. 11-7). The odd setting suggestion, the even setting suggestion, and the suggestion of setting value 4 or more) can be executed, and the advantage of the content suggested to the player is different depending on which kind of the suggestion effect is executed. ..

According to such a configuration, since a plurality of types of suggestive effects can be executed, variations in the suggestive effects can be increased, so that the suggestive effects can be prevented from becoming monotonous effects. In addition, since the degree of advantage varies depending on the suggestion effect, the degree of attention of the player can be changed depending on the suggestion effect that is executed. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the interest in controlling the special state in the non-special state.

(8) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (7), the variable display execution means is
The variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and the variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) can be executed in parallel, and the game medium is in the starting area (for example, , A second start winning opening) and a second state in which the game medium is less likely to pass through the starting area, the first variable winning means (for example, the variable winning ball device shown in FIG. 1). 6B), the game state control means can be controlled to a predetermined state (for example, the first KT state) in which the first variable winning means is likely to change to the first state, and the effect execution means is the predetermined state. In the state, the suggestive effect can be executed when the special state (for example, the small hit game state) is controlled.

According to such a configuration, even if the control of the special state is repeatedly executed in the predetermined state (even if the small hit game in the first KT state in which the game balls hardly win) is repeatedly executed, the game progresses smoothly. It is possible to give the player the impression that he is doing, that is, it is possible to suppress the player from feeling uncomfortable with the progress of the game by controlling the special state in the predetermined state. In particular, according to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest when the special state is controlled in the predetermined state.

(9) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (8), there are an easy winning state (open state) in which the game ball is easy to win and a difficult winning state (closed state) in which the game ball is difficult to win, The variable second winning means (for example, the special variable winning ball device 17 shown in FIG. 1) is provided, and the second variable winning means can change to the easy winning state in the special state, and The executing means executes the suggestion effect in response to the second variable winning means changing to the easy winning state (for example, the opening timing of the special variable winning ball device 17).

With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult to focus on the opening of the second variable winning means (special variable winning ball device 17) and to focus on the suggestive effect. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the control of the special state in the non-special state (a small hit game in which the game ball hardly wins), and it is possible to reduce the interest of the game by controlling the special state. Can be suppressed.

(10) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (9), the game state control means has a game medium in a specific region in the special state (for example, a specific region in the special variable winning ball device 17: The advantageous state can be controlled on the basis of passing through the so-called V region.

According to such a configuration, in a gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state based on the fact that the game medium has passed a specific area, a non-special state (for example, a normal state in which gaming balls hardly win during a small hit game) Even if it is controlled to a special state in, it is possible to give the player the impression that the game is progressing smoothly, that is, the control of the special state in the non-special state makes the player feel uncomfortable with the progress of the game. You can hold it down. In particular, it is possible to improve the interest in controlling the special state in the non-special state.

(11) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (10), the effect executing means is
When the special state is controlled to the special state in the special state, the game medium has passed through the special area (for example, the discharge area) (for example, the game ball is detected by the second count switch 24 provided in the special winning opening). ), a predetermined effect corresponding to passage of the game medium through the special area (for example, a winning effect image 020SH2 shown in (C) of FIG. 11-11).
03) can be executed, and when the special state is controlled in the non-special state,
The predetermined effect is not executed regardless of whether or not the game medium has passed through the special area.

With such a configuration, when the special state is controlled in the special state (for example, the second KT state), the special area is passed (for example, the special variable winning port is won) by a predetermined effect.
The player can be encouraged to improve the interest in the special state. On the other hand, when the special state is controlled in the non-special state (for example, the first KT state), the game medium may rarely pass through the special area, but the non-special state is set in order not to execute the predetermined effect. It is possible to prevent the player from expecting passage of the special area when the special state is controlled in.

It is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of a timer interrupt process for game control. It is a flowchart showing an example of a first special symbol process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of character part control process processing. It is the flowchart which shows one example of production control main processing. It is the flowchart which shows one example of production control process treatment. It is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration example of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration of a payout control board. It is a rear view showing a pachinko gaming machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows a display result determination table. (1)-(3) is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of setting suggestion production, (4) is explanatory drawing which shows the table for determining the production mode of setting suggestion production. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of power-on processing. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of power-on processing. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of power-on processing. It is a timing diagram which shows the output period of a security signal. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a notification when the setting change flag is set at the time of power activation. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of power-on processing. (1) is an explanatory diagram showing a control when a power failure occurs before the setting value is determined, and (2) is a control diagram when a power failure occurs after the setting value is determined. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of the special variable winning a prize sphere device in the characteristic part 052IW. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards etc. in the characteristic part 052IW. It is an explanatory view for explaining a big hit probability and a small hit probability for every set value. It is an explanatory view for explaining a big hit probability and a small hit probability for every set value. It is an explanatory view showing a jackpot type determination table. It is an explanatory view showing a small hit type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern (variation time) of a special design and a decorative design. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern (variation time) of a special design and a decorative design. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern (variation time) of a special design and a decorative design. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the variation pattern table for small hits. It is an explanatory view for explaining an opening pattern of the special variable winning ball device. It is an explanatory view for explaining an opening pattern of a variable winning a prize ball device and a special variable winning a prize ball device in a KT state. It is an explanatory view for explaining an opening pattern of a variable winning a prize ball device and a special variable winning a prize ball device in a KT state. It is an explanatory view for explaining an opening pattern of a variable winning a prize ball device and a special variable winning a prize ball device in a KT state. It is the explanation drawing which shows one example of the contents of production control command. It is the explanation drawing which shows one example of the contents of production control command. It is a flowchart showing a first special symbol normal process. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st variation pattern setting processing. It is a flowchart showing a first special symbol variation process. It is a flowchart showing a first special symbol stop process. It is a flowchart showing a second special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart showing a second special symbol variation process. It is a flowchart showing a second special symbol stop process. It is a flow chart which shows accessory control normal processing. It is a flow chart which shows gate passage waiting processing. It is a flow chart which shows processing during a big hit opening. It is a flowchart showing a big hit ending process. It is a flowchart showing a small hit ending process. It is an explanatory view for explaining how to transition the gaming state. It is a flowchart showing an example of a normal symbol process processing. It is a flowchart showing a normal symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart showing a normal symbol stop process. It is a flow chart which shows pre-processing for opening an ordinary electric accessory. It is a flow chart which shows a concrete example of command analysis processing. It is a flow chart which shows a concrete example of command analysis processing. It is a flow chart which shows a concrete example of command analysis processing. It is a flow chart which shows a concrete example of command analysis processing. It is the flowchart which shows the indication production processing when over winning a prize. It is an explanatory view showing a concrete example of an over-winning suggestion effect determination table. It is a flowchart showing a suggestion process at the time of small winning. It is an explanatory view showing a concrete example of a small hit winning suggestive effect determination table. It is a flow chart which shows prize number display suggestion production processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a prize sphere number display suggestion production determination table. It is a flow chart which shows a prize sphere emphasis production processing. It is an explanatory view showing a concrete example of a prize ball number emphasis effect determination table. It is a flow chart which shows variable display start waiting processing. It is a flowchart which shows a variable display start setting process. It is an explanatory view for explaining a concrete example of a setting value suggestive effect determination table. It is an explanatory view for explaining a specific example of a small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect determination table. It is a flow chart which shows production processing during variable display. It is a flowchart showing a special figure hit waiting process. It is a flowchart showing a special figure hit waiting process. It is a flow chart which shows ending production processing. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the production mode of setting value suggestive production. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the production mode of small hit RUSH continuation suggestion production. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display mode of the right-handed notification. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the production mode of the over-winning suggestion production, the small hit winning suggestion production, and the prize ball number display suggesting production. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the production mode of the over-winning suggestion production, the small hit winning suggestion production, and the prize ball number display suggesting production. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the control of the variable display when it is a small hit in the variable display of the other special symbol during execution of the variable display of one special symbol. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol change processing in the modification 1. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd special symbol change processing in the modification 1. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the control of the variable display at the time of being a small hit in the variable display of the other special symbol during execution of the variable display of one special symbol in the modification 1. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol change processing in modification 2. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd special symbol change processing in modification 2. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the control of the variable display when it is a small hit in the variable display of the other special symbol during execution of the variable display of the one special symbol in the modification 2. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd special symbol change processing in modification 3. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the control of the variable display at the time of a small hit in the variable display of the other special symbol during execution of the variable display of one special symbol in the modification 3. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol change processing in modification 4. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd special symbol change processing in modification 4. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the transition of the game state and effect mode after the big hit game which concern on the characteristic part 020SH. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the production mode setting processing concerning the characteristic part 020SH. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the variable display corresponding display control processing concerning the characteristic part 020SH. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the initial color determination table and final color determination table of a variable display corresponding display. It is the flowchart which shows one example of the suggestion production execution processing which CPU120 for production control does when it is controlled to the small hitting game state. It is the flowchart which shows one example of the suggestion production execution processing which CPU120 for production control does when it is controlled to the small hitting game state. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the determination table of various suggestive effects. It is the flowchart which shows one example of the change production execution processing of the variable display correspondence display which CPU120 for production control does during variable display. It is an explanatory view showing an example of the transition of the effect screen in the small hit RUSH mode. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the transition of the effect which changes the display mode of a hold display during a chance time mode. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the transition of the gust production of the production which changes the display mode of a hold display during a chance time mode. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the set value suggestion production in chance time mode. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the probability change suggestion production in chance time mode. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the small hit opening timing and the execution timing of various suggestion productions.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (which is also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Structure of pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1, showing an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly divided into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes a gaming board surface, and a gaming machine frame (underframe) 3 that supports and fixes the gaming board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot into the game area by being shot from a predetermined hitting ball launching device.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (on the right side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1), a variable display (also called a special drawing game) of special symbols (also called a special drawing) as a plurality of types of special identification information is provided. First to do
The special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are provided. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbols are numbers or "9" indicating "0" to "9".
It is represented by a lighting pattern such as "-". The special pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off.

The “variable display” of the special symbol is, for example, variably displaying a plurality of types of special symbols (the same applies to other symbols described later). The fluctuation includes update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement/reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the variation of the special symbol or a normal symbol described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative pattern, which will be described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scroll-displayed or updated and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. In addition, the variation includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed in a blinking manner. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derived or derived display) as a display result (the same applies to variable display of other symbols described later). The variable display may be referred to as a variable display or a variable.

The special symbols variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A are also referred to as "first special symbols", and the special symbols variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B are also referred to as "second special symbols". In addition, the special figure game using the first special figure is called a "first special figure game", and the special figure game using the second special figure is also called a "second special figure game". The special symbol display device that performs variable display of the special symbol may be one type.

Further, below the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, a right hitting indicator 26 is provided for urging a right hitting operation to perform a firing operation aiming at the right side of the game area. There is. The right-handed indicator 26 is composed of, for example, an LED, and is turned on by the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) mounted on the main board 11 (see FIG. 2).

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), or the like, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may include a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special figure game and the second special figure game,
A variable display of a decorative pattern (a pattern showing numbers or the like) as a plurality of types of decoration identification information different from the special pattern is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game,
The decorative pattern is variably displayed (for example, vertical scroll display or update display) in each of the left, middle, and right decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Note that the special figure game and the variable display of the decorative pattern that are executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

Further, for example, on the screen of the image display device 5, there is provided a display area for displaying a suspension display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is suspended. In this example, the first hold display area 5A for displaying the hold display corresponding to the variable display of the first special figure, and the second hold display for displaying the hold display corresponding to the variable display of the second special figure. Area 5B is provided. A display area for displaying an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5. The hold display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display corresponding display corresponding to the variable display.

Further, on the right side of the image display device 5, a right-handing notification LED 37 for urging a right-handing operation is provided. The right-handing notification LED 37 is controlled by the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 (see FIG. 2).

The number of variable displays that are held is also called the number of held storages. The number of reserved memories corresponding to the first special figure game is also called a first reserved memory number, and the number of reserved memories corresponding to the second special figure game is also called a second reserved memory number. Further, the total of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as the total reserved storage number.

In addition, at a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first hold indicator 25 including a plurality of LEDs
A and the 2nd reservation indicator 25B are provided, the 1st reservation indicator 25A displays the 1st reservation memory number according to the lighting number of LED, and the 2nd reservation indicator 25B according to the lighting number of LED. The second number of reserved memories is displayed.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A having a first starting winning port is provided. The game ball that has won the first start winning opening is led to the back of the game board 2 and the first starting opening switch 2
Detected by 2A. When a game ball is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A, a predetermined number (1) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball based on this detection information.

A row of nails 19 is provided on the right side of the first start winning opening so that the game balls flowing down from the right side of the game area do not enter the area where the first starting winning opening is provided. Has been done.
Thus, the row of nails 19 for preventing the game ball flowing down from the right side of the game area from entering is provided, so that the game ball is operated to aim at the left side of the game area (so-called left hitting). The game ball can be won in the first starting winning opening only when the operation is performed.

In this example, the row of nails 19 is provided, so that the game ball can be won in the first start winning port only when the player makes a left-handed operation. I can't stop. For example, the game ball may be configured to be able to win in the first starting prize hole only when the player is left-handed because the first starting prize hole is provided on the left side of the game area. The mouth may be provided on the left side of the game area, and the row of nails 19 may also be provided so that the game ball can be won in the first start winning opening only when the left striking operation is performed.

A pass gate 41 is provided on the right side of the image display device 5. The game ball that has passed through the passage gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21.

Below the passage gate 41, a special variable winning ball device 7 forming a special winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 extends in the left-right direction in a slightly tilted state, and moves the plate-shaped bottom member formed as the bottom surface of the flow path through which the game ball flows down in the front-back direction,
The game ball is changed to an open state (also referred to as an open state) in which a game ball can be won in a special winning opening located below the bottom member, and a closed state (also referred to as a closed state) in which the game ball cannot be won. Special variable winning ball device 7
In the jackpot gaming state that occurs when the specific display result (jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, the bottom member is moved forward toward the front. The bottom member is moved backward from the closed state, and the opening control is performed to open the special winning opening which is the winning area.

Below the special variable winning ball device 7, there are provided a special variable winning ball device 17 forming a special winning port for a small hit, and a variable winning ball device 6B having a second starting winning port, as shown in FIG. As shown in, the special variable winning ball device 17 is arranged on the left side, and the variable winning ball device 6B is arranged adjacent to the right side on the right side. These special variable winning ball device 17 and variable winning ball device 6B
Is positioned below the bottom member by moving the plate-shaped bottom member that extends in the left-right direction in a slightly inclined state and is formed as the bottom of the flow path through which the game ball flows down in the front-back direction. The game ball is changed into an open state (also referred to as an open state) in which the game ball can be won in the special winning opening or the second start winning port and a closed state (also referred to as a closed state) in which the game ball cannot be won. The special variable winning ball device 17,
In the small hit game state that occurs when the predetermined display result (small hit design) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, the bottom member is moved forward toward the front. The bottom member is moved backward from the closed state, and the opening control is performed to open the special winning opening which is the winning area. In addition, the variable winning ball device 6B is a normal symbol display device 2
When the winning symbol 0 is displayed and displayed, the bottom member is moved backward from the closed state where the bottom member is moved forward, and the second start winning opening, which is the winning area, is opened. Open control is performed.

In this example, the special variable winning ball device 7, the special variable winning ball device 17, and the variable winning ball device 6
B is formed to have the same structure. Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the special variable winning ball device 7 is formed in such a manner that the bottom surface member is slightly inclined from the upper left to the lower right, so that the game ball dropped on the special variable winning ball device 7 is If the special variable winning ball device 7 is in the closed state, the special variable winning ball device 7 moves on the special variable winning ball device 7 from the upper left to the lower right, and falls on the variable winning ball device 6B below it.

Further, in this example, the special variable winning ball device 17 is slightly larger than the variable winning ball device 6B. Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 6B are formed such that the bottom surface members are slightly inclined from the upper right to the lower left, so the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 6B are variable. If the special variable winning ball device 17 or the variable winning ball device 6B is closed, the game ball on the winning ball device 6B moves from the upper right to the lower left on the special variable winning ball device 17 or the variable winning ball device 6B. Go. Further, as shown in FIG. 1, since the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 6B are arranged adjacent to each other, the special variable winning ball device 7 does not win the special winning ball device 6B. If the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 6B is moved backward and the second starting winning port is in the open state, the gaming ball dropped to the second starting winning port is a special variable winning ball. The game ball does not flow toward the device 17. On the other hand, if the second start winning hole is not open, the game ball moves on the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 6B and is guided to the special variable winning ball device 17. At this time, if the bottom member of the special variable winning ball device 17 is moved backward and the special winning opening is open, the gaming ball wins the special winning opening. Furthermore, if the special winning opening is not in the open state, the game ball moves on the bottom member of the special variable winning ball device 17 and drops to the out opening as it is.

Further, in this example, the special variable winning ball device 7, the special variable winning ball device 17, and the variable winning ball device 6B are formed with a plurality of restriction pieces for reducing the flow-down speed of the game balls flowing down on the bottom surface member. There is. In the present example, the special variable winning ball device 7, the special variable winning ball device 17, and the variable winning ball device 6B are provided with restriction pieces, so that the game flows down from the upper left to the lower right or from the upper right to the lower left. The flow direction of the game ball is changed so that the ball meanders with the movement of the front-back direction component, and the time required for the flow is delayed compared with the case without the restriction piece.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 1, the special variable winning ball device 17 is arranged on the left side, and the variable winning ball device 6B is arranged on the right side. The bottom member of the ball device 6B is formed so as to gently incline from the upper right to the lower left, and when the bottom member is not retracted and is in the closed state, the variable winning ball device 6B is changed to the special variable winning ball device. Since the game balls are configured to flow toward 17, in this sense, the variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the upstream side, and the special variable winning ball device 17 is provided on the downstream side. Can be said.

Inside the special winning opening, there is provided a switch (first count switch 23) capable of detecting a game ball winning in the special winning opening. When the game ball is detected by the first count switch 23, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball based on the detection information. Therefore, if the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to open and the special winning opening is opened,
This is in an advantageous state for the player. On the other hand, if the special variable winning a prize ball device 7 is controlled to be closed and the special winning opening is closed, it is impossible to pass the game ball to the special winning opening (enter) to obtain the prize ball. You will be at a disadvantage.

Inside the special winning opening, a switch (second count switch 24) capable of detecting the game ball winning in the special winning opening is provided. When a game ball is detected by the second count switch 24, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball based on the detection information. Here, when the game ball passes (enters) the special winning opening that is opened in the special variable winning ball device 17, the number of the winning balls is smaller than that when the gaming ball wins the big winning opening, For example, more prize balls are paid out than when the game balls pass (enter) other prize holes such as the first start prize hole 1 and the second start prize hole. Therefore, if the special variable winning a prize ball device 17 is controlled to be opened and the special winning opening is opened, it becomes a state advantageous to the player. On the other hand, if the special variable winning ball device 17 is closed and the special winning opening is closed, the player cannot get the winning ball by passing (entering) the game ball through the special winning opening. You will be at a disadvantage.

Further, in the second starting winning opening, a second starting opening switch 22B capable of detecting the game ball winning in the second starting winning opening is provided. When the game ball is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B, a predetermined number (one) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball based on the detection information.

Hereinafter, the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be collectively referred to as a starting winning opening or a starting opening.

In this pachinko gaming machine 1, the passage gate 41, the special variable winning ball device 7 (large winning hole), the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning port), and the special variable winning ball device 17 (special winning port). Is provided on the right side of the game area, so when the player is in a big hit game or in the KT state (so-called small hit time), the player aims at the right side of the game area (a so-called right hitting operation). )I do.

At predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four places on the left and right lower sides of the game area), there are provided general winning openings 10 which are always kept open by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when one of the general winning openings 10 is entered, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

The entry of a game ball into each prize hole including the general prize hole 10 is also referred to as a "prize". In particular, winning at the starting openings (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (on the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1), a normal symbol display device 2
0 is provided. As an example, the normal symbol display device 20 includes a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs a variable display of a normal symbol as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from the special symbol. Ordinary symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such variable display of ordinary symbols is also called a universal symbol game.

Above the normal symbol display device 20, a universal symbol holding display device 25C is provided. The universal figure pending display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of stored universal figure pending memories, which is the number of universal figure pending games whose execution is suspended, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, since the variation display of the normal symbol is executed based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41, the passage gate 41 plays a role as a normal starting area. However, even when the big hit symbol is derived and displayed, since the big hit game state is entered based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the pass gate 41, the pass gate 41 also plays a role as an operation area. Therefore, the passage gate 41 is configured as a dual-purpose gate that serves as both a normal starting region and an operating region.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill and a large number of obstacle nails that change the flow direction and speed of the game ball. At the lowermost part of the game area, there is provided an outlet for taking in the game balls that have not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting a sound effect or the like are provided at upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3.
And a frame LED 9 for game effect is provided in the periphery of the game area.

At a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2, a movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a hit ball operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball toward a game area by a hit ball launching device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, a gaming ball paid out as a prize ball or a gaming ball rented out by a predetermined ball lending machine is held (stored) so as to be supplied to a ball striking device. )
A hit ball supply plate (upper plate) is provided. Below the upper plate, there is provided a hit ball supply plate (lower plate) from which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, a stick controller 31A that can be held by a player and tilted is attached. Stick controller 31
A has a trigger button that the player can press. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, there is provided a push button 31B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation. The operation on the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the action (operation etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Outline of game progression)
In this pachinko gaming machine 1, when the gaming state is the normal state, it is advantageous for the player to perform a shooting operation (so-called left hitting operation) aiming at the left side of the game area. Pachinko machine 1
By the player's rotation operation on the hitting ball operation handle 30 provided for, the player performs a left hitting operation, and when the game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol display device 4A 1 Special game starts.

In addition, when the game ball enters into the starting winning opening (winning prize) during the period during execution of the special drawing game, or during the period when it is controlled to the big hitting game state or the small hitting game state described later (starting winning occurs, If the special drawing game based on the starting prize cannot be immediately executed), the special drawing game based on the entry is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the first special symbol game, a specific special symbol as a confirmed special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "
7”, the actual design differs depending on the type of jackpot described later. ) Is displayed as a stop, it is a "big hit". Also, if a special symbol different from the jackpot symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") is stopped and displayed, "missing" is indicated. Even in the first special figure game, the small hit symbol may be stopped and displayed at an extremely low rate, and the small hit symbol may be "small hit".

After the display result in the first special figure game becomes "big hit", the big hit game state is controlled as an advantageous state advantageous to the player, provided that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41.

In the big hit game state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is one of the elapse timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls entering the special winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It continues until the earlier of the two. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the special winning opening can be opened in one round, and is also referred to as an open upper limit period hereinafter. In this way, one cycle in which the special winning opening is opened is called a round (round game). In the big hit game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until a predetermined upper limit number (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

In the big hit game state, the player can get the prize ball by entering the game ball into the special winning opening. Therefore, the big hit game state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the big hit game state, and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous for the player.

In addition, the "big hit" is set to the big hit type. For example, opening the special winning opening (
There are multiple types of the number of rounds and maximum open period), and the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state (normal state, probability variation state (high probability state), KT state, high base state, etc.), and the jackpot type is set accordingly. Has been done. As a big hit type, a big hit type that can get many prize balls,
A jackpot type in which few or almost no prize balls can be obtained may be provided.

After the big hit game state is finished, it may be controlled to a certain variation state, a KT state, or a high base state according to the big hit type.

In the probability variation state (probability variation state), the probability variation control is performed so that the probability that the display result is "big hit" is higher than that in the normal state. The probability variation state is a state that is more advantageous to the player because it is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbol is improved and a "big hit" is likely to occur.

In the KT state, the KT control that is more likely to make a small hit than in the normal state is executed. With this pachinko gaming machine 1, since a certain amount of prize balls can be obtained even in the small hitting game state, compared to the large hitting game state, a small number of prize balls can be obtained, but this is an advantageous state for the player.

In the high base state, the control (time saving control) that shortens the average special map change time (period during which the special map changes) compared to the normal state is executed (time saving state), and it is called "Public hit" in the normal figure game. By increasing the probability of becoming higher than in the normal state, the control that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening (high opening control, high base control) is also executed. High base state, special design (especially the second
This is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbol is improved, which is advantageous for the player.

The probability change state, the KT state, and the high base state are continued until one of the ending conditions such as that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times and the next big hit game state has been started is satisfied. To do. The condition that the end condition is that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times is also referred to as the number of times cut (variation of the number of times probability).

The normal state is an advantageous state such as a big hit game state that is advantageous to the player, a game state other than a special state such as a probability change state, a KT state, and a high base state, and the display result in the special figure game is "big hit". The pachinko gaming machine 1 such as the probability of becoming the same as the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the initial setting state (for example, when the system is reset, when the predetermined return processing is not executed after power-on) is controlled. It is in a state of being.

When the big hit game is finished and the game state is controlled to the probability change state, the KT state, or the high base state,
It is advantageous for the player to aim the right side of the game area and perform a firing operation (right hitting operation). When the player makes a right-hand hitting operation by rotating the hitting ball operation handle 30 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the player and the gaming ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal figure game by the normal symbol display device 20 is started. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the previous execution period of the general education game (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but cannot immediately execute the general education game based on the passage) , The universal figure game based on the passage is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this ordinary figure game, if a specific ordinary symbol (a symbol for a regular symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the ordinary symbol is "per ordinary symbol". On the other hand, as a fixed ordinary symbol, if a regular symbol other than the regular symbol (normal symbol lost symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the ordinary symbol is "normal symbol lost".
Becomes When the "universal figure hit" is reached, the opening control is performed to open the variable winning ball device 6B for a predetermined period (the second start winning port is opened).

When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In the second special figure game, a specific special symbol as a confirmed special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "
7”, the actual design differs depending on the type of jackpot described later. ) Is stopped and displayed, it becomes "big hit", and if a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol, for example, "2") different from the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "small hit". In addition, if a special symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "missing symbol".

After the display result in the second special figure game is "big hit", the big hit game state is controlled as an advantageous state advantageous to the player, provided that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41. After the display result in the second special figure game is "small hit", the small hit game state is controlled.

In the small hitting game state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened in a predetermined opening manner. As with the big hit type, a small hit type may be provided for the "small hit".

After the small hit game state is over, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the special figure game display result is "small hit" is continuously controlled (however, "small hit" occurs If the special figure game at that time is the predetermined number of special figure games in the above-mentioned number of times cut, the game state is naturally changed).

The gaming state may change based on that the game ball has passed a specific area (for example, a specific area in the special winning opening) during the big hit gaming state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to be in a certain change state after the big hit game state.

(Progress, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects of notifying the progress of the game or enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The effect will be described below. In addition,
The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. However, in addition to or in place of the display, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and/or the frame LED 9 is performed.
May be performed by turning on/off the light, the operation of the movable body 32, or the like.

As effects to be executed according to the progress of the game, in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided in the image display device 5, the first special figure game or the first special figure game is displayed. In response to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as a fixed special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special figure game and the second special figure game, the fixed decorative symbol (a combination of three decorative symbols) becomes the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol. )
Is also stopped (displayed).

In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the variable display mode of the decorative pattern may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, with the reach mode, when the decorative design stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the big hit combination described later, the decorative design which is not yet stopped and displayed is variably displayed. Is an aspect that continues.

In addition, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative pattern. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the proportion of the display result (the display result of the special drawing game or the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern) that is a “big hit” (also called a big hit reliability or a big hit expectation degree) according to the effect mode. Different types of reach effects are executed. Reach productions include, for example, normal reach and super-reach, which has higher jackpot reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game is "big hit", a fixed decorative pattern which is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of the decorative design on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration) The display result of the variable display of the pattern is "big hit"). As an example,"
The same decorative pattern (for example, "7") is stopped and displayed together on a predetermined effective line in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right".

In the case of "probability variation jackpot" that is controlled to the probability variation state after the jackpot gaming state is finished, odd decorative patterns (for example, "7", etc.) are also stopped and displayed, and after the jackpot gaming state is transformed to the probability variation state. In the case of "uncertain variation big hit (normal big hit)" that is not controlled, an even number of decorative patterns (
For example, "6" and the like) may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, the odd decorative pattern is also referred to as a probability variation design, and the even decoration pattern is also referred to as a non-probability variation design (normal design). After the reach mode is achieved with the non-probability variation pattern, the promotion effect that finally becomes the “probability variation jackpot” may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", as a display result of the variable display of the decorative design on the screen of the image display device 5, a fixed decorative design (for example, "" 1 3 5”) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is “small hit”). As an example, "left", "middle", "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C,
The decorative pattern forming the chance line is stopped and displayed on a predetermined effective line in 5R. It should be noted that the display result of the special drawing game is "big hit" of some big hit types (big hit type of big hit game state of a mode similar to small hit game state) and when it is "small hit". , A common fixed decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special drawing game is “miss”, the variable display mode of the decorative design does not become the reach mode, but as the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (“ (Also referred to as "non-reach-miss".) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes "non-reach-miss"). Further, when the display result is "miss", after the variable display mode of the decorative pattern becomes the reach mode, as a display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern, a predetermined reach combination other than the jackpot combination ("reach miss") (Also referred to as) fixed decoration pattern may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decoration pattern becomes “reach lost”).

The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect that gives a notice of the jackpot reliability is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern. The notice production includes a notice production that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display being executed and a look-ahead notice production that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display in which execution is suspended). As the prefetching notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display corresponding display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the normal mode may be executed.

Further, in the image display device 5, once the decorative design is temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative design, and then the variable display is resumed, one variable display can be simulated like multiple variable display. You may make it perform a pseudo continuous production.

Even during the big hit game state, a big hit mid-game production for notifying the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit performance, an effect for notifying the number of rounds or a promotion effect showing that the value of the big hit game state is improved may be executed. In addition, during the small hitting game state, the small hitting production which notifies the small hitting game state is executed. In addition, during the small hitting game state, in some big hitting type (the big hitting type of the big hitting game state of the form similar to the small hitting game state, for example, the big hitting type which makes the following game state the high-precision state) big hitting game By executing a common effect depending on the state, the player may not be able to know whether the present is in the small hitting game state or the big hitting game state. In such a case, by performing a common effect after the end of the small hit game state and after the end of the big hit game state, it is not possible to distinguish between the high-accuracy state and the low-precision state. May be.

Further, for example, when the special drawing game or the like is not executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with, for example, a main board 11, a performance control board 12, a sound control board 13, an LED control board 14, a relay board 15, etc. as shown in FIG. Besides,
On the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and progresses in the above-mentioned game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of special figure game (including hold management), execution of general figure game (including hold management), big hit It has a function of controlling a gaming state, a small hitting gaming state, a gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 is a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111.
And so on.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 and a RAM (Random A).
ccess Memory) 102, CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, and random number circuit 10
4 and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform a process of controlling the progress of the game (a process of realizing the function of the main board 11). At this time, the ROM 10
1 stores various data (variation patterns described later, effect control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various determinations described below), and the RAM 102 is used as a main memory. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are saved for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped partially or entirely. Alternatively, all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts the numerical value data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game in an updatable manner. The game random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 is, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, and various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, ordinary symbol display device 20, first hold) Control (drive) the display device 25A, the second hold display device 25B, the universal figure hold display device 25C, etc.
Output signal for transmitting a control signal and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 includes various switches for detecting game balls (gate switch 21, starting opening switch (first starting opening switch 22A and second starting opening switch 22B), count switch (first counting switch 23 and second counting switch 24). )) is taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100 by taking in a detection signal (a detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on due to a game ball passing or entering). The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

The solenoid circuit 111 receives a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81, the solenoid 82, the solenoid 83, etc.) from the game control microcomputer 100 for the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric accessory and the special winning opening door. It is transmitted to the solenoid 82 and the solenoid 83 for the special winning opening.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as a part of the control of the progress of the game, production control board (command for designating (notifying) the progress status of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The production control command output from the main board 11 is
It is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of the special figure game (including a big hit type), a variation pattern used when the special figure game is executed (details will be described later). ))
, The status of the game (for example, the start and end of variable display, the status of opening the special winning opening, the occurrence of winnings, the number of held memories, the game status), the command for specifying the occurrence of an error, and the like.

The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board that is independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game, It has a function of executing various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery.

On the effect control board 12, an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125 are mounted.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121, thereby performing a process together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above-described function of the effect control board 12, and an effect to be executed). (Including the determination of). At this time, ROM
Various data (data such as various tables) stored in 121 is used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

The CPU 120 for effect control includes the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35.
The display control unit 123 may be instructed to perform an effect based on a detection signal from B (a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected, and is a signal that appropriately indicates the operation content).

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor) and a CGROM (Character G).
It is provided with an enerator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes an effect based on an instruction to execute an effect from the effect control CPU 120.

The display control section 123 supplies the effect image to the image display device 5 by supplying the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.
To display. The display control unit 123 further outputs a sound in synchronization with the display of the effect image and turns on/off the frame LED 9 and the right-handing notification LED 37. Therefore, the sound control signal (a signal that specifies a sound to be output) is voice-controlled. The LED signal is supplied to the substrate 13 or an LED signal (a signal designating the lighting/extinguishing state of the LED) is supplied to the LED control substrate 14. In addition, the display control unit 12
3 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit for driving the movable body 32.

The voice control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L, 8R, drives the speakers 8L, 8R based on the sound designating signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designating signal from the speakers 8L, 8R. Let

The LED control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the frame LED 9 and the right-handing notification LED 37, drives the frame LED 9 and the right-handing notification LED 37 based on the LED signal, and specifies the LED signal. The frame LED 9 and the right hitting notification LED 37 are turned on/off.
In this way, the display control unit 123 controls audio output and turning on/off of the LED.

It should be noted that the production control CPU 120 executes audio output, control of turning on/off the LED (supply of sound designation signal or LED signal, etc.), control of the movable body 32 (supply of signal for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do it.

The random number circuit 124 uses various random number values (random numbers for effect) used to execute various effects.
Numerical data indicating is counted updatable. The effect random number may be updated by the effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 has an input port for taking in the production control command transmitted from the main board 11 or the like, and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, L, etc.).
And an output port for transmitting the ED signal).

Substrates other than the main substrate 11, such as the effect control substrate 12, the sound control substrate 13, and the LED control substrate 14, are also referred to as sub substrates. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function like the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 11)
First, the main operation of the main board 11 will be described. When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes the game control main processing. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing the game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets an interrupt prohibition (step S1). Then, necessary initial setting is performed (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, internal device (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.) register settings, settings for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3).
). The clear switch is mounted on, for example, a power supply board. When the power is turned on with the clear switch turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. When the output signal from the clear switch is on (
Step S3; Yes) and initialization processing (step S8) are executed. In the initialization process, C
The PU 103 is an RA that clears the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102.
M clear processing is performed and an initial value is set in the work area.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control command is received, the effect control CPU 120 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized, for example, in the image display device 5.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), RAM
It is determined whether backup data is stored in the 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power cut), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop time process immediately before the power supply is stopped due to the stop of the power supply. In this power supply stop process, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes a process of adding an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and a process of backing up various data. The data to be backed up is various data (including various flags, various timer states, etc.) for advancing the game.
In addition, the status of the backup flag and the error detection code are also included. In step S4, it is determined whether the backup flag is on. RAM1 with backup flag off
If the backup data is not stored in 02 (step S4; No), the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes),
The CPU 103 performs a data check on the backed up data (performed using an error detection code) and determines whether or not the data is normal (step S5). In step S5, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data at the time when the power supply is stopped, for example, based on the parity bit and the checksum. If it is determined that these match, the RAM 10
It is determined that the data of 2 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply was stopped, so the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), CP
U103 performs a recovery process (step S6) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply was stopped. In the restoration process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents of the RAM 102 (contents of backed up data). As a result, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped, and if the special symbol is changing, the variation of the special symbol is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be.

And CPU103 transmits the production control command which directs recovery from power failure to production control board 12 (Step S7). In accordance with this, a production control command for designating a backed-up game state before power interruption, and a production control for designating the display result of the special figure game being executed when the special figure game is being executed. You may make it transmit a command. These commands can use the same commands as the commands set for transmission in the special symbol process processing described later. When the production control CPU 120 receives the production control command that specifies the time of restoration from the power interruption, for example, the image display device 5 notifies that the recovery from the power interruption has been performed or is being restored from the power interruption. The screen is displayed to Production control CPU120,
Appropriate screen display may be performed based on the effect control command.

After finishing the restoration process or the initialization process and transmitting the production control command to the production control board 12, the CPU 103 executes the random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (
Step S10). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt is taken at regular intervals (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and interrupts are permitted (step S12). ). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, the interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 10 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms).
3 and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 10
3, the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, the first count switch 23, and the second count switch 24 are first executed through a switch circuit 110 by executing a predetermined switch process. It is determined whether or not the detection signals are received from the various switches (step S21). Then, by executing a predetermined main side error processing, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be issued if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of jackpots) supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1, starting information (starting) Information indicating the number of winnings)
, And data such as probability variation information (information indicating the number of times the probability has changed) and the like (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). Thereafter, the CPU 103 executes the first special symbol process process (step S25A). C
The PU 103 executes the first special symbol process process for each timer interrupt, so that execution and suspension management of the first special symbol game are realized (details will be described later). Also, the CPU 103
Executes the second special symbol process process (step S25B). The CPU 103 executes the second special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, so that execution and suspension management of the second special symbol game are realized. In addition, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, it is possible to simultaneously perform the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol in parallel.

Subsequent to the first special symbol process process and the second special symbol process process, the CPU 103 executes the accessory control process process (step S25C). When the CPU 103 executes the accessory control process process for each timer interrupt, control of the big hit game state and the small hit game state, control of the game state, etc. are realized (details will be described later).

Following the accessory control process process, a normal symbol process process is executed (step S26).
). The CPU 103 executes the normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, and based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41), the management of execution and suspension of the general figure game, This makes it possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "universal figure hit". The execution of the general figure game is performed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of general figure reservations is displayed by turning on the general figure reservation display 25C.

After the normal symbol process process is executed, as a part of the game control timer interrupt process, a process when power failure occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, etc. may be performed. Then C
The PU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set the transmission of the effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted, and then the game control timer interrupt process is ended.

Although not shown in FIG. 4, in the game control timer interrupt processing, a test terminal is a processing for outputting a test signal for making it possible to confirm the control state of the gaming machine outside the gaming machine. Processing is also executed. In the test terminal processing, the CPU 103 performs control to output a test signal (right-handed test signal) that can specify that the right-handed operation is being performed. Specifically, in the test terminal processing, the CPU 103 performs control to output a right-handed test signal during the big hit game, the small hit game based on the variation display of the second special symbol, and the KT state. On the other hand, in the test terminal processing, the CPU 103 does not perform the control of outputting the right-handed test signal during the small hitting game based on the variable display of the first special symbol.

FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of a process executed in step S25A shown in FIG. 4 as the first special symbol process process. In this first special symbol process processing, C
The PU 103 first executes a first start winning determination process (step S101A).

In the first start winning a prize determination process, the occurrence of the start winning to the first starting winning opening is detected, and the RAM 10
A process of storing the reservation information in the predetermined area 2 and updating the first reservation storage number is executed. When the start winning award to the first start winning a prize mouth occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the big hit type) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as the hold information in the first hold storage buffer provided in the RAM 102. To be done. In addition, a process of pre-reading a display result or a variation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After storing the hold information and the first hold storage number, a transmission for transmitting an effect control command for designating a determination result such as occurrence of a start winning, a first hold storage number, and a look-ahead determination on the effect control board 12. Settings are made. The effect control command at the time of the start winning set to be transmitted in this way is effect control from the main board 11 by, for example, executing the command control processing of step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the first special symbol process processing is completed. It is transmitted to the substrate 12.

After executing the first start winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S110A to S113A in accordance with the value of the first special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In addition, each processing of the first special symbol process processing (step S
In 110A to S113A), the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

In the first special symbol normal process of step S110A, the value of the first special symbol process flag is "0"
It is executed at the time of (initial value). In the first special symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game, based on the presence or absence of the hold information. Further, in the first special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for display result determination, whether the display result of the first special symbol or decorative symbol is "big hit" or "small hit" and "big hit" In this case, the jackpot type is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the first special symbol normal processing, a fixed special symbol (either a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game is set in correspondence with the determined display result. .. After that, the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the first special symbol normal process ends.

When making various decisions based on the random number values, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which decision values to be compared with random number values are assigned to decision results) are referenced. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

In the first variation pattern setting process of step S111A, the value of the first special figure process flag is "
1". This first variation pattern setting process is based on a pre-determined result of whether or not the display result is "big hit" or "small hit", and the like. It includes a process of determining the variation pattern as one of a plurality of types by using. In the first fluctuation pattern setting process, when the fluctuation pattern is determined, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to “2”, and the first fluctuation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern is the execution time of the special figure game (special figure variation time) (also the execution time of variable display of the decorative pattern), the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern (whether or not reach etc.), the variable display of the decorative pattern. Is specified, and is also referred to as a variable display pattern.

In the first special symbol variation process of step S112A, the value of the first special symbol process flag is "2"
Is executed when. In this first special symbol variation process, the setting process for changing the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and the elapsed time after the first special symbol starts to vary is measured. It includes processing to do. Further, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the first special symbol reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the first special symbol variation process ends. To do.

In this example, since the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel, for example, the first special symbol variation process (step S112A), the first
When the special symbols are being displayed in a variable manner, there may be small hits in the variable display of the second special symbols which are controlled by a small hit game. In this case, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) determines whether or not the small hit game is in progress (specifically, the value of the second special figure process flag is before the small hit opening). Process ~ determine whether or not the value is equivalent to the small hit end process), if the small hit game is not changing the value of the first special symbol process flag from the value corresponding to the first special symbol variation process Thus, if the small hit game is not in progress, the value of the first special symbol process flag can be updated to a value corresponding to the next first special symbol stop process. By performing such control, the variable display of the first special symbol is interrupted during the small hit game based on the variable display of the second special symbol, and the variable display of the first special symbol is restarted after the end of the small hit game. Control to do so. Incidentally, not only such control, for example, during the small hit game based on the variation display of the second special symbol, the process of measuring the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the first special symbol is interrupted (of the timer The update may be interrupted).

Further, for example, the small hit ending period as the small hit end processing period may be configured to be different depending on the gaming state. For example, in a normal state, if configured to suspend the variable display of the first special symbol, the suspension period of the variable display of the first special symbol becomes long, and the execution period and the suspension period of the variable display of the first special symbol If the difference becomes large, it is necessary to absorb the interruption period due to the stop of swinging of the decorative pattern, etc., resulting in a discomfort for the player. Therefore, in the normal state, it is desirable that the small hit ending period be shorter than that in the KT state (first KT state, second KT state). In this case, for example, the small hitting ending period may be 0.5 seconds in the normal state, while the small hitting ending period may be 3 seconds in the KT state.

Further, in the case of configuring as described above, for example, in the first KT state, since the game ball is practically difficult to win in the small hit control and no special effect is produced, the small hit ending period is shorter than that in the second KT state. It may be configured to. On the other hand, in the second KT state, the game ball is easy to win in the small hit control and an effect for emphasizing the small hit control is executed. Therefore, the small hit ending period may be made longer than that in the first KT state. . In this case, for example, the small hitting ending period may be 0.5 seconds in the first KT state, while the small hitting ending period may be 3 seconds in the second KT state.

Further, as for the small hit fanfare period as the small hit opening pre-processing period, the length of the period may be changed depending on the game state, as in the above small hit ending period.

In the first special symbol stop process of step S113A, the value of the first special symbol process flag is "3"
Is executed when. In this first special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A to stop the fluctuation of the first special symbol, the stop display of the fixed special symbol that is the display result of the first special symbol (
It includes a process of setting for derivation). When the display result is "big hit", setting processing for starting the big hit game is performed. On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", processing for starting the small hit game is performed. Then, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "Small hit" or "Loss", the game state is updated when the probability variation state, the KT state, or the high base state is controlled, and when the end of the number of cuts is satisfied. . When the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated, the first special symbol stop process ends.

The process executed in the second special symbol process process (step S25B) is the same as the process executed in the first special symbol process process (step S25A). That is, in the first special symbol process process described in FIG. 5, if "first" is read as "second", the second special symbol process process will be described. Further, each random number value extracted in the first start winning determination process of the second special symbol process process (step S25B) is stored in the second holding storage buffer provided in the RAM 102 as holding information.

In this example, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel, so, for example, the second special symbol variation process is performed and the variation of the second special symbol is changed. When it is being displayed, it may be a small hit in the variable display of the first special symbol and may be controlled to a small hit game. In this case, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103
) Determines whether or not the small hit game is being played (specifically, whether or not the value of the first special figure process flag is a value corresponding to the small hit opening pre-process to the small hit end process) Judge), if during the small hit game, do not change the value of the second special figure process flag from the value corresponding to the second special symbol variation processing, if not during the small hit game, the second special figure process The value of the flag can be updated to a value corresponding to the next second special symbol stop processing. By performing such control, the first
During the small hit game based on the variable display of the special symbol, the variable display of the second special symbol is interrupted, and it is controlled so that the variable display of the second special symbol is restarted after the end of the small hit game. Incidentally, not only such control, for example, during the small hit game based on the variable display of the first special symbol,
You may comprise so that the process which measures the elapsed time after a 2nd special symbol starts fluctuating may be interrupted (the update of a timer may be interrupted).

Incidentally, with regard to the small hit control based on the variable display of the second special symbol, the length of the small hit fanfare period or the small hit ending period may be changed depending on the game state.

FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of a process executed in step S25C shown in FIG. 4 as the accessory control process process. In this accessory control process processing, the CPU 10
3 is step S12 in accordance with the value of the accessory control process flag provided in the RAM 102.
Any one of the processes of 0 to S128 is selected and executed. In addition, in each process (steps S120 to S128) of the accessory control process process, a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The accessory control normal process of step S120 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is "0". In this accessory control normal process, whether or not the setting for starting the big hit game is monitored, and if the setting for starting the big hit game is made, the process for starting the big hit game is performed. The value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "1".

The gate passage waiting process of step S121 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is "1". In this gate passage waiting process, control for waiting passage of the game ball to the passage gate 41 is performed. When the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 41 is detected, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "2".

The jackpot opening preprocessing of step S122 is executed when the accessory control process flag is "2". This big hit opening preprocessing includes processing for starting the execution of the round in the big hit game state and setting the big winning opening in the open state based on that the display result is "big hit" Has been. When the special winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, an open upper limit period for opening the special winning opening and an upper limit number of executions of the round are set according to which the big hit type is. When these settings are completed, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "3", and the big hit opening preprocessing is completed.

The big hit opening process in step S123 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is "3". In this big hit opening process, a process of measuring the elapsed time after the special winning opening is opened, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the first count switch 23, and the like are determined. It includes processing for determining whether it is time to return the winning opening from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the special winning opening to the closed state, after performing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "4". , The big hit opening process is ended.

The jackpot opening post-processing of step S124 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is "4". This big jackpot post-processing, processing to determine whether the number of executions of the round to open the big winning opening has reached the set upper limit number of executions, when the maximum number of executions has been reached, the big hit game state It includes the process of setting to terminate the. When the round execution count has not reached the upper limit execution count, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "3", while when the round execution count reaches the upper limit execution count, the accessory control process The value of the flag is updated to "5". When the value of the accessory control process flag is updated, the jackpot opening post-processing ends.

The big hit ending process of step S125 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is "5". This big hit end processing, waiting processing until the waiting time corresponding to the period during which the ending effect as the effect operation for notifying the end of the big hit game state is executed, or a certain change corresponding to the end of the big hit game state It includes control, KT control, processing for performing various settings for starting high base control, and the like. When such a setting is made, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end process ends.

The small hit opening pre-processing of step S126 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is "6". The small hit opening pre-processing includes processing for setting the special winning opening in the small hit game state based on that the display result is "small hit". At this time, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "7", and the small hit opening pretreatment ends.

The small hitting open process of step S127 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is "7". This small hit opening process is the process of measuring the elapsed time after opening the special winning opening and the timing of returning the special winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time etc. A process for determining whether or not it is included. When the special winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small hitting game state comes, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "8", and the small hitting open process ends.

The small hit ending process of step S128 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is "8". This small hitting end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period during which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hitting game state is executed. Here, when the small hit game state ends, the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit game state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hitting game state has elapsed, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "0", and the small hitting end processing ends.

(Main operation of the production control board 12)
Next, the main operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 7. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 7 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71) to clear the RAM 122 and set various initial values, and to the effect control board 12. Register settings of the installed CTC (counter/timer circuit) are performed. Further, the initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control processing, control for performing an initial operation of the movable body 32 such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation are executed.

Then, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73).
). The timer interrupt flag is set for a predetermined time (for example, 2
It is set to the ON state each time (milliseconds) has elapsed. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and stands by.

On the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated each time a predetermined time has elapsed. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt that occurs when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on,
Although the CPU 120 for effect control automatically sets the interrupt disabled, it is desirable to issue an interrupt disable command (DI command) when using a CPU that does not automatically disable the interrupt. The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to the interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, the effect control command is fetched from a predetermined input port of the input ports included in the I/O 125 that receives the control signal transmitted from the main substrate 11 via the relay substrate 15. The effect control command fetched at this time is stored in the effect control command receiving buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the production control CPU 120 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is turned on in step S73 (step S73; Ye
In step s), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to turn it off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, the main board 1
After reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 and stored in the effect control command receiving buffer, the setting and control corresponding to the read effect control commands are performed. Be seen. For example, the read effect control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or the RAM 1 so that the effect control command received, the content specified by the effect control command, and the like can be confirmed by the effect control process processing.
The reception flag provided in 22 is turned on. When the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background according to the game state.

After the command analysis process is executed in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, an operation of displaying an effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, an operation of outputting sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation of a decorative light emitting body such as the frame LED 9 and a decorative LED, and driving of the movable body 32. Controls for operating various effect devices such as actions are performed. Further, with respect to the control contents of the effect operation using various effect devices, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed according to the effect control commands transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the effect control process processing of step S76, effect random number updating processing is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by software. Then, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be executed before returning to the processing in step S73.

FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 7 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 8, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-reading notice production are performed based on the effect control command at the time of start winning transmitted from the main board 11. Further, a process for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold memories specified from the effect control command.

After executing the processing of step S161, the CPU 120 for effect control, for example, the RAM 12
The following steps S170 to S1 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in No. 2
Any of the 77 processings is selected and executed.

The variable display start waiting process of step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of a decorative design in the image display device 5, based on whether or not a command or the like specifying start of variable display is received from the main board 11. Etc. are included. Image display device 5
When it is determined to start the variable display of the decorative pattern in, the value of the effect process flag is set to "
1", and the variable display start waiting process ends.

The variable display start setting process of step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the decorative display variable display (fixed decorative pattern), the variable display mode of the decorative design, the reach effect and various The presence/absence of execution of various effects such as a notice effect, its mode, and execution start timing are determined. Then, the effect control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result or the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the variable display of the decorative pattern, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process ends. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start the variable display of the decorative design in response to the instruction to start the variable display of the decorative design.

The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display effect process, the effect control CPU 120
By instructing the display control unit 123, an effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5, the movable body 32 is driven, and the voice control board 13 is operated. Speaker 8L, 8 by the output of the command (sound effect signal) to
Various types of variable display of decorative patterns, such as outputting a sound or a sound effect from R, turning on/off/blinking the frame LED 9 and the decorative LED by outputting a command (illumination signal) to the LED control board 14, Perform performance control. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the variable display end of the decorative pattern is read from the effect control pattern, or a command designating that the fixed decorative pattern is stopped and displayed from the main board 11 is received. Corresponding to what has been done, the fixed decorative design which is the display result of the decorative design is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the variable display effect effect processing ends.

The special figure winning waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "3". In the special figure winning waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the effect control command for designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when the production control command for designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received, if the command designates the start of the big hit game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6." Update to ". On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hitting game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4" which is a value corresponding to the effect processing during the small hitting. Also, when the waiting time for receiving the command does not arrive without receiving the command designating the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is “miss”. Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0” which is the initial value. When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the special figure hit waiting process ends.

The effect process during the small hit in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is "4". In the effect processing during the small hit, the effect control CPU 120
For example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect contents in the small hit game state is set, and various effect controls in the small hit game state are executed based on the set contents. Further, in the small hitting production process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to end the small winning game state, the value of the production process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small winning finish production. is there"
It updates to "5", and finishes the effect processing during the small hit.

The small hit end production process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is "5". In this small hit end production process, production control CPU 120
Sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the setting contents. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value, and the small hit end effect processing is ended.

The big hit midfield effect process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". In this big hit mid production processing, the production control CPU 120 sets, for example, a production control pattern or the like corresponding to the production contents in the big hit gaming state, and executes various production controls in the big hit gaming state based on the set contents. Further, in the big hit midfield effect process, the value of the effect control process flag is a value corresponding to the ending effect process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the big hit game state from the main board 11. It updates to "7" and finishes the big hit midfield effect process.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending effect process, effect control CPU 120
Sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls of the ending effect at the end of the big hit game state based on the setting contents. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value, and the ending effect process is ended.

(Variation of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic description is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as a prize based on the occurrence of a prize, but encloses the game medium and gives a score based on the occurrence of a prize. It may be an enclosed game machine.

What is displayed during variable display of special symbols is one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-")
Alternatively, variable display may be performed by repeating display and extinction of the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the display result may not include the symbol "-").
..

In the above basic description, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as a gaming machine, but a predetermined number of bets is set by inserting a medal, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, A slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to a player (for example, a big bonus when the stop symbol combination becomes a specific symbol combination when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by , Regular bonus, RT, AT, A
The present invention can be applied to a slot machine in which one or more of RT and CZ (hereinafter, bonus etc.) are mounted.

The program and data for implementing the present invention are not limited to the form in which they are distributed and provided to a computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by a removable recording medium, and the computer device or the like in advance. It may be distributed by being installed in the storage device included in. Further, the program and data for implementing the present invention may be distributed by being downloaded from another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The game can be executed not only by mounting a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via the communication line in the internal memory or the like. Alternatively, the hardware resources of other devices may be directly used on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Further, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In addition, in the present specification, expressions for comparison of various ratios such as a performance execution ratio (“high”, “
Expressions such as “low” and “different” may include that one is “0%”. For example, it is also included that one is a ratio of "0%" and the other is a ratio of "100%" or a ratio less than "100%".

[Explanation on Characteristic Part 21TM]
Next, the characteristic part 21TM will be described. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, a main board 11, a performance control board 12, a terminal board (information output board) 21TM01 as shown in FIG. 9-1.
Various control boards such as 6 are mounted. Also, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a main board 1
Relay board 15 for relaying various control signals transmitted between 1 and the effect control board 12.
And so on. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, a launch control board, and an interface board are arranged on the back surface of the game board 2 or the like of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

As shown in FIG. 2 described above, on the main board 11, the first starting port switch 22A and the second starting port switch 22B, and the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, etc. Various parts are connected, and the production control board 12 has speakers 8L, 8R, and a frame L.
Although various effect devices such as the ED 9 are connected, they are omitted in FIG. 9-1.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and as shown in FIG.
It is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a state of being housed in the M201, and various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are mounted. The main substrate 11 is mainly
An example of command information is given to the sub-side control board including the function of setting a random number used in the special figure game, the function of inputting a signal from a switch or the like arranged at a predetermined position, the effect control board 12 and the like. It has a function of outputting and transmitting control commands as control signals, and a function of outputting various information to the hall management computer. Moreover, the main board 11 performs lighting/extinguishing control of each LED (for example, segment LED) which comprises the 1st special symbol display device 4A and the 2nd special symbol display device 4B, and the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol. The variable display of a predetermined display symbol such as controlling the variable display of the normal symbol display 20 and controlling the variable display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 20 by turning on/off/coloring the normal symbol display 20. It also has a control function.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-3, the main board 11 is provided with a display monitor 21TM029 which can be visually recognized from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the display monitor 21TM029 displays various winning information regarding winning. It also has a display function. A display changeover switch 21TM030 is provided on the left side of the display monitor 21TM029.
The information displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 can be switched by operating the TM030.

The main board 11 incorporates various signals such as a power-off signal, a clear signal, and a reset signal in addition to the detection signals from the game control microcomputer 100 and various switches for detecting a game ball, for example. An information output circuit 112 for outputting various signals such as a security signal from the switch circuit 110 transmitting to 100 and the terminal board 21TM016 is mounted.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-3, the main substrate 11 shown in FIG. 9-1 is enclosed in a substrate case 21TM201 made of a transparent synthetic resin material, and a display monitor 21TM029 is provided at the center of the main substrate 11. (For example, 7 segments) are arranged, and a display changeover switch 21TM030 is arranged on the right side of the display monitor 21TM029. The display monitor 21TM029 and the display changeover switch 21TM030 are arranged on the front surface when the main board 11 is viewed. A lock switch 21TM051 (see FIG. 9-1) for switching to a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode, which will be described later, is provided in the lower center of the rear surface of the main board 11. Main board 11
Cannot be visually recognized when the gaming machine frame 3 is not opened. Therefore, the front surface when visually recognizing the main board 11 means that the back surface side of the gaming board 2 when the gaming machine frame 3 is opened is visually recognized. Is different from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the front surface when visually recognizing the main board 11 and the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be common.

In addition, the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), each prize hole (large prize hole, second start prize hole, first start prize hole, first to fourth general prize hole, hereinafter, "entry area". (Also referred to as) the number of game balls that have entered the game ball, and various winning information such as continuous ratio and winning ratio is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029, and these winning information are displayed. By doing so, various winning information such as consecutive ratios and winning ratios after installation at the game hall can be confirmed. That is, on the maker side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is usual to design the gaming board surface so that the gaming balls enter the general winning opening (pass the test) at a predetermined frequency. Also,
When conducting the test, it is confirmed whether or not the game ball has entered the general winning opening at a predetermined frequency. Furthermore, after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed, it is confirmed what kind of adjustment has been made, and as a result of the adjustment, whether the game ball has entered the general winning opening at the frequency as designed. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is possible to recognize what kind of adjustment was made in the pachinko gaming machine 1 after the installation.

The power supply board is enclosed in a board case made of a transparent synthetic resin material.
A clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM05 on the lower right side of the rear surface of the power supply board, which functions as a setting switch for changing set values such as a winning probability (ball-out rate) of a jackpot described later.
2 and a power switch 21TM055 are provided. A clerk of the game hall operates the power switch 21TM055 while the power supply voltage is not supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 1, so that the main board 11, the effect control board 12, the payout control board 21TM037, and the like are predetermined. Operating voltage is supplied. Furthermore, at the timing when the power switch 21TM055 is operated,
If the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is operated, a clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100, and an initialization process (RAM clear) described later is executed. By arranging the power switch 21TM055 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 on the same power board, the power-on operation and the initialization operation can be easily performed.

A lock switch 21TM051 and a clear switch (setting switch) 21TM05
2 is provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and cannot be operated unless the gaming machine frame 3 that can be opened by a predetermined key operation is opened, and only a clerk who has a predetermined key It becomes operable. Further, since the lock switch 21TM051 requires key operation, only a clerk of the game shop who has a key for operating the lock switch 21TM051 can operate it. Further, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on and off by a predetermined key.
Although it is a switch that can execute the switching operation of the FF, it may be a switch that can execute the switching operation and can perform an operation different from the switching operation (for example, a pushing operation).

The lock switch 21TM051 can maintain the ON state or the OFF state. That is, the lock switch 21TM051 can maintain the ON state or the OFF state even if the force is not applied by the clerk at the game hall. The lock switch 21TM051 has a structure in which the key can be inserted and removed only in the OFF state. According to such a configuration, the store clerk or the like in the game arcade must turn off the lock switch 21TM051 in order to recover the key, so the store clerk or the like in the game arcade leaves the lock switch 21TM051 in the ON state. You can prevent it from happening.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 9-3, in the lower part of the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, for discharging the gaming balls that have won the winning openings and the gaming balls that have entered the out openings to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1. A nozzle (exhaust port) is provided, and an outlet switch 21TM070 for detecting a game ball discharged from the pachinko gaming machine 1 (detecting a game ball that has been launched) is provided in the nozzle. ing. The outlet switch 21TM070 is connected to the switch circuit 110.

The control signal transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control command includes, for example, a display control command used to control the image display operation in the image display device 5, a voice control command used to control the voice output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the frame LED 9 and the decoration. It includes an LED control command used to control the lighting operation and the like of the application LED.

FIG. 9-2 is a block diagram showing components related to payout, such as the payout control board 21TM037 and the ball payout device 21TM097. As shown in FIG. 9-2, the payout control board 21
The TM037 is equipped with a payout control microcomputer 21TM370 including a payout control CPU 21TM371. In this embodiment, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is a one-chip microcomputer and has at least a built-in RAM. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370, a RAM (not shown), a ROM (not shown) storing a payout control program, an I/O port and the like constitute a payout control board 21TM037. That is, the payout control board 21TM037 is a payout control C.
PU21TM371, payout control microcomputer 21 having RAM and ROM
It is realized by TM370 and I/O port. Further, the I/O port may be incorporated in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

The detection signals from the out-of-ball switch 21TM187, the full tank switch 21TM048, and the payout number count switch 21TM301 are input to the I/O port 21TM372f of the payout control board 21TM037 via the relay board 21TM072. In this embodiment, the detection signal from the payout number counting switch 21TM301 is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 and then output to the main board 11 via the I/O port 21TM372a and the output circuit 21TM373B. ..

Further, on the payout control board 21TM037, as shown in FIG. 9-2, a gaming machine frame opening sensor that detects opening of the gaming machine frame 3 that supports and fixes the gaming board 2, and the front surface of the gaming board 2 can be opened and closed. A game machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300 including a door frame opening sensor that detects the opening of the glass door frame 3a that is covered with is connected, and various abnormalities are detected based on detection signals output from these sensors. It also has a function to determine the occurrence of (error). The detection signal when the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 is detected and the detection signal when the opening of the glass door frame 3a is detected are input to different terminals, so that the payout control microcomputer 21TM37
0 is distinguishable between the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a.

The detection signal from the payout motor position sensor 21TM295 is the relay board 21TM07.
It is input to the I/O port 21TM372e of the payout control board 21TM037 via 2.
The payout motor position sensor 21TM295 is a sensor including a light emitting element (LED) and a light receiving element for detecting the rotational position of the payout motor 21TM289, and the game ball is clogged.
That is, it is used to detect so-called ball biting. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 mounted on the payout control board 21TM037 is a ball-out switch 21T.
When the detection signal from M187 indicates the out-of-ball state or the detection signal from the full tank switch 21TM048 indicates the full state, the ball payout process is stopped.

Further, when the detection signal from the full tank switch 21TM048 indicates the full tank state,
The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 outputs a low-level full tank signal to the launch board 21TM090 in order to stop the ball launch from the hitting ball launcher. The firing motor signal to the firing motor 21TM094 output from the AND circuit 21TM091 of the firing board 21TM090 is transmitted from the firing board 21TM090 to the firing motor 21TM094. The full signal from the pay-out control microcomputer 21TM370 is sent to the launch board 21.
The signal is input to one of the input sides of the AND circuit 21TM091 mounted on the TM090 and is a drive signal from the drive signal generation circuit 21TM092 (a signal for driving the firing motor 21TM094, which serves to supply power from the power supply board). The achieved signal) is input to the other input side of the AND circuit 21TM091. Then, the firing motor signal of the AND circuit 21TM091 is input to the firing motor 21TM094. That is, while the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is outputting a full signal, the firing motor 21TM094
The output of the firing motor signal to is stopped.

In the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, a serial communication circuit 21T for inputting/outputting (transmitting/receiving) a signal by serial communication with the game control microcomputer 100.
Built-in M380. In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 10
0 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 are serial communication circuits 21TM
Through the 505, 21TM380, in order to confirm the connection between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, a signal (a prize ball request signal, a reception ACK signal) at regular intervals (for example, 1 second). ) Are exchanged (sent and received). That is, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a signal for confirming the connection (a prize ball request signal in this embodiment) at regular intervals via the serial communication circuit 21TM505, and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. When a prize ball request signal from the game control microcomputer 100 is received, is a signal to that effect (reception A
CK signal) is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. In this embodiment,
By placing specific data on the prize ball request signal or the reception ACK signal, at the timing of transmitting/receiving the prize ball request signal or the reception ACK signal, a specific value is specified between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. It is configured to exchange data. For example, when a winning occurs, the game control microcomputer 100 sets data indicating the number of award balls to be paid out by changing a predetermined bit of the award ball request signal, and the prize having the setting is made. A ball request signal is transmitted to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. And the payout control microcomputer 21TM3
When the prize ball payout operation is completed, 70 sets the data indicating the end of the prize ball by changing a predetermined bit of the reception ACK signal, and transmits the reception ACK signal having the setting to the game control microcomputer 100. To do. In addition, when a predetermined error (error such as ball lending, full tank, ball out, etc.) occurs, data indicating the content of the error is set by changing a predetermined bit of the received ACK signal, and the setting is set. The received ACK signal thus made is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100.

The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 receives, through the output port 21TM372b, a prize ball information signal indicating the number of prize balls paid out and a ball lending number signal indicating the number of lent balls on a terminal board (frame external terminal board and board external terminal board). (Including and) output to 21TM160. A driver circuit is installed outside the output port 21TM372b, as shown in FIG.
Is omitted.

Further, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has an output port 21TM37.
An error signal is output to the error display LED 21TM374 by the 7-segment LED via 2c. Further, a signal for instructing turning on/off is output to the award ball LED 21TM053 and the out-of-sphere LED 21TM054 via the output port 21TM372b. A detection signal from the error release switch 21TM375 for releasing the error state is input to the input port 21TM372f of the payout control board 21TM037. The error release switch 21TM375 is used to release the error state by software reset.

Furthermore, the payout motor 21TM from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370
The drive signal to 289 is transmitted to the payout motor 21TM289 in the payout mechanism portion of the ball payout device 21TM097 via the output port 21TM372a and the relay board 21TM072. A driver circuit (motor drive circuit) is provided outside the output port 21TM372a.
Is installed, but the description is omitted in FIG. 9-3.

A card unit control microcomputer is installed in the card unit 21TM050 installed adjacent to the game machine. Further, the card unit 21TM050 is provided with a usable display lamp, a connecting stand direction indicator, a card insertion display lamp and a card insertion slot. A frequency display LED is provided on the interface board (relay board) 21TM066.
21TM060, ball lending possible LED 21TM061, ball lending switch 21TM062 and return switch 21TM063 are connected.

From the interface board 21TM066 to the card unit 21TM050, a ball lending switch signal indicating that the ball lending switch 21TM062 has been operated and a return switch signal indicating that the return switch 21TM063 has been operated are given according to the operation of the player. .. Further, the card unit 21TM050 gives a card balance display signal indicating the balance of the prepaid card and a ball lendability display signal to the interface board 21TM066.
Between the card unit 21TM050 and the payout control board 21TM037, a connection signal (VL
Signal), unit operation signal (BRDY signal), ball lending request signal (BRQ signal), ball lending completion signal (EXS signal) and pachinko machine operation signal (PRDY signal) are input ports 21TM.
It is transmitted and received via 372f and the output port 21TM372d. Card unit 21
An interface board 21TM066 is provided between the TM050 and the payout control board 21TM037.
Is intervening. Therefore, a signal such as a connection signal (VL signal) is transmitted and received between the card unit 21TM050 and the payout control board 21TM037 via the interface board 21TM066, as shown in FIG. 9-2.

When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 mounted on the payout control board 21TM037 displays the card unit 21TM050.
The PRDY signal is output to. Further, the card unit control microcomputer outputs a VL signal when the power is turned on. Microcomputer 21TM37 for payout control
0 determines the connected/unconnected state of the card unit 21TM050 according to the input state of the VL signal. When the card is accepted in the card unit 21TM050, the ball lending switch is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input, the card unit controlling microcomputer outputs a BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037. When a predetermined delay time elapses from this point, the card unit control microcomputer causes the payout control board 2
The BRQ signal is output to 1TM037.

And the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is the card unit 21T.
When the EXS signal for M050 is raised and the fall of the BRQ signal from the card unit 21TM050 is detected, the payout motor 21TM289 is driven, and a predetermined number of lent balls are paid out to the player. When the payout is completed, the payout control microcomputer 21T
The M370 causes the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050 to fall. afterwards,
On the condition that the BRDY signal from the card unit 21TM050 is not in the ON state, when the payout command signal is received from the game control microcomputer 100, the prize ball payout control is executed.

The power supply voltage AC24V used in the card unit 21TM050 is the payout control board 21T.
Supplied from M037. That is, the power supply from the power supply board to the card unit 21TM050 is performed by the payout control board 21TM037 and the interface board 21TM066.
Done through. In this example, the card unit 2 is connected to the 24 V AC power supply line for the card unit 21TM050 arranged in the interface board 21TM066.
A fuse for protecting 1TM050 is provided to prevent the card unit 21TM050 from being supplied with a voltage higher than a predetermined voltage.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is configured so that the winning probability (ball-out rate) of the big hit changes according to the set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing described later, by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the winning probability of the jackpot (ball-out rate) is changed. .. The set value is made up of 6 levels from 1 to 6, where 6 is the highest payout rate, and the smaller the value is in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, the lower the payout rate.
That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the player is most advantageous,
As the value becomes smaller in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, the advantage becomes gradually lower.

9-4(A) to 9(F) are explanatory views showing the display result determination table corresponding to each set value. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with MR1 is set. In each display result determination table, the variable special figure designation buffer is 1 (first), that is, the case where the first special symbol is subject to variable display and the variable special figure designation buffer is 2 (second). That is, that is, for each of the cases where the second special symbol is subject to variable display, a determination value for a big hit is set.

As shown in FIG. 9-4(A), when the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 1 is used, if the variable special symbol designation buffer is the first, that is, the first special symbol is a variable display target. If the set value is "2", "3", "4", "5", and "6", there is a lower probability (1/300) to win the jackpot. ing. Further, if the variation special map designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as when the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, the second special symbol Even when is the target of variable display, the same probability as when the first special symbol is the target of variable display (1/30
0) is to win the big hit.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-4(B), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 2, if the fluctuation special map designation buffer is the first, the setting value is “1”. There is a higher probability (1/280) than in some cases to win the jackpot. Further, if the variation special map designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as when the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, the second special symbol Even if is targeted for variable display, the same probability as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display (1/28
0) is to win the big hit.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-4(C), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 3, if the fluctuation special map designation buffer is the first, the setting value is “1”, The chances of winning the jackpot are higher than the case of "2" (1/280). Further, if the variation special map designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as when the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, the second special symbol Even if is targeted for variable display, the same probability as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display (
1/280) will win the big hit.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9D, when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 4, if the variation special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is “1”, "2", "3"
It is designed to win the big hit with a higher probability (1/250) than in the case of ". Further, if the variation special map designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as when the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, the second special symbol Even when is targeted for variable display, it is adapted to win the big hit with the same probability (1/250) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-4(E), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 5, if the fluctuation special map designation buffer is the first, the setting value is “1”, "2", "3"
, And “4” have a higher probability (1/235) of winning the jackpot. Further, if the variation special map designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as when the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, the second special symbol Even when is targeted for variable display, it is adapted to win the big hit with the same probability (1/235) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-4(F), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 5, if the fluctuation special map designation buffer is the first, the setting value is “1”, "2", "3"
, “4”, and “5”, the jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/220). Further, if the variation special map designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as when the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, the second special symbol Even when is targeted for variable display, it is adapted to win the big hit with the same probability (1/220) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and determines whether the value of MR1 corresponds to the big hit shown in FIGS. 9-4(A) to (F). When the hit determination value is matched, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (big hit A to big hit F). That is, the jackpot win is determined with a probability according to the set value. Incidentally, FIG. 9-4
The “probability” shown in (A) to (F) indicates the probability (ratio) of a big hit. Also, to determine whether to make a big hit, it means to decide whether to control the big hit game state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B It also means deciding whether or not to make a jackpot design.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the CPU 103 is configured to determine whether or not to make a big hit using the display result determination tables shown in FIGS. 9-4(A) to (F). It is provided separately, and the determination of the big hit is performed by using a common table for the case of the variable display of the first special symbol and the case of the variable display of the second special symbol regardless of the variable special symbol designation buffer. Good.

In this embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a total of six setting values 1 to 6, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to this. The settable values that can be set to 2, may be 3, 3, 4, 5, or 7 or more.

(Setting suggestion production)
The effect control CPU 120 that has received the setting command can suggest the setting value by executing the effect according to the setting value specified by the setting command. For example, the setting value can be suggested to the player by making the mode of the ending effect executed when the big hit game state ends different depending on the specified setting value. Figure 9-5(1),
(2) and (3) show examples of setting suggestive effects. 9-5(1) is an example in which the ending image in the "sunny" mode is selected on the big hit ending screen, and in FIG. 9-5(2), the ending screen in the "cloudy" form is selected in the big hit ending screen. For example, FIG. 9-5(3) shows an example in which the ending image in the "rain" mode is selected on the jackpot end screen.
Further, FIG. 9-5(4) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a table for determining the mode of the setting suggestive effect based on the setting value designated by the setting command.

The CPU 103 transmits a setting command for designating a setting value to the effect control CPU 120. Further, when the jackpot gaming state is over, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command for executing an ending effect on the image display device 5 to the effect control CPU 120. The production control CPU 120 sets the set value designated by the received setting command to R
By storing in the AM 102, the ending effect mode can be determined based on the stored setting value. For example, based on the effect control command transmitted when the jackpot gaming state is over, the image display device 5 is informed that the jackpot gaming state is over (“B”).
It is possible to display the ending image of the mode (sunny mode, cloudy mode, rainy mode) determined based on the stored setting value together with “ONUS end”.

In the table shown in FIG. 9-5(4), the setting values designated by the setting command are "1, 2", "3, 4", and "5, 6". 9-5(2), when the mode of the setting suggestive effect is determined to be the "clear" mode shown in FIG. 9-5(1).
The determination values are assigned in the case of determining the "cloudy" mode shown in Fig. 9 and in the case of determining the "rainy" mode shown in Fig. 9-5(3).

The effect control CPU 120 sets the setting value designated by the received setting command to "1" or "
In the case of "2", it is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) in the "clear" mode shown in (1) at a low rate (for example, 20%), and a medium rate (for example, 40%). so(
It was decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) in the “cloudy” mode shown in 2),
It is determined to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) in the "rain" mode shown in (3) at a medium ratio (for example, 40%). Further, when the setting value designated by the received setting command is "3" or "4", the effect control CPU 120 has a low rate (for example, 20%).
Then, it is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) in the "clear" mode shown in (1), and the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) in the "cloudy" mode shown in (2) at a high rate (for example, 50%). ) Is decided to be carried out, and "rain" shown in (3) at a medium rate (for example, 30%)
It is decided to execute a mode setting suggestion effect (ending effect). When the setting value designated by the received setting command is "5" or "6", the effect control CPU 120 has a high rate (for example, 50%) of the "clear" mode shown in (1). It is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect), and it is determined to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) in the "cloudy" mode shown in (2) at a low rate (for example, 20%). It is determined to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) in the “rain” mode shown in (3) at a rate (for example, 30%).

In this way, by varying the determination rate of each mode of the setting suggestion effect according to the set value, the player becomes interested in how the setting suggestion effect is executed, and the setting suggestion effect is performed. The interest of the production can be improved. In this example, the player becomes interested in how the ending effect executed when the jackpot gaming state ends is executed, and in particular, the ending effect is executed in the "sunny" mode. You will expect to be done.

(Process at power-on)
Next, the power-on process will be described.
9-6 to 9-8 are diagrams showing an example of processing executed in the game control microcomputer 100 when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on.

As shown in FIG. 9-6, the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 checks the data in the backup RAM area after the power is turned on (step S21).
TM4010). In this process, a parity check is performed as a data check.

If the check result is normal (YES in step S21TM4010), CPU 103
Indicates that the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is a regular value, for example, 0 to
It is confirmed whether or not any of 5 is met (step S21TM4020). In this example, as the setting values stored in the setting value storage area, six numbers 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5 are set as the normal values, and six setting values having different jackpot probabilities are provided. ing. The setting value 0 in this example corresponds to the setting value 1 shown in FIG. 9-4 described above, and the setting value 1 in this example corresponds to the setting value 2 shown in FIG. 9-4 described above. The value 2 corresponds to the setting value 3 shown in FIG. 9-4 described above, the setting value 3 in this example corresponds to the setting value 4 shown in FIG. 9-4 described above, and the setting value 4 in this example is described above. 9-4 and so on, and the set value 5 in this example corresponds to the set value 6 and shown in FIG. 9-4.

Here, in this example, when the pachinko game machine 1 is shipped from the game machine maker (before being installed in the game hall), the value with the lowest jackpot probability among the above-mentioned regular values is set in the set value storage area. It is assumed that (0 in this example) is stored. If the data in the setting value storage area is corrupted, it may not be a normal value. If the set value is a regular value (step S21)
(YES in TM4020), and confirms whether the setting change flag is set (step S21TM4030). The setting change flag is set when the mode is changed to the setting change mode described later (step S21TM4580) and is cleared when the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off (step S21TM4720).

If the setting change flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030),
The CPU 103 confirms whether the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (step S21TM4040).

If the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (step S
21TM4040: YES), the CPU 103 sets the RAM clear flag to 1 (step S21TM4050). The value of the RAM clear flag is a value indicating whether or not RAM clear (initialization of the game state) is determined to be executed, and when the value is 1, RA
This indicates that it has been decided to execute M clear. In this example, the RAM clear is not actually executed when the RAM clear flag is set to 1, and when the setting change mode is controlled, the RAM clear is executed after the process related to the setting change mode is completed. Will be done.

The area in which the value of the RAM clear flag is stored is not included in the backup RAM area. Therefore, when the power is cut off, the value of the RAM clear flag is not held, and the value of the RAM clear flag at power restoration is 0 (initial value is not set). The notification that the gaming state is initialized may be performed before the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, and as described later, after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends. It may be performed.

On the other hand, if the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is OFF (NO in step S21TM4040), the CPU 103 shifts to step S21TM4060.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state (step S21TM4060). Here, as described above, the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a indicate the gaming machine frame/door frame open sensor 21TM300.
Can be detected by the gaming machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300 to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, which shows a detection signal indicating that the gaming machine frame 3 has been opened, and the glass door frame 3a is opened. A detection signal indicating that the state has been detected is output.
When the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 recognizes that the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 has been detected, it notifies the gaming control microcomputer 100 that the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 has been detected, When recognizing that the open state of the glass door frame 3a is detected,
By notifying the game control microcomputer 100 that the open state of the glass door frame 3a has been detected, the open state of the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a on the game control microcomputer 100 side. The open state can be individually recognized.

The game machine frame/door frame open sensor 21TM300 detects to the game control microcomputer 100 a detection signal indicating that the open state of the game machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a are detected. When the detection signal indicating that is output (that is, when the gaming control microcomputer 100 includes the gaming machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300), the gaming control microcomputer 100 determines By inputting the detection signal, the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be individually recognized.

When the CPU 103 recognizes the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a (YES in step S21TM4060), it is confirmed whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (step S21TM4070). .. And lock switch 21TM
If 051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4070), as shown in FIG.
The processing after step S21TM4510 related to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode,
Move to. When the mode is changed to the setting change mode, the set value can be confirmed and changed, and when the mode is changed to the setting check mode, the set value can be confirmed.

That is, the data check result of the backup RAM area is normal (step S21T
(YES in M4010), the set value is a regular value (YES in step S21TM4020)
), if power failure has not occurred during setting change (NO in step S21TM4030)
), the setting value can be changed and/or confirmed provided that the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state (YES in step S21TM4060) and the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4070). Becomes On the other hand, if the gaming machine frame 3 is in the closed state (NO in step S21TM4060) or the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM4070), which one of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode is set? Step S21TM4 described later without being controlled by the mode
760 (transmission of setting command).

In the present embodiment, (1) the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state in order to bring the setting value into a state in which the setting value can be confirmed (setting confirmation mode), but (2) ) Two conditions are required: the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state. CPU
When it is confirmed by the determination process of step S21TM4060 and step S21TM4070 that these conditions (1) and (2) are both satisfied, the state 103 can confirm the set value (setting confirmation). Mode). In addition to these conditions (1) and (2), further, (3) clear switch (setting switch)
21TM052 is in the ON state (YES), the RAM clear flag is set based on the condition that the setting value can be changed (setting change mode) as described later. It is possible to move to.

As described above, the lock switch 21TM051 that must be operated to confirm or change the set value is provided on the back side of the game board 2, and must be operated unless the gaming machine frame 3 is opened. I can't. Even if the gaming machine frame 3 is not open, the fact that the lock switch 21TM051 is operated means that the gaming machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300 has an abnormality or is somehow illegal. There is a possibility that the means is about to confirm or change the set value. In such a state, it is inappropriate to permit the confirmation or change of the set value. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the gaming machine frame 3 is not in the open state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set in the confirmation mode. Also, the control is not performed in any of the setting change modes.

In the present embodiment, as condition (1), when either the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set to the setting confirmation mode or the setting change mode. Although controllable, it is not limited to such a form, and even if the glass door frame 3a is in the open state, if the gaming machine frame 3 is not in the open state, the setting confirmation mode and the setting change mode It may not be controlled by any of the above.

On the other hand, in step S21TM4060, when the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a is not recognized (NO in step S21TM4060), that is, both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a When it is in the closed state, it is not controlled by any of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, and the step S21TM47 described later is executed.
The process proceeds to 60 (transmission of setting command). If it is confirmed in step S21TM4070 that the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (step S21TM407).
(NO at 0), control proceeds to step S21TM4760 (transmission of setting command) described later without being controlled by any of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode.

In the data check of the backup RAM area (step S21TM4010),
If the check result is abnormal (NO in step S21TM4010), the CPU 103
The process moves to step S21TM4120. Further, in checking the value stored in the setting value storage area (step S21TM4020), a regular value (0 to 5) is set in the setting value storage area.
If is not stored (NO in step S21TM4020), the CPU 103
The process moves to step S21TM4120. Also, when checking the setting change flag (
If it is confirmed that the setting change flag is set (step S21TM4030) (YES in step S21TM4030), the CPU 103 executes step S21T.
Move to M4120.

Here, even if a regular value (0 to 5) is stored in the setting value storage area, if a part of the backup RAM area is damaged, it is determined as NO in step S21TM4010. Then, the process proceeds to step S21TM4120. That is, when there is a possibility that the value stored in the set value storage area is inappropriate, the setting is changed based on the fact that the setting change mode transition condition (step S21TM4120 to step S21TM4140 described later) is satisfied. Will be controlled by the mode. Further, if the backup RAM area data is checked (step S21TM4010) and the check result is normal (YES in step S21TM4010), a regular value (0 to 5) is not stored in the set value storage area. (NO in step S21TM4020), the setting change mode is controlled based on the fact that the setting change mode transition condition (step S21TM4120 to step S21TM4140 described later) is satisfied. When the setting change mode was controlled at the time of the previous power failure, the setting change mode is controlled based on the setting change mode transition condition (step S21TM4120 to step S21TM4140 described later) being satisfied. It will be.

In step S21TM4120, the CPU 103 confirms whether the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state (step S21TM4120). CPU
When 103 recognizes the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a (
(YES in step S21TM4120), and it is confirmed whether the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (step S21TM4130).

If the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (YES in step S21TM4130)
), the CPU 103 confirms whether the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (step S21TM4140).

If the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (step S
If YES at 21TM4140), the CPU 103 sets the RAM clear flag to 1 (step S21TM4150). Then, the processing after step S21TM4510 related to the setting change mode shown in FIG. 9-7 is executed.

On the other hand, when the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a is not recognized in step S21TM4120 (NO in step S21TM4120), that is, both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a If it is in the closed state, step S21TM413
When 0 and the lock switch 21TM051 is not in the ON state (step S21TM4
If NO in step S21TM4140, the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is not in the ON state in step S21TM4140 (N in step S21TM4140).
O) indicates that the CPU 103 does not execute the processing of step S21TM4510 and subsequent steps related to the setting change mode, and indicates that the setting value stored in the setting value storage area may be abnormal. The error command is transmitted to the CPU 120 for effect control.

When the production control CPU 120 receives the setting value abnormality error command, the image display device 5
In, it notifies that there is a possibility that the set value is abnormal. For example, a message "Setting value may be abnormal" is displayed. Further, the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to temporarily turn off the power (turn off the power switch 21TM055).
), and when the power is turned on again (when the power switch 21TM055 is turned on), a notification is given to move to the setting change mode and perform an operation for changing the set value (fix the set value). For example, the message “Please turn on the power again to switch to the setting change mode after turning off the power” is displayed. It should be noted that similar notification may be performed by voice output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 performs a predetermined loop process until the power is turned off (step S
21TM4200 to step S21TM4220) is executed.

In this loop processing, the CPU 103 waits for 4 ms (step S21TM420
After performing 0), by displaying the character "E" on the display monitor 21TM029,
“Even though the set value may not be a normal value (0 to 5), the transition condition for controlling to the setting change mode (determined to be YES in step S21TM4120 to step S21TM4140) is satisfied. Notification that the setting change mode has not been entered” (step S21TM4210). Then, the security signal is output from the output terminal (terminal number 10) to which one end of the security signal line is connected (step S21T).
M4220). The security signal is input to an external device to which the other end of the security signal line is connected (for example, a hall computer that manages information of a plurality of gaming machines, a card unit or a calling lamp device provided corresponding to the gaming machine). To be done.

During the loop processing, the display monitor 21TM029 has a 7-segment display with 4 m
The character "E" is displayed for each s. A weight of 4 ms is provided to prevent excessive heat from staying in the 7-segment display and damaging the display. The security signal is continuously output during the loop processing. By outputting the security signal externally, a predetermined event (in this example, the set value is a normal value (0 to 5) in the pachinko gaming machine 1 based on the input of the security signal in an external device such as a hall computer. It is possible to specify the possibility that the transition condition for controlling to the setting change mode is not satisfied and the setting change mode is not entered)).

The loop processing of steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220 will be continued until the power supply is stopped (until the power switch 21TM055 is turned off).

That is, when the data check result of the backup RAM area is abnormal (step S2)
If NO in 1TM4010), the set value is not a normal value (step S21TM4020).
No), and when the power is cut off during the setting change (that is, when the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on, and when YES is determined in step S21TM4030). If applicable, you should not let the game play in this state, and set value before shifting to normal game processing (for example, game control timer interrupt processing including prize ball processing, special symbol process processing, etc.) It is necessary to confirm the setting value of the storage area to a regular value. Therefore, the RAM clear flag is set to shift to the setting change mode.

In the present embodiment, in order to bring the setting value into a changeable state (setting change mode), (1
) The gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state,
(3) 3 that the clear switch (setting selection switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state
Two conditions are needed. The CPU 103 executes these (1) according to the determination processing in steps S21TM4120, S21TM4130, and S21TM4140.
When it is confirmed that all of the conditions (3) to (3) are satisfied, it is possible to shift to a state (setting change mode) in which the set value can be changed.

If any one of the conditions (1) to (3) is not satisfied, the change of the set value is not permitted, so that the set value of the set value storage area can be set to a regular value. Without, it is not possible to shift to the normal game processing. Therefore, when NO is determined in any of the determination processes of steps S21TM4120, S21TM4130, and S21TM4140, the process proceeds to the loop process (steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220) described above.

Once the process shifts to the loop process (step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220), the game player cannot shift to the normal game process. Therefore, the clerk or the like in the game arcade must turn the pachinko gaming machine 1 off and then turn it on again. I won't. As described above, when the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is not satisfied, the power is temporarily cut off so that all the conditions (1) to (3) are satisfied at the next power-on. Then, the mode is changed to the setting change mode, and the set value in the set value storage area is fixed to a regular value.

When any of the conditions (1) to (3) is not satisfied, the CPU 103 presets the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. The light may be emitted in the power-off instruction mode to prompt the user to turn off the power.

In the present embodiment, when the setting change flag is not set (step S21TM4
(NO at 030), the change of the set value is not permitted, but in order to be in a state in which the set value can be confirmed (setting confirmation mode), (1) the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state (step S2).
1TM4060 is YES), and (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4070).

However, if the setting change flag is set (step S21TM4
(YES in 030), (1) The gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state (step S21TM4120).
YES), (2) Lock switch 21TM051 is ON (step S21TM4)
Even if the two conditions of YES in 130) are satisfied, the setting confirmation mode is not controlled. Even when these conditions (1) and (2) are satisfied,
(3) Clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM05 in step S21TM4140
When it is determined that 2 is not in the ON state (NO), it is controlled to the game stopped state (loop processing of step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220) without being controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Will be.

Next, regarding the processing related to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, FIG. 9-7 and FIG.
It will be described using -8. In the processing of FIG. 9-7, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 matches a regular value (one of 0 to 5 in this example) ( Step S21TM4510). Regular values (0-5) in the setting value storage area
) Is stored (YES in step S21TM4510), step S21
Move to TM4530. When the regular value (0 to 5) is not stored in the setting value storage area (NO in step S21TM4510), the CPU 103 has the lowest jackpot probability "0" as the regular value in the setting value storage area. Is stored (step S21TM4520).
Then, the process proceeds to step S21TM4530.

Next, the CPU 103 performs a power-off process after performing a wait of 4 ms (step S21TM4530) (step S21TM4540). In the power-off process, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not a power-off signal based on a power-off including an unexpected power failure is input, and if the power-off signal is input, the CPU 103 checks whether the power supply Immediately before the power supply stops operating due to the stop, the power supply stop processing is executed. In this process when the power supply is stopped, R
A process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up in the AM 102,
Data protection processing of the RAM 102 and the like are executed. The data protection process includes a process of adding an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and a process of backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data (including various flags, states of various timers, etc.) for advancing the game, the state of the backup flag and an error detection code. That is, in the power-off process, the check data is stored in the predetermined backup area.

As a result, when it is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (step S
21TM4530 to step S21TM4620 repeated processing, or step S21T
M4530 to step S21TM4570 and step S21TM4650 are being repeatedly performed), if power failure occurs, step S21TM40 after power recovery.
At 10, the data check will be properly performed.

Next, the CPU 103 sets the set value (0 to 5 in this example) stored in the set value storage area.
Is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (step S21TM4550).
). Here, the value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 is a value (1 to 6) obtained by adding 1 to the value (0 to 5) stored in the setting value storage area. Since the clerk at the amusement hall normally recognizes the range of the set values as 1 to 6, if the value stored in the set value storage area is displayed as it is on the display monitor 21TM029, the clerk at the amusement hall will actually see it. There is a risk of erroneously recognizing the setting value of. Therefore, in this example, [the value stored in the set value storage area+1] is
The set value is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. Then CPU1
03 outputs a security signal (step S21TM4560).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether the RAM clear flag is 0 (step S21TM4570). If the RAM clear flag is 0 (step S21TM4570)
YES), that is, when the RAM clear is not executed after the mode (here, the setting confirmation mode) ends, the CPU 103 transmits a setting confirmation mode command designating that the setting confirmation mode is controlled (step S21TM4650). , And proceeds to step S21TM4680. The effect control CPU 120 can specify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting confirmation mode based on the reception of the setting confirmation mode command. Therefore, the image display device 5 and the speakers 8L and 8R can notify that the gaming machine is controlled in the setting confirmation mode.

On the other hand, when the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO in step S21TM4570), that is, when the RAM clear is executed after the mode (here, the setting change mode) ends, CP
U103 sets the setting change flag indicating that the setting value may be changed (step S21TM4580). The area that stores the value of the setting change flag is
Since it is included in the backup RAM area, the value of the setting change flag is retained even when the power is cut off. Therefore, if the power is cut off while the control is in the setting change mode, the value of the setting change flag is 1 (set state) at the next power-on.

Next, the CPU 103 transmits a setting change mode command designating that the setting change mode is controlled (step S21TM4590). Based on the reception of the setting change mode command, the effect control CPU 120 causes the game control microcomputer 100.
It is possible to specify that has moved to the setting change mode. Therefore, the image display device 5 and the speakers 8L and 8R can notify that the gaming machine is controlled in the setting change mode.

Next, the CPU 103 inputs the setting changeover switch information indicating whether or not the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has been operated (step S21TM4600), and confirms whether or not the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has been operated. (Step S21TM4610).

If the setting switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is not operated (NO in step S21TM4610), the CPU 103 shifts to step S21TM4680. When the setting switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated (YES in step S21TM4610), the CPU 103 updates the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 (step S21TM4620), and step S21TM4.
Move to 680. The updated set value is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 in the next step S21TM4550.

Every time the clerk at the game arcade operates the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 (YES in step S21TM4610), the set value stored in the set value storage area is updated (step S21TM4620). For example, the regular set value is in the range of 0 to 5, and the set value stored in the set value storage area when the setting change mode is controlled (when the power is turned on or when the power is turned off last time) is 3 If there is, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is updated in the order of 3→4→5→0→1→2→3 for each setting change operation, and accordingly, the display monitor 21TM029 responds. The displayed information is updated in the order of 4→5→6→1→2→3→4.

Here, the display of the current setting value (step S21TM4550), the output of the security signal (step S21TM4560), and the transmission of the setting confirmation mode command (step S21TM4650) can be executed, but the transmission of the setting change mode command (step S21TM4650).
21TM4590) and the setting value update (step S21TM4620) cannot be executed corresponds to the setting confirmation mode in which the setting value can be confirmed or the setting value cannot be changed.
During the period controlled in the setting confirmation mode, steps S21TM4530 to step S21
The processes of TM4570 and step S21TM4650 are repeatedly executed.

In the setting confirmation mode, the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (step S21T
M4070 determines YES), clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052
Is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM4040 and the RAM clear flag remains 0).

Further, the display of the current set value (step S21TM4550) and the output of the security signal (step S21TM4560) can be executed, the setting change mode command is transmitted (step S21TM4590), and the set value is updated (step S21TM4620).
The state in which can be executed corresponds to the setting change mode in which the set value can be confirmed and changed.

In the setting change mode, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (step S21T
M4070 or YES is determined in step S21TM4130), and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (YES is determined in step S21TM4040 or step S21TM4140, and the RAM clear flag is set to 1 in step S21TM4050 or step S21TM4150). It is controlled based on what is set).

The setting confirmation mode command is a command that is transmitted only once during the setting confirmation mode control. Therefore, when the CPU 103 transmits the setting confirmation mode command, it can specify that the setting confirmation mode command has been transmitted, and set the setting confirmation mode command transmission flag that does not require backup storage when the power is turned off. The setting confirmation mode command transmission flag may be cleared when the setting change flag is cleared (step S21TM4720). The setting confirmation mode command may be transmitted only when the setting confirmation mode command transmission flag is not set. Similarly, the setting change mode command is a command that is transmitted only once during the setting change mode control. Therefore, when the CPU 103 transmits the setting change mode command, it can specify that the setting change mode command has been transmitted, and set a setting change mode command transmission flag that does not require backup storage when the power is turned off. The setting change mode command transmission flag may be cleared when the setting change flag is cleared (step S21TM4720). The setting change mode command may be transmitted only when the setting change mode command transmission flag is not set.

In step S21TM4680, CPU 103 confirms whether lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state. Then, if the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (NO in step S21TM4680), the weight of 4 ms is again set (step S21T).
After performing M4530), the processes after step S21TM4540 are repeated. That is, R
If the value of the AM clear flag is 0, the control of the setting confirmation mode is continued, and if the value of the RAM clear flag is 1, the control of the setting change mode is continued.

If the lock switch 21TM051 is OFF in step S21TM4680 (YES in step S21TM4680), the CPU 103 ends the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and sets 1000 ms as the value of the security signal timer (
Step S21TM4710). Since the predetermined time is set as the value of the security signal timer, the security signal is continuously output until the value of the security signal timer becomes 0 ms from the predetermined time in the information output process when the process shifts to the normal game process thereafter. Will be done. For example, when the game control timer interrupt processing is executed every 2 ms, the value of the security signal timer is decremented by 2 ms, and the output of the security signal is stopped when the value reaches 0 ms. Therefore, at the time of step S21TM4710, the remaining output period of the security signal is set to 1000 ms regardless of whether the setting change mode is ended or the setting confirmation mode is ended.

That is, as shown in FIG. 9-9(1), the output of the security signal is started in response to the start of either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (step S21TM4560),
Corresponding to the end of the control of either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the security signal is continuously output until at least 1 sec has elapsed from the end of the control of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. The value of the security signal timer is set (step S21TM4710).

Here, the process of starting the output of the security signal in step S21TM4560 is performed regardless of whether it is controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (determines which mode is controlled. It is executed as a common process (without (without). Further, the processing for setting the remaining output period of the security signal in step S21TM4710 is also performed regardless of whether the control is in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (determine which mode is controlled. It is executed as a common process. In this way, the security signal output control is simplified by sharing the security signal output start control and the output end control between the setting change mode control and the setting confirmation mode control. The control load can be reduced.

Also, output of the security signal is started in response to the start of the control in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and is output in response to the end of the control in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. By stopping, it is possible to appropriately notify an external device such as a hall computer that the gaming machine may have been controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

Here, step S21T immediately after the control of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends.
In M4710, a value (1000 ms) common to the case where the setting change mode is controlled and the case where the setting confirmation mode is controlled is set in the security signal timer. However, if both the output start control and the output end control of the security signal are shared between the case where the setting change mode is controlled and the case where the setting change mode is controlled, which mode is set on the external device side. It will be difficult to know if it was controlled.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9-9(2), when the setting change mode is controlled, that is, when the RAM clear flag is set to 1, once in step S21.
After setting 1000 ms as the value of the security signal timer in TM4710, based on the judgment of NO in step S21TM4770 described later, reset the value of 30000 ms as the value of the security signal timer in step S21TM1465 after clearing the RAM (overwrite). ) I am doing so. That is, after the remaining output period of the security signal is once set to 1 sec, the remaining output period of the security signal is reset (overwritten) to 30 sec.

When the signal output control shown above is performed, the final output stop timing of the security signal is as shown in FIG. 9-9(2), when the setting confirmation mode is controlled, the setting confirmation mode ends 1 sec has passed, and when the setting change mode has been controlled, 30 sec has passed from the end of the setting change mode.

Specifically, when it is controlled to the setting confirmation mode (when the RAM clear is not performed and the value of the security signal timer is not changed from 1 second), the game control timer interrupt after the interrupt permission is given. In processing (for example, information output processing), the value of the security signal timer is 10
The security signal is continuously output from 00 ms to 0 ms, and the setting change mode is controlled (when the RAM is cleared and the security signal timer value is 1).
(If changed from 30 seconds to 30 seconds), in the game control timer interrupt processing (for example, information output processing) after interrupt permission, the security signal is output until the value of the security signal timer changes from 30000 ms to 0 ms. Will continue. In addition, when it is controlled to the setting confirmation mode, when it is controlled to the setting change mode, the value of the security signal timer is set to a predetermined time (1000 ms or 3) at the timing before shifting to the game control timer interrupt processing.
The output of the security signal may be continued from 0000 ms) to 0 ms, and the game control timer interrupt process may be performed after the output of the security signal is completed.

In this way, the security signal is continuously output for at least 1 sec depending on whether the control in the setting confirmation mode is finished or the control in the setting change mode is finished.
When the setting change mode is controlled, 30 seconds after the control of the setting change mode is completed.
The security signal will be continuously output until is passed. With such a configuration, while controlling the output of the security signal in common, the case of controlling in the setting confirmation mode,
The output period of the security signal can be different from that in the case of being controlled in the setting change mode.

As a result, in the external device, it is possible to know whether the initialization process has been executed and the control has been performed in the setting confirmation mode, or the initialization process has been executed and has been performed in the setting change mode. . For example, if the output period of the security signal is less than 30 seconds, it can be specified that the setting confirmation mode is controlled without executing the initialization process, and if the output period of the security signal is 30 seconds or more, the initial state can be specified. It is possible to estimate that there is a possibility that the conversion processing has been executed and the setting change mode has been controlled.

Even when a game stop target error such as a magnetic abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection sensor,
A security signal will be output. The security signal in this case is continuously output until the power of the game machine is turned off. Further, the CPU 103 sets the abnormality detection flag in the backup area of the RAM 102 (however, the area cleared by the initialization process) based on the abnormality detected by the abnormality detection sensor. Then, it is assumed that the security signal is output for 4 minutes based on the abnormality detection flag being set when the power is restored.

Here, if the setting confirmation mode is controlled when the power is restored, the RAM clear is not executed, and therefore the value of the abnormality detection flag remains set without being initialized in the signal output process. It is possible to continuously output the security signal for 4 minutes after the power is turned on. That is, it is possible to prevent the output period of the security signal from being limited to the period from the end of the control of the setting confirmation mode to the lapse of 1 second. On the other hand, if the setting change mode is controlled when the power is restored, the RAM clear will be executed, so the error detection flag will be cleared in the subsequent signal output processing (power failure occurs). At some point, it is unclear whether or not an abnormality has been detected), and as a result, the security signal output period is the period from the end of the setting change mode until 30 seconds elapse (depending on the execution of RAM clear). Period).

In the example shown in step S21TM4710 of FIG. 9-7, the value of the security signal timer is set to 1 second. The value of the security signal timer set to 1 may be at least a period during which the output of the security signal can be recognized by the external device side, for example, 50 ms or more. That is, the common 50 ms may be set as the value of the security signal timer when the setting change mode ends and when the setting confirmation mode ends.

After the processing of step S21TM4710, the CPU 103 clears the setting change flag (step S21TM4720). Here, when the power is cut off after that because the setting change flag is cleared, it is determined that the setting change flag is not set when the power is restored (NO in step S21TM4030). Become.

Next, the CPU 103 erases the set value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (step S21TM4730). Then, the set value (0
Set to any one of (5) to (5) and send the setting command (step S
21TM4760). Even when the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode are not controlled when the power is turned on, the process of step S21TM4760 is executed and the setting command is transmitted.

Here, the player usually recognizes the range of the set value as 1 to 6, and the CPU 12 for effect control.
If the value specified by the setting command (the value stored in the setting value storage area) is directly displayed on the image display device 5 on the 0 side, the player may erroneously understand the setting value. . Therefore, in the present embodiment, on the CPU 120 side for effect control, a value obtained by adding 1 to the value (0 to 5) designated by the setting command is recognized as the setting value (1 to 6), and the setting value 1 to 6 is set. The effect that suggests the set value is executed in the range.

Not limited to such a form, the CPU 103 sets a value (1 to 6) obtained by adding 1 to the setting value (0 to 5) stored in the setting value storage area to the setting command to perform the effect control. For C
It may be transmitted to the PU 120. As a result, the range of the setting value designated by the setting command becomes 1 to 6, which matches the range normally recognized by the player. On the CPU 120 side for effect control, the set value (1 to 6) specified by the setting command is displayed on the image display device 5 as it is, or an effect that suggests the set value (1 to 6) specified by the setting command is executed. By doing so, the set value can be appropriately notified or suggested. In addition, CP for production control
It is not necessary for the U120 side to perform addition processing on the setting value specified by the received setting command, and the control load on the effect control CPU 120 side can be reduced.

As described above, the effect control CPU 120 can specify that the setting confirmation mode or the setting change mode has ended by receiving the setting command. Further, it is possible to suggest the set value by executing the effect according to the set value designated by the setting command. For example, the setting value can be suggested to the player by making the mode of the ending effect executed when the big hit game state ends different depending on the specified setting value.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the RAM clear flag is 0 (step S21TM4770).

Here, the value of the RAM clear flag is 0 (YES in step S21TM4770).
This means that the data check result in the backup RAM area is normal (step S
21TM4010: YES), the set value is determined to be a regular value (YES in step S21TM4020), and the power is not cut off during the setting change (step S21T).
M4030 is NO), and the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is O
Since it is in the FF state (NO in step S21TM4040), it suffices to execute the process at power-off recovery without RAM clear.

If the value of the RAM clear flag is 0, the CPU 103 executes the process when the data check result of the backup RAM area is normal when the power is turned on, and after the interrupt permission, the game control timer interrupt process (special (Including pattern process processing). That is, when neither the setting change mode nor the setting confirmation mode is controlled, or when the control of the setting confirmation mode is finished, the CPU 103 determines that the value of the RAM clear flag is 0. Without executing the clear, the backup command is transmitted as a command at the time of power interruption recovery, and the normal game process is started.

In the production control CPU 120, based on the reception of this backup command (command at the time of restoration), restoration from power failure is performed based on the data at the time of power supply stop (RAM clear is not performed. Be recognized). When the production control CPU 120 receives the backup command, for example, the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the frame LED 9 are displayed.
In the rendering device such as the above, it is possible to inform that the recovery from the power interruption is performed (the RAM clear is not performed) based on the data when the power supply is stopped.

On the other hand, when the value of the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO in step S21TM4770), it means that the RAM clear is set to 1 in step S21TM4050 or step S21TM4150, and it is determined to execute the RAM clear. Therefore, the process at the time of turning on the power, which involves clearing the RAM, may be executed.

When the value of the RAM clear flag is 1, the CPU 103 executes the process of setting 30 seconds as the value of the security signal timer and the process when the data check result of the backup RAM area is abnormal at power-on. , After the interruption is permitted, the game control timer interruption processing (including the special symbol process processing) may be performed.

As shown in FIG. 9-8, the CPU 103 performs the RAM clear processing based on the RAM clear flag being 1 (step S21TM1410). In the RAM clear processing, R
Although the data (special symbol process flag, probability variation flag, time saving flag, reserved memory, etc.) indicating the game state before the power supply is stored in the game state information storage area of the AM 102 is cleared, the initial value is set. , The set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is not cleared and is not changed before the RAM clear process. Further, the area in which each aggregated value (game information that can be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029) such as the serial ratio, the winning combination, and the base is stored for each set value is not cleared, and each aggregated for each set value. The value is not changed before the RAM clear process. Then, the character "C" is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 to notify that the game state has been initialized (step S21TM1420). Note that RA
By the M clear processing, predetermined data (for example, the data of the count value of the counter for generating the random number for normal symbol determination) is initialized to 0, but it is initialized to an arbitrary value or a predetermined value. You may make it change. Further, the predetermined data (for example, the data of the count value of the counter for generating the normal symbol per determination random number) may be left as it is without initializing the entire area of the RAM 102.

The reason why the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is not cleared in this RAM clearing process is as follows: (a) If the setting change mode is not controlled, a normal value is set in the setting value storage area when the power is turned on. It has been stored (YES in step S21TM4020).
, (B) When controlled to the setting change mode, the value in the setting value storage area is set to 0 (step S21TM4520), or a normal value is stored by the operation in the setting change mode (step S21TM4610). And step S21TM4620).
Furthermore, after the RAM clearing process, the setting change mode cannot be controlled, and there is no opportunity to change the value stored in the setting value storage area.

Next, the CPU 103 sets the pointer to the start address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 101 (step S21TM1430), and sequentially sets the contents of the initialization setting table to the work area (step S21TM1440). Step S21TM1
By the process of 430 and step S21TM1440, for example, a normal symbol per determination random number counter, a special symbol buffer, a total prize ball number storage buffer, a special symbol process flag, etc. Initially set to a flag for selectively performing processing according to the control state. The value is set.

After executing steps S21TM1430 and S21TM1440, the CPU 103 reads out the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 (step S21T).
M1450). In the game control timer interrupt process, which will be described later, the jackpot determination in the special symbol process process is executed based on the setting value read here. Next, the CPU 103 transmits an initialization command designating that the initialization processing has been performed when the power is turned on (or when the setting change mode ends) (step S21TM1460). Performance control CPU 120
Then, the initialization process was performed based on the receipt of this initialization command (RAM was cleared without recovery from power failure based on the data at the time of power supply stop) Recognize. When the production control CPU 120 receives the initialization command, the production device such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the frame LED 9 has initialized the game state and the like (data when power supply is stopped). Based on the above, it is possible to notify that the RAM has been cleared without recovery from the power failure.

Next, the CPU 103 sets 30 seconds as the value of the security signal timer (step S21TM1465). As a result, step S21TM4 after the setting change mode ends
The value (1 second) of the security signal timer set in 710 is changed (overwritten) to the value (30 seconds) corresponding to the execution of the RAM clear. When the RAM clear is executed without being controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, step S21TM4710 is not executed (1 second is set as the value of the security signal timer). Value), the value of the security signal timer is set to 30 seconds corresponding to the execution of the RAM clear. On the other hand, when the RAM clear is not executed (including the case where the setting confirmation mode is controlled), this step S21TM14
Since the processing of step 65 is not executed, the value of the security signal timer is set in step S21TM47.
It remains at 1 second set at 10.

Since the value of the security signal timer is set in this step S21TM1465 or the above-described step S21TM4710, the security signal is output in the game control timer interrupt process after the interrupt permission (information output process), After that, each time the game control timer interrupt process is executed with the interrupt permission, the value of the security signal timer is 2 m.
The output of the security signal is stopped at the timing when the value of the security signal timer becomes 0 by subtracting s.

Then, the CPU 103 executes the setting process of the serial communication circuit 21TM505 (step S21TM1480). In this setting process, the output circuit 21TM067 of the main board 11 is used.
Outputs a connection confirmation signal to the input circuit 21TM373A of the payout control board 21TM037. Further, the communication between the serial communication circuit 21TM505 of the game control microcomputer 100 and the serial communication circuit 21TM380 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is set to be executable.

Next, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (
Step S21TM1490). The CPU 103 causes the random number circuit 104 to execute the process in accordance with the random number circuit setting program, thereby causing the random number circuit 104 to determine the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result.
Set to update the value of.

Then, in step S21TM1500, the CPU 103 sets a predetermined time (for example, 2
The register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt is periodically taken every (ms). That is, a value corresponding to, for example, 2 ms is set as an initial value in a predetermined register (time constant register). In this example, 2 m
It is assumed that a timer interrupt is taken every s.

Next, the CPU 103 repeatedly executes the display random number updating process (step S21TM1520) and the initial value random number updating process (step S21TM1530). When executing the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process, the interrupt disabled state is set (step S21TM1510), and when the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are completed, the interrupt enabled state is set. It is set (step S21TM1540). As a result, the process shifts to the normal game process capable of executing the game control timer interrupt process. In the present embodiment, the display random number is a random number for determining the stop symbol of the special symbol when not a big hit and a random number for determining whether to reach when not a big hit, for display The random number update process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the display random number. The initial value random number updating process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random numbers. In this embodiment, the initial value random number, the initial value of the count value of the counter (normal symbol per determination random number generation counter) for generating a random number for determining whether or not to hit the normal symbol is determined. It is a random number to do. A game control process for controlling the progress of a game to be described later (the game control microcomputer 100 controls the game display device, the variable winning ball device, the ball payout device, and other game devices provided in the game machine by itself. In the process of, or the process of transmitting a command signal to control other microcomputer, also referred to as the game device control process), the count value of the random number per ordinary symbol is one round (normal random number for per symbol determination) When the number of numerical values between the minimum value and the maximum value of the possible values has been increased), the initial value is set to the counter.

In this example, when it is determined in step S21TM4770 that the RAM clear flag is 0 (YES), the CPU 103 determines whether the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are both closed. Without confirming (regardless of the state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a), the process shifts to the process when the power is cut off.
When it is determined that the RAM clear flag is 0 in 21TM4770 (YES), the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are both closed (the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door). It is also possible to shift to the process at the time of restoration from power failure according to the state of the frame 3a).

In addition, in this example, when it is determined in step S21TM4770 that the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO), the CPU 103 determines whether or not both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are closed. Without checking (regardless of the state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a), the process at power-on (process after step S21TM1410 (RAM clear))
However, if the RAM clear flag is determined to be 1 (NO) in step S21TM4770, the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are both closed. As a condition (depending on the state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a), the process at power-on (process after step S21TM1410 (RAM clear))
You may move to.

As described above, the clerk at the game hall turns the lock switch 21TM051 ON when the power is turned on.
By setting the N switch and the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 to the ON state, it is possible to control the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the setting change mode and also to initialize the gaming state and the like (RAM clear Can be performed). Also, by turning on the lock switch 21TM051 and turning off the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 when the power is turned on, it is possible to control the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the setting confirmation mode, and also the gaming state and the like. Is not initialized (step S21TM40
40 or step S21TM4140 can be determined to be NO and the RAM clear flag can not be set to 1). In this way, the clerk at the game arcade can select whether to control the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and can also select whether to initialize the game state or the like. There is.

As mentioned above, if the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on, it means that the setting value was unstable because it was controlled in the setting change mode when the power was cut off. There is a possibility that the set value that the game hall is trying to confirm is not stored in the set value storage area. In the examples shown in FIGS. 9-6 to 9-8, the CPU 103 determines that the setting change flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), and does not shift to the normal game process, and the game is stopped (step S21TM4200 to step S21TM42
20 loop processing) so that a security signal is output corresponding to the control to the game stopped state (step S21TM4220).

With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the game from being started (the game control timer interrupt process is executed) in the state where the set value is unstable, and at the time of turning on the power,
It is possible to notify the external device that it was in the setting change mode when the power was cut off.

In addition, in the examples illustrated in FIGS. 9-6 to 9-8, the CPU 103 determines that the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), and the condition for shifting to the setting changing mode ( When all of the steps S21TM4120 to S21TM4140 are YES), the set value error command is transmitted (step S21TM4120 is YES).
Along with step S21TM4190), the game is stopped (step S21TM4200).
“E” is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 in the loop processing of step S21TM4220).
An error display for displaying the characters is performed (step S21TM4210).

In the example shown in FIG. 9-10, the 7-segment displays 21TM029A to 21TM029D forming the display monitor 21TM029 display the letter “E” respectively, so that the clerk at the amusement hall has an abnormality (in the setting change mode). There is a possibility that the power supply may have been cut off under control). In addition, the production control CPU 120, which has received the setting value error command, causes the image display device 5 to display a message “Please turn on the power again to switch to the setting change mode after the power is turned off”. After turning the power off (power switch 21TM055 is OFF), the store clerk, etc., shifts to the setting change mode when the power is turned on again (power switch 21TM055 is ON) and changes the set value. Perform a notification to urge (confirm the set value).

In this example, (a) when the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on, and the transition condition for controlling the setting change mode is satisfied, that is, (i) the gaming machine frame 3
Is in the open state (YES in step S21TM4120), and (ii) lock switch 21T
M051 is ON (YES in step S21TM4130), and (iii)
The clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (step S21).
If it is determined to be YES), the setting is changed to the setting change mode. As a result, an error display on the main board 11 side (step S21TM4210: display monitor 21TM0
The display of "E" in 29) is not executed, and the message is displayed on the production control board 12 side ("
Please turn on the power again after the power is turned off to shift to the setting change mode").

Here, in the effect control CPU 120 that has received the setting change mode command (step S21TM4590), the image display device 5 has been controlled to the setting change mode, that is, the setting change operation (setting change switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated. ), it is possible to notify that the set value can be changed. For example, the message "in the setting change mode" or the message "Please perform the setting change operation to change the set value" can be displayed on the image display device 5. Thereby, the clerk at the game hall can understand that the setting change mode is controlled, and the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052.
After changing the set value stored in the set value storage area to the planned set value by operating, the lock switch 21TM051 is switched to the OFF state to confirm the set value and the pachinko game machine. It is possible to shift 1 to the normal game processing.

On the other hand, (b) when the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on and the transition condition for controlling the setting change mode is not satisfied, that is, (i) to (ii) above.
When any of the conditions in i) is not satisfied, the setting change mode is not controlled,
After the setting value error command is transmitted (step S21TM4190), it is controlled to the game stopped state (loop processing of step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220). As a result, an error display on the main board 11 side (step S21TM4210: display monitor 21T)
The display of "E" in M029) is executed, and the message is displayed on the production control board 12 side ("Please turn on the power again to switch to the setting change mode after the power is turned off"). ..

In this way, the error display on the main board 11 side (step S21TM4210: “E” display on the display monitor 21TM029) is executed, and the message display on the effect control board 12 side (“power is turned on again after power off”). Please change to the setting change mode")
In the case of also being performed, as a state of the gaming machine, it is informed that the transition condition to the setting change mode is not satisfied after the power is restored although the power is cut off in the setting change mode. It will be. In this case, the clerk at the amusement hall understands that the game is not controlled in the setting change mode and is in the game stopped state (it is necessary to turn on the power again to control the setting change mode). It is possible. Therefore, after the power is once turned off, the power is turned on again by operating so that all the transition conditions (i) to (iii) to the setting change mode are satisfied. In the setting change mode, by operating the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is changed to the planned setting value, and then the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off. By switching to the state, the set value can be fixed and the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be shifted to the normal game processing.

In this way, when the power is cut off in the setting change mode, the state of the gaming machine can be appropriately notified when the power is restored.

Here, when the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is satisfied when the power is restored (a),
Error display on the main board 11 side (step S21TM4210: display monitor 21TM029)
The display automatically shifts to the setting change mode without displaying "E" in step 1), thereby avoiding an unnecessary error display and promptly changing the setting value appropriately.

On the other hand, when the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is not satisfied when the power is restored (b), it is not possible to shift to the setting change mode when the power is restored even though the power is cut off during the setting change mode. Since it is in the state, the game is forcibly stopped (step S21TM420
The error display (step S21TM4210: display of “E” on the display monitor 21TM029) on the main board 11 side is performed under the control of 0 to the loop processing of step S21TM4220). As a result, it is possible to limit the progress of the game in an unstable state where the set value is not fixed, and it is possible to realize appropriate game control.

If the setting change flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030).
ES), when the transition conditions (i) to (iii) for transitioning to the setting change mode are all satisfied, and when any of the transition conditions (i) to (iii) is not satisfied, A different command may be transmitted as a command indicating that the set value may be abnormal.

For example, when the transition condition is satisfied, the command indicates that the set value may be abnormal, and the mode is changed to the setting change mode (or the condition for the transition is satisfied). CPU120 for effect control which transmitted the command which shows, and received this command.
Then, it is advisable to display the message “the setting value may be abnormal” and the message “the setting is automatically controlled in the setting change mode” on the image display device 5. On the other hand, when the transition condition is not satisfied, as described above, step S21TM4
It is advisable to send a setting value error command of 190.

After the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is finished and the process is shifted to the normal game process, when both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are in the closed state, (1) lock switch 21T
In response to M051 being operated (turned from OFF state to ON state), a lock switch operation command is transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 to the effect control CPU 120, and (2) setting change switch (Clear switch) In response to the operation of 21TM052 (from OFF state to ON state), the setting control switch operation command is transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 to the effect control CPU 120. become.

Then, the effect control board 12 (CPU 120 for effect control) uses the lock switch operation command,
And/or that an operation for changing the set value has been performed based on the reception of the setting change switch operation command, even though the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode are not controlled. Can be specified and the fact can be notified. For example, on the basis of the reception of the lock switch operation command, the image display device 5 executes the abnormal operation warning notification for displaying the characters "The operation of the lock switch has been detected." Further, based on the reception of the setting changeover switch operation command, the abnormal operation warning notification displaying the character "The operation of the setting changeover switch has been detected." is executed. As a result, the clerk at the amusement hall clearly understands that the operation for changing the set value has been performed even though the operation is not controlled in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and thus illegal It is possible to check whether or not

Note that the game control microcomputer 100 is not limited to such a form, and after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends and the process shifts to the normal game process, the lock switch 21TM.
051 is operated, and setting change switch (clear switch) 21TM052
The lock switch operation command and the setting changeover switch operation command may not be transmitted without confirming whether or not is operated. Thus, during the period when the normal game process (game control timer interrupt process) is being executed, the execution status of the operation for changing the set value and the operation for confirming the set value is not checked. This makes it possible to reduce the control load on the game control microcomputer 100.

(Modification of power-on processing)
In the example shown in FIG. 9-6, when the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on (YES in step S21TM4030), (i) the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state (YES in step S21TM4120). ), (ii) the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4130), and (iii) the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4140).
The RAM clear flag is set to 1 (step S21TM4150) only when it is confirmed that the above three conditions are satisfied, and the mode is changed to the setting change mode (step S21T).
NO in M4570).

Not limited to such a configuration, as shown in FIG. 9-11, when the setting change flag is set at power-on (YES in step S21TM4030), (i) to (iii)
), the RAM clear flag is set to 1 (step S21TM4150), and the mode is changed to the setting change mode (step S21TM4).
570: NO).

In the process shown in FIG. 9-11, when the data check result of the backup RAM area is abnormal (NO in step S21TM4010), the setting value is not a regular value (NO in step S21TM4020), the setting change flag is set. If yes (step S
21TM4030 YES), the RAM clear flag is set to 1 (step S21TM4150) without determining whether the conditions (i) to (iii) are satisfied (step S21TM4150), and the setting change mode is controlled (step S21TM4150). No in S21TM4570), the part which is not controlled in the game stopped state (the process corresponding to the loop process of step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220) is different from the process shown in FIG. 9-6. The other parts are the same as the processes shown in FIGS. 9-6 to 9-8.

Even in such a case, the RAM clear flag is set to 1 and the mode is changed to the setting change mode based on the setting change flag being set when the power is turned on. It is possible to properly determine the state of the gaming machine when the power is cut off during the change.

In the example shown in FIG. 9-11, when the setting change flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030), (i) the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, and (ii) the lock switch 21TM051 is ON. Is set, and (iii) the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state. Based on the establishment of the three conditions, the setting change mode is controlled (NO in step S21TM4570). If the setting change flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), (i) to (iii) are set. Regardless of whether the three conditions are satisfied, the setting change mode is forcibly controlled.

As described above, when the power is cut off while being controlled in the setting change mode, the three conditions (i) to (iii) are based on the setting change flag being set when the power is restored. By automatically controlling to the setting change mode regardless of whether
It is possible to improve workability for determining the set value.

Here, if the setting change flag is set (Y in step S21TM4030).
In (ES), (ii) the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (step S21TM).
Even if the condition of YES in 4130 is not satisfied, the setting change mode is controlled. As a result, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off in the setting change mode.
By operating the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 in this state,
The setting value stored in the setting value storage area will be changed (step S in FIG. 9-7).
21TM4610-step S21TM4620).

As described above, the condition for ending the setting change mode is that the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on.
This is to switch from the N state to the OFF state (to make YES in step S21TM4680). Therefore, if the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state in order to confirm the set value and end the setting change mode, the store clerk who has performed the setting value change operation once changes the lock switch 21TM051 from the OFF state. After switching to the ON state, the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state (step S21T
(YES is determined in M4680).

In this way, the case where the setting change flag is not set (step S21TM40
If NO in step 30, the setting change flag is set (step S21TM40).
30), the conditions for starting the control of the setting change mode are made different, while the conditions for ending the control of the setting change mode (operation of switching the lock switch 21TM051 from the ON state to the OFF state) are made common, The conditions for ending the control of the setting change mode are clarified so that the normal game processing is appropriately performed.

Here, the setting change flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030).
), the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on when the setting change mode is controlled.
It is also possible to give a notification prompting the user to enter the state. For example, when the setting change flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), the CPU 103 sets the RAM clear flag to 1 in step S21TM4150 and transmits the setting value error command (in step S21TM4190 described above). Perform the corresponding process), and the effect control CPU 120 that received the setting value error command (step S21TM4110) says, "Turn on the lock switch once and then switch it off after changing the setting value." The message may be displayed on the image display device 5.

In the processing shown in FIGS. 9-6 to 9-8 and 9-11, it is impossible to shift to the normal game processing when the setting change flag is set. Therefore, when the gaming machine manufacturer sets the flag during setting change in advance before shipping the pachinko gaming machine 1 (before installation in the gaming hall), the gaming hall then goes through the setting change mode. Unless the set value is changed and the setting change mode is ended, the game on the pachinko gaming machine 1 cannot be performed. Accordingly, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed in the game arcade, it is possible to reliably control the setting change mode to perform the setting change operation and to take a measure to fix the set value.

(Set value storage control when power is cut off while changing the set value)
Next, the set value storage control when the power is cut off during the change of the set value will be described with reference to FIGS. In the example shown in FIG. 9-7, in the setting change mode, the setting change switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated to change the setting value itself stored in the setting value storage area.

First, regarding the control in the case where a power-off occurs before the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state (before the end of the setting change mode) by changing the setting value in the setting change mode, FIG. This will be described using -12(1).

As shown in order 1, when the power is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on (the clear switch 21TM052 is also turned on) to be controlled to the setting change mode.
In this example, when the power is turned on, "0" is set as the set value in the set value storage area of the RAM 102.
Is stored. Next, as shown in order 2, with the start of the setting change mode, the set value “0” stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is read, and the read set value is set to 1 "1", which is obtained by adding, is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this point, the lock switch 21TM051 remains in the ON state.

Next, as shown in order 3, in the setting change mode, the first setting change switch (
Based on the operation of the clear switch) 21TM052, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is changed from "0" to "1", and "2" is obtained by adding 1 to the changed setting value. Will be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. Lock switch 21TM05 at this point
1 remains in the ON state. Furthermore, as shown in order 4, in the setting change mode, 2
The setting value stored in the setting value storage area is changed from "1" to "2" based on the operation of the setting switch (clear switch) 21TM052 for the first time, and the changed setting value is set to 1 "3", which is obtained by adding "," is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this point, the lock switch 21TM051 remains in the ON state.

Next, as shown in order 5, in the setting change mode, it is assumed that the power is cut off while the lock switch 21TM051 remains in the ON state, that is, before the operation for ending the setting change mode is performed. At this time, the setting value storage area is in a state where the setting value “2” after the second operation of the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is stored.
In the power-off state, the setting value “2” stored in the setting value storage area formed in the backup area of the RAM 102 is retained as it is.

Next, as shown in order 6, when the power is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on (the clear switch 21TM052 is also turned on) to be controlled to the setting change mode. When the power is turned on, “2” is set as the set value in the set value storage area of the RAM 102.
Is stored. This set value "2" is the value stored in the set value storage area when the power supply was cut off in the previous setting change mode.

Next, as shown in order 7, the RAM 102 is
The setting value “2” stored in the setting value storage area is read, and “3” obtained by adding 1 to the read setting value is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this point, the lock switch 21TM051 remains in the ON state.

Since the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on in the order 6, when the control shown in FIG. 9-11 is applied, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off (or cleared). Even if the switch 21TM052 is in the OFF state), the setting change mode is automatically controlled. Therefore, the lock switch 21TM051 in the order 6 and the order 7 may be in the OFF state.

In this way, the setting value is changed in the setting change mode, and the lock switch 21TM0
If the power is cut off without turning OFF 51 (without terminating the setting change mode), the changed set value in the previous setting change mode is retained in the set value storage area when the power is restored. It is in the state of being Therefore, when the power is restored, the preset setting value may have already been set, and in this case, the clerk at the amusement arcade terminates the setting change mode without performing the operation of changing the setting value again. Since it is only necessary to shift the game machine to the normal game processing, workability can be improved.

Next, regarding the control in the case where a power-off occurs after the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state (after the setting change mode) by changing the setting value in the setting change mode, This will be described with reference to FIG.

The order 1 to the order 4 are the same as the example shown in FIG. Next, as shown in order 5, in the setting change mode, the lock switch 21TM051
The setting change mode is ended by switching from the ON state to the OFF state. As a result, the set value “2” after the second operation of the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is performed is determined as the final set value. At this time, “2” is stored as the set value in the set value storage area, and “3” obtained by adding 1 to the confirmed set value is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029.

After that, as shown in order 6, it is assumed that the power switch 21TM055 is turned off, and the power supply is stopped. In this power-off state, R
The setting value “2” stored in the setting value storage area formed in the backup area of the AM 102
Will be retained as is.

Next, as shown in order 7, when the power is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on (the clear switch 21TM052 is also turned on), and the setting change mode is controlled. When the power is turned on, “2” is set as the set value in the set value storage area of the RAM 102.
Is stored. This set value “2” is the value that was finally stored in the set value storage area when the previous setting change mode ended.

Next, as shown in the order 8, the RAM 102 is
The setting value “2” stored in the setting value storage area is read, and “3” obtained by adding 1 to the read setting value is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this point, the lock switch 21TM051 remains in the ON state.

As shown in FIGS. 9-12 (1) and (2), when the power is cut off while being controlled in the setting change mode, and when the power supply is stopped after the control in the setting change mode is completed. In either case, when the power is restored, the set value after being changed according to the setting change operation in the previous setting change mode, that is, the set value stored in the set value storage area immediately before the power is cut off, , Valid setting values (setting values stored in the setting storage area when power is restored).

It is not limited to the storage control of the set values shown in FIGS. That is, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is copied to the setting information temporary storage area when the setting change mode is controlled, and the setting change switch (clear switch) is set when the setting change mode is controlled. 21
When TM052 is operated, the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area is changed without changing the setting value in the setting value storage area, and the operation to end the setting change mode (lock switch 21TM051 is turned on. The setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area is stored in the setting value storage area (overwritten) to confirm the setting value based on the operation of switching from the state to the OFF state). May be. In this case, the display monitor 21TM029
The setting value to be displayed on is the value (1 to 6) obtained by adding 1 to the setting value (0 to 5) stored in the setting information temporary storage area, and the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area is In accordance with the change, the set value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 also changes.

With such a configuration, even if the setting change mode is controlled when the power is turned on and the setting change operation is performed (when the setting value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 is changed), the setting is changed. Without completing the operation to end the change mode (lock switch 21TM0
If the power is cut off (without switching 51 to the OFF state), the RAM 10
The set value stored in the second set value storage area has not been changed since the power was turned on (before the setting change operation is performed in the setting change mode). That is, in the power supply stopped state, the set value stored in the set value storage area at the previous power-on is still held. Therefore, the set value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display section 21TM029A) when controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after the power is restored is
It becomes a value according to the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 at the previous power-on.

In this way, it is possible to appropriately determine the set value when the power is cut off while being controlled in the setting change mode. Further, when the power supply is stopped in an unstable state where the setting change mode has not ended, the change of the set value can be restricted.

For the control related to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode shown in the above embodiment, a plurality of setting values (for example, 0 to 5) are provided, and for a gaming machine having a different jackpot probability depending on the setting values. Although applicable, the present invention is not limited to this, and although a plurality of setting values (for example, 0 to 5) are provided, the jackpot probability is common regardless of the setting values (for example, for all of the setting values 0 to 5). It is also applicable to a gaming machine (the jackpot probability is 1/300).

In addition, the present invention disclosed in the following is disclosed in the characteristic part 21TM.

As disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), there has been proposed a gaming machine including a setting changing unit that changes setting values in a plurality of stages based on an external setting changing operation. In addition, as disclosed in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2014-500506 (paragraph 0102), a gaming machine in which a "big hit signal" or the like is output from an external output terminal of a main control board has been proposed. Regarding the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), when it is necessary to grasp the control state related to the setting on the external device side when changing the setting value or the like. However, even if the signal output technology of the conventional gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-500506 (paragraph 0102) is applied, it is difficult for the external device side to grasp this. is there. The invention relating to means O1 to means O4 has been made in view of the above situation, and is to provide a gaming machine capable of appropriately notifying the outside of the gaming machine of a control state related to setting.

The gaming machine of the means O1 is a gaming machine (pachinko) capable of executing control (big hit determination processing in special symbol process processing, etc.) according to a set value (six stages of set values 0 to 5 having different big hit determination random number ranges). It is the gaming machine 1), and the setting value can be confirmed with the setting change mode control means (the game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM4530 to step S21TM4620) capable of controlling the setting value changeable setting change mode. Setting confirmation mode control means capable of controlling various setting confirmation modes (step S21TM4530 to step S21TM)
4570 and a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM4650), and a specific signal output means for outputting a specific signal (security signal) in response to the start of control in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. (Step S21TM45
A game control microcomputer 100 that outputs a security signal at 60), and setting means (a game control microcomputer that sets the value of the security signal timer) that sets a value (value of the security signal timer) related to the period when the specific signal is output. The computer 100), and the setting means can set a common predetermined value when the setting change mode is controlled and when the setting confirmation mode is controlled (security signal timer in step S21TM4710). Is set to 1 second), and the specific signal output means corresponds to the end of the control of either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode until at least a period corresponding to the predetermined value elapses. Outputs a specific signal (The security signal is continuously output until 1 second elapses from the end of the setting confirmation mode with the end of the setting confirmation mode, and 30 seconds from the end of the setting change mode with the end of the setting change mode. The security signal is continuously output until the time elapses). According to this, the state of the gaming machine related to the setting can be appropriately notified to the external device.

The gaming machine of the means O2 is the gaming machine of the means O1 and is an initialization means for initializing the gaming state (
The game control microcomputer 100 for executing RAM clear (step S21TM1410) based on the RAM clear flag being set in step S21TM4050 and step S21TM4150 is provided, and the initialization means is associated with the control of the setting change mode. After initializing the game state (when controlled to the setting change mode, RAM clear is executed after being controlled to the setting change mode), the setting means sets the predetermined value (step S21TM4710). After setting 1 second as a value of the security signal timer, a specific value corresponding to a period longer than the period corresponding to the predetermined value can be set (when RAM clear is executed, security is set in step S21TM1465). 30 seconds can be set as the value of the signal timer), and the specific signal output means outputs the specific signal in response to the end of the control of the setting change mode until the period corresponding to the specific value elapses. (The security signal is continuously output until 30 seconds elapse from the end of the setting change mode with the end of the setting change mode). According to this, the specific signal is output at least during the period corresponding to the predetermined value regardless of whether the control of the setting change mode is ended or the control of the setting confirmation mode is ended. When the mode is controlled, the specific signal will be output for a longer period than the period corresponding to the predetermined value.
It is possible to set different output periods in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode while sharing the setting process by the setting means.

The gaming machine of means O3 is the gaming machine of means O1 or means O2, and in the setting change mode, a specific operation for ending the setting change mode (step S21TM4680).
Specific information storage means (backup of RAM 102) that stores specific information (setting change flag) when power supply to the game machine is stopped without detection that the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off in (2) In the area, the game control microcomputer 100 sets the setting change flag in step S21TM4580 based on the shift to the setting change mode, and clears the setting change flag in step S21TM4720 based on the end of the setting change mode. ), and when the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4030 at power restoration). If it is determined that), the game is stopped and a specific signal is output (steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220 based on the condition for shifting to the setting change mode not being satisfied).
The above process can be repeatedly executed until the power is turned off). According to this, when the power supply is stopped during the control of the setting change mode, the state of the gaming machine can be appropriately notified to the external device when the power supply is restarted.

The game machine of the means O4 is any of the game machines selected from the means O1 to the means O3, and is game control means for controlling the progress of the game (a game control microcomputer for executing a game control timer interrupt process). 100), and a production control means for controlling the execution of the production (CPU 1 for production control)
20), and the game control means is a display means (display monitor 21TM029) and the setting change mode control means (step S21TM4530 to step S21TM4620).
In the game control microcomputer 100) that executes the process of (1) and the setting change mode, a specific operation for ending the setting change mode is not performed (step S
21TM4680 (without detecting the operation of turning off the lock switch 21TM051) specific information storage means for storing specific information when power supply to the game machine is stopped (
In the backup area of the RAM 102, the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4580 based on the change to the setting change mode, and the setting change flag is cleared in step S21TM4720 based on the end of the setting change mode. A microcomputer 100), and when the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means when power supply to the game machine is started (step S2 at power restoration).
1TM4030 (when it is determined that the setting change flag is set), it is possible to execute an error notification on the display means and send an error command to the effect control means (setting value at step S21TM4190). An abnormal error command is transmitted, and "E" is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 in the error display of step S21TM4210.
Character can be displayed), and the effect control means, in response to receiving the error command, gives a notification prompting an operation for changing the set value (the image display device 5
Please display the message "Please turn on the power again to switch to the setting change mode after the power is turned off."). According to this, it is possible to appropriately notify the clerk of the game hall of the state of the game machine and to prompt the operation for changing the set value.

Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), there has been proposed a gaming machine including a setting changing unit that changes setting values in multiple stages based on an external setting changing operation. In the gaming machine as described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), it is necessary to appropriately notify the state of the gaming machine when the power supply is stopped when changing the setting value. The invention relating to means P1 to means P4 is made in view of the above situation, and a gaming machine that appropriately notifies the state of the gaming machine when the power supply is stopped when changing the set value. To provide.

The gaming machine of the means P1 is a gaming machine (pachinko) capable of executing control (big hit determination processing in special symbol process processing, etc.) according to a set value (six stages of set values 0 to 5 with different ranges for big hit determination random numbers). In the gaming machine 1), setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM4530 to step S21TM4620) capable of controlling the setting change mode in which the setting value can be changed, and the setting change mode Specific information storage means for storing specific information that can specify that control has been performed (the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4580 based on the shift to the setting change mode, and the step based on the end of the setting change mode. The game control microcomputer 100 for clearing the setting change flag in S21TM4720), and the specific information storage means can store the specific information even after the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped ( The value of the setting change flag is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102), and when the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means when power supply to the gaming machine is started (power recovery). Error notification means capable of executing error notification (when it is determined that the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4030) (when the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is not satisfied, an error occurs in step S21TM4210). It is characterized by further comprising a game control microcomputer 100) for displaying. According to this, when the power supply is stopped in the setting change mode, the state of the gaming machine can be appropriately notified.

The gaming machine of the means P2 is the gaming machine of the means P1 and the setting change mode control means satisfies the setting change condition (when the power is turned on, the gaming machine frame 3 is in an open state). ,
It is possible to control the setting change mode based on the lock switch 21TM051 being in the ON state and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 being in the ON state, and the power supply to the gaming machine has been started. In this case, when the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means (when it is determined in step S21TM4030 when the power is restored that the setting change flag is set), the setting change condition is satisfied. It is possible to control to the setting change mode without executing the error notification (step S21TM4120, step S21TM4130, step S21TM when the power is turned on).
Based on the determination of YES in all 4140, the process proceeds to the setting change mode without proceeding to the loop processing of step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220).
It is characterized by According to this, when the condition for controlling in the setting change mode is satisfied, the setting change mode is controlled without executing the error notification, and unnecessary error notification is avoided and the set value is appropriately set. Can prompt change.

The gaming machine of the means P3 is the gaming machine of the means P1 or the means P2, and when the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means when power supply to the gaming machine is started (power source) When it is determined in step S21TM4030 at the time of restoration that the setting change flag is set), it is possible to execute the error notification and set the game stop state (when the power is turned on, the setting change mode is set). If the transition condition is not satisfied (step S2
If NO in any of 1TM4120 to step S21TM4140),
Step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4 without shifting to the setting change mode
The process moves to the loop process 220). According to this, the progress of the game in the state where the set value is unstable can be restricted, and the appropriate game control can be realized.

The gaming machine of the means P4 is any gaming machine selected from the means P1 to the means P3, and is a gaming control means for controlling the progress of the gaming (a gaming control microcomputer for executing a gaming control timer interrupt process). 100), and a production control means for controlling the execution of the production (CPU 1 for production control)
20), and the game control means is a display means (display monitor 21TM029),
The setting change mode control means (step S21TM4530 to step S21TM46)
The game control microcomputer 100) that executes the process of 20 and the specific information storage means, and the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means when power supply to the gaming machine is started. Is being performed (when it is determined that the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4030 at the time of power restoration), the error notification is executed on the display unit and an error command is transmitted to the effect control unit. Is possible (
In step S21TM4190, the set value error command is transmitted, and in step S21TM
The character “E” can be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 in the error display of 4210), and the effect control means performs an operation for changing the set value in response to the reception of the error command. A prompt message is displayed (a message "Please turn on the power again to switch to the setting change mode after the power is turned off" is displayed on the image display device 5). According to this, in addition to being able to appropriately notify the clerk of the game hall of the state of the game machine,
The operation for changing the set value can be prompted.

Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), there has been proposed a gaming machine including a setting changing unit that changes setting values in multiple stages based on an external setting changing operation. In the gaming machine as described in JP 2010-200902 A (paragraph 0007), it is necessary to properly determine the state of the gaming machine when the power supply is stopped when changing the setting value. The invention relating to means Q1 to means Q5 is made in view of the above situation, and provides a gaming machine that appropriately determines the state of the gaming machine when the power supply is stopped when changing the set value. To do.

The gaming machine of the means Q1 is a gaming machine (pachinko) capable of executing control (big hit determination processing in special symbol process processing, etc.) according to a set value (six stages of set values 0 to 5 with different ranges for big hit determination random numbers). In the gaming machine 1), setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM4530 to step S21TM4620) capable of controlling the setting change mode in which the setting value can be changed, and the setting change mode Specific information storage means for storing specific information that can specify that control has been performed (the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4580 based on the shift to the setting change mode, and the step based on the end of the setting change mode. The game control microcomputer 100 for clearing the setting change flag in S21TM4720), and the specific information storage means can store the specific information even after the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped ( The value of the setting change flag is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102), and the setting change mode control means
When the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (it is determined that the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4030 at power restoration). In this case, control to the setting change mode (when the power is turned on, the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state. The state is automatically controlled to the setting change mode regardless of whether or not the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is satisfied). According to this, when the power supply is stopped in the setting change mode accompanied by the initialization of the game state, the state of the gaming machine can be appropriately determined. The game machine of the means Q1 initializes the game state corresponding to the control of the setting change mode (for example, RAM in step S21TM4050, step S21TM4150).
RAM clear based on the clear flag being set (step S21TM14
The game control microcomputer 100) for executing 10) may be further provided.

The gaming machine of means Q2 is the gaming machine of means Q1, and the setting change mode control means stores the specific information in the specific information storage means when power supply to the gaming machine is started. If it is not set, the setting change mode is controlled based on the fact that the setting change condition is satisfied (if the setting change flag is not set at power-on (step S2
1TM4030 NO), the gaming machine frame 3 is in an open state, and the lock switch 21TM0
51 is in the ON state and the RAM clear flag is 1 (the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state.
M clear is executed), the setting change mode is set based on the condition for changing to the setting change mode), and the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means. Is controlled to the setting change mode regardless of whether or not the setting change condition is satisfied (when the setting change flag is set at power-on (YES in step S21TM4030), the setting change mode is set). Regardless of whether or not the condition for shifting to is satisfied, the setting change mode is automatically controlled). According to this, when the power is cut off during the control of the setting change mode, the setting information is stored in the setting change mode even when the setting change condition is not satisfied. Since it is controlled, workability can be improved.

The gaming machine of the means Q3 is the gaming machine of the means Q1 or the means Q2, and the setting change mode control means performs a transition operation when power supply to the gaming machine is started (setting is being changed at power-on). When the flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030), the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and
The condition for shifting to the setting change mode is satisfied, in which the RAM clear flag is 1 (RAM clear is executed after the setting change mode ends because the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state). It is confirmed that the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off in the specific operation (step S21TM4680) when the setting change mode is controlled. It is possible to terminate the setting change mode based on the above), and the specific information storage means stores the specific information when the setting change mode is controlled (control of the setting change mode is started. The setting change flag is set at the timing of step S21TM4580), and the specific information is erased when the setting change mode ends based on the specific operation (at the timing of step S21TM4720 when the control of the setting change mode ends). The setting change mode control means clears the setting change mode control means, and when the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means when the power supply to the gaming machine is started, the transition operation is performed. The setting change mode is controlled regardless of whether or not the setting change mode is set (when the setting change flag is set at power-on (YES in step S21TM4030).
S), regardless of whether or not the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is satisfied, the setting change mode is automatically controlled), and the setting change mode is ended based on the specific operation (step S21TM4680). The setting change mode is terminated based on the confirmation that the lock switch 21TM051 has been turned off. According to this, the condition for ending the control of the setting change mode can be appropriately determined.

The gaming machine of the means Q4 is any gaming machine selected from the means Q1 to the means Q3, and is a set value for storing a set value (six stages of set values 0 to 5 having different ranges of random numbers for jackpot determination). A storage unit (a set value storage area of the RAM 102 in which set values are stored) is provided, and control is performed according to the set value stored in the set value storage unit (a big hit determination process in special symbol process processing).
Can be executed, and the setting value stored in the setting value storage means is changed based on the change operation when the setting change mode is controlled (in step S21TM4610, the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is When it is operated, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is changed), and the setting change mode control means sets the setting change mode based on a specific operation when the setting change mode is controlled. Ends (step S2
1TM4680 terminates the setting change mode based on the confirmation that the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off), and the set value storing means performs the specific operation when the setting change mode is controlled. When the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped without being stopped, the setting value after being changed by the changing operation in the setting changing mode is continuously stored (the setting value storage area is a backup area of the RAM 102). When the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated in the setting change mode, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area will be changed. Even if a disconnection occurs, the set value after being changed by the changing operation is retained). According to this, when the power supply is restarted, the set value after being changed by the change operation in the setting change mode before the power failure occurs is stored in the set value storage means, and the set value corresponding to the set value is stored. Since control is executed, workability can be improved.

The gaming machine of the means Q5 is any gaming machine selected from the means Q1 to the means Q3, and is a set value for storing a set value (six stages of set values 0 to 5 having different ranges of random numbers for jackpot determination). A storage unit (a set value storage area of the RAM 102 in which set values are stored) is provided, and control is performed according to the set value stored in the set value storage unit (a big hit determination process in special symbol process processing).
The setting change mode control means performs the changing operation when the setting change mode is controlled and the setting change switch (clear switch) 21 in the setting change mode.
When the TM052 is operated, only the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area is changed instead of the setting value stored in the setting value storage area), and based on the specific operation after the changing operation. The setting value stored in the setting value storage means is changed and the setting change mode is ended (on the basis of the fact that the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off in the setting change mode, the setting information temporary The set value stored in the storage area is stored in the set value storage area to be confirmed as a valid set value and the setting change mode is terminated), and the setting value storage means is controlled to the setting change mode. In this case, when the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped without performing the specific operation, the set value before the change operation is stored in the setting change mode is stored (setting change during the setting change mode Lock switch 21TM051 even when the switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated
The setting value stored in the setting value storage area is not changed unless is switched to OFF, so if the power is cut off during the setting change mode, the setting value before being controlled to the setting change mode is retained. Be done). According to this, when the power supply is stopped in the unstable state where the setting change mode is not finished, the change of the set value can be limited.

(Explanation regarding the characteristic part 052IW)
Next, the characteristic part 052IW will be described. First, a game state in the characteristic part 052IW will be described. First, the gaming state in the present characteristic part 052IW has a normal state (low probability/non-KT state) and a KT state (so-called small hit time) that is more likely to be a small hit than the normal state. Furthermore, there are two types of KT states, a first KT state and a second KT state, and in this characteristic part 052IW, the gaming state is a low probability state and a non-KT state (low probability/non-KT state: normal state). In the case of being controlled, in the case of being controlled to the low probability and the first KT state (low probability/first KT state), and in the case of being controlled to the high probability and the first KT state (high probability/first KT state). In some cases, the probability is high and the second KT state (high probability/second KT state) is controlled.

In the first KT state among the KT states, as will be described later, although a small hit is likely to occur and the special variable winning ball device 17 is likely to be in an open state, the open time of the variable winning ball device 6B on the upstream side is extremely long and the small hit. Even if occurs, there are very few cases where the game balls are won in the special variable winning ball device 17 on the downstream side (for example, about 1 ball for every 100 changes). Specifically, in the first KT state, the state is controlled such that a small hit is likely to occur, and the high base state is controlled so that the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a long time. As will be described later, the second KT state in the KT state has a short opening time of the upstream side variable winning ball device 6B, and when a small hit occurs, the game ball is transferred to the downstream special variable winning ball device 17. Easy to win. Specifically, the second K
In the T state, a small hit is likely to occur and a low base state is controlled so that the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is shortened.

Also, the KT state is a gaming state in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state (low probability/non-KT state). Specifically, in this characteristic portion 052IW, the variable winning ball device 6 is used as a universal figure.
The probability that B is in the open state is higher in the KT state than in the normal state. And, while the ratio of small hits is low when the first special symbol changes, the ratio of small hits is high when the second special symbol changes (however, it will be described later. Therefore, the KT state is set to a gaming state in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state. As a result, in the KT state, a small hit is frequently generated mainly by changing the second special symbol, which is a game state advantageous to the player.

It should be noted that the configuration for setting the KT state in the gaming state in which a small hit is more likely than in the normal state is not limited to this. For example, even in the KT state, the probability that the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state is the same as that in the normal state (for example, 10% or 100%), but when the second special symbol changes. By configuring the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern to be selected in the KT state to be shorter than in the normal state, the ratio of the number of fluctuations to the constant time in the KT state is higher than in the normal state, and the KT state is changed to the normal state. It may be a game state in which a small hit is more likely to occur.

In addition, the characteristic portion 052IW is configured such that the time required for the game ball to reach the variable winning ball device 6B after passing through the passage gate 41 is 0.6 seconds or more. Specifically, it is adjusted by the installation positions of the passage gate 41 and the variable winning ball device 6B, and the group of nails forming the flow path of the game ball. As will be described later in detail, in the present characteristic part 052IW, the variable winning ball device 6B can be controlled to be in an open state based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41. In the first KT state, which will be described later, the game ball passes. The time from the passage of the gate 41 until the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the open state is 0.5 seconds, and the game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 6B after passing through the passage gate 41. Since it is shorter than the required time of 0.6 seconds, when one gaming ball passes through the passage gate 41 in the first KT state, the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to be in the open state. The game balls can be won as they are in the variable winning ball device 6B.

(Special variable winning ball device)
FIG. 10-1 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of the special variable winning ball device 7 in the characteristic portion 052IW. As shown in FIG. 10-1, the special variable winning ball device 7 is provided with a plate-shaped bottom member 052IW108 formed as the bottom surface of the flow path through which the game balls flow, and in the jackpot gaming state, the bottom member 052IW108 is provided. Bottom member 0 from the closed state that is moved forward toward the front
By moving the 52IW 108 backwards, the special winning opening serving as a winning area is opened. The game ball that has won the special winning opening is detected by the first count switch 23.

In this characteristic part 052IW, as shown in FIG. 10-1, the game ball that has won the special winning opening is
Further, it is guided to a guide route 052IW100 provided on the right side of the special variable winning ball device 7.
The guide route 052IW100 is further branched into two routes 052IW102 and 103, and the game ball guided to the guide route 052IW100 is guided to the left route 052IW102 or the right route 052IW103. When guided to the left path 052IW102, the game ball enters the V area 052IW104 and is detected by the V area switch 052IW106. When guided to the right path 052IW103, the game ball is a discharge area 052IW1.
05, and is detected by the discharge area switch 052IW107.

As shown in FIG. 10-1, the V area opening/closing plate 0 is provided near the entrance of the left path 052IW102.
52IW101 is provided, when the V area opening/closing plate 052IW101 is in the open state, the game ball guided to the guide path 052IW100 enters the left path 052IW102, and V
The area 052IW 104 can be entered. Further, when the V area opening/closing plate 052IW101 is in the closed state, the game ball guided to the guide path 052IW100 is the right path 052IW10.
3, and is discharged to the back side of the game area from the discharge area 052IW105.

The V area opening/closing plate 052IW101 is controlled from the closed state to the open state by driving the solenoid 052IW109 by the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103).

In addition, in this feature portion 052IW, when the big hit game is controlled, after the big hit game is completed, provided that the game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during the big hit game and is detected by the V area switch 052IW106. Controlled to the probable state.

The total number of the game balls detected by the V area switch 052IW106 and the discharge area switch 052IW107 during one round is equal to the number of game balls detected by the first count switch 23. It should be. Therefore, the total number of the game balls detected by the V area switch 052IW106 and the discharge area switch 052IW107 in one round is the first count switch 23.
If it does not match the number of game balls detected by, it may be configured to determine a big winning opening winning/discharging mismatch error and notify the error. In this case, since it takes a certain amount of time for the gaming balls won immediately before the special variable winning ball device 7 is closed to reach the V area 052IW104 and the discharge area 052IW105, the special variable winning ball device 7 is closed. If the number of game balls does not match by the time a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses after that, it may be configured to determine that there is a big winning opening winning/discharging mismatch error.

(Configuration of control board)
FIG. 10-2 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like in the characteristic unit 052IW.
In the present characteristic portion 052IW, as shown in FIG. 10-2, the switch circuit 110 includes a gate switch 21, a starting opening switch (first starting opening switch 22A and second starting opening switch 22B).
), count switch (first count switch 23 and second count switch 24))
In addition to the detection signal from the V area switch 052IW106 and the discharge area switch 05
The detection signal from the 2IW 107 is captured and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100.

Further, in the characteristic part 052IW, as shown in FIG.
In addition to the solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100, the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory, the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door, and the solenoid 83 for the special winning opening, as well as the solenoid for the V area opening/closing plate 052IW101. 052IW109.

(Big hit probability, small hit probability)
FIG. 10-3 and FIG. 10-4 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the big hit probability and the small hit probability for each set value. Of these, FIG. 10-3 shows the big hit probability and the small hit probability when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed. Further, FIG. 10-4 shows a big hit probability and a small hit probability when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. Also, FIG.
Further, as shown in FIG. 10-4, in this example, a case is shown in which the setting can be changed in six stages of setting values “1” to “6”. Not only when the setting can be changed in 6 levels,
For example, the setting may be changed in 2 to 5 steps, or the setting may be changed in 7 or more steps.

First, with reference to FIG. 10-3, the big hit probability and the small hit probability when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed will be described. In the example shown in FIG. 10-3(A), in the non-probable variation state (low probability state), the setting value "1" is the lowest with the jackpot probability "205/65536", which is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. ing. Then, the jackpot probability becomes higher in the order of the set value “2”, the set value “3”, the set value “4”, and the set value “5”, and the jackpot probability “6” is set.
247/65536”, which is the highest setting, which is the most advantageous setting for the player. Also,
In the example shown in FIG. 10-3(B), in the probability variation state (high probability state), the winning probability of the jackpot is 10 times as large as that in the non-probability variation state (low probability state), and the set value “ In the case of "1", the jackpot probability is "2050/65536", which is the lowest, and is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. Then, the jackpot probability becomes higher in the order of the set value “2”, the set value “3”, the set value “4”, and the set value “5”, and the set value “6” is the largest jackpot probability “2470/65536”. high,
This is the most advantageous setting for the player.

On the other hand, for small hits, as shown in FIGS.
The small hit probability is “6298/65536” regardless of whether it is “6”, or whether it is a non-probability change state (low probability state) or a probability change state (high probability state). It is constant. That is, in this example, the determination value for the small hit determination is common regardless of the set value, and is also common to the non-probability variation state and the probability variation state. Even if the big hit probability is made different according to the set value while the small hit probability is made constant, as shown in FIG.
As shown in (B), the deviation probabilities may be different between the set values "1" to "6" so that the judgment value numbers for the respective set values match.

Next, with reference to FIG. 10-4, the big hit probability and the small hit probability when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed will be described. In the example shown in FIG. 10-4(A), in the non-probable variation state (low probability state), the setting value "1" is the lowest with the jackpot probability "205/65536", which is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. ing. Then, the jackpot probability becomes higher in the order of the set value “2”, the set value “3”, the set value “4”, and the set value “5”, and the jackpot probability “6” is set.
247/65536”, which is the highest setting, which is the most advantageous setting for the player. Also,
In the example shown in FIG. 10-4(B), in the probability variation state (high-probability state), the winning probability of the jackpot is 10 times larger than that in the non-probability variation state (low-probability state). In the case of "1", the jackpot probability is "2050/65536", which is the lowest, and is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. Then, the jackpot probability becomes higher in the order of the set value “2”, the set value “3”, the set value “4”, and the set value “5”, and the set value “6” is the largest jackpot probability “2470/65536”. high,
This is the most advantageous setting for the player.

On the other hand, for small hits, as shown in FIGS. 10-4 (A) and (B), the set value "1" to
Regardless of whether it is "6", or whether it is a non-probability change state (low probability state) or a probability change state (high probability state), the small hit probability is "62986/65536". It is constant. That is, in this example, the determination value for the small hit determination is common regardless of the set value,
Moreover, the non-probability-changing state and the probability-changing state are common. However, in the present example, in the case of the variable display of the second special symbol (see FIG. 10-4), in comparison with the case of performing the variable display of the first special symbol (see FIG. 10-3), a small hit The winning probability is about 10 times (that is, the number of judgment values for the small hit determination when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the small hit when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed. More than the number of judgment values for judgment). Even if the big hit probability is made different according to the set value, while the small hit probability is made constant, as shown in FIG.
-4(A) and (B), the deviation probabilities may be different between the set values "1" to "6" so that the number of determination values for each set value is matched.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4, the judgment value corresponding to the deviation is included in the judgment values corresponding to all the set values “1” to “6” (FIG. 10). -3 and FIG.
-4, there is no set value for which the outlier probability is 0). Then, the determination value corresponding to the deviation is different according to the set value (depending on which of the set values "1" to "6" as shown in FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4). , The outliers are different).

Note that, not limited to the mode shown in this example, for example, when the outlier probability is 0 (that is,
It may be configured such that there is a set value that does not include the determination value corresponding to the deviation. For example, at the setting value “6” having the highest advantage (the highest jackpot probability), the outfall probability becomes 0, and the determination value corresponding to the outfall may not be included.

In addition, not limited to the mode shown in this example, for example, when the small hit probability is 0 (that is,
There may be a determination value that does not include the determination value corresponding to the small hit. For example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed (FIG. 10-3), the small hit probability is uniformly set to 0, and the determination value for the small hit may not be included. Good.

In addition, in FIGS. 10-3(A), (B) and FIGS. 10-4(A), (B), the small hit probability is the same in the probability variation state (high probability state) and the non-variance probability state (low probability state). Although the probability of deviation is different, the probability of big hit in the probability change state (high probability state) is higher than the probability of non-probability change state (low probability state). It is also possible to reduce and match the outlier probabilities. Furthermore, even if the set values are different values of "1" and "2", respectively, the big hit probability and the small hit probability may be matched. As a result, in a gaming machine in which the number of stages that can be substantially set is less than 6, or in a gaming machine in which there is no difference in advantage due to the setting changing function, a type of gaming machine having a 6-step setting changing function and a hardware/software configuration The manufacturing cost can be reduced.

(Big hit type determination table)
FIGS. 10-5(A) and (B) are explanatory diagrams showing a big hit type determination table stored in the ROM 101. The jackpot type determination table, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot pattern, the type of jackpot is "2R normal jackpot", "2R certainty variation jackpot", "based on the random number for hit type determination. "6R regular big hit", "6R probability variation big hit", or "1
It is a table referred to in order to determine any of "0R probability variation big hit".

As shown in FIG. 10-5(A), in this characteristic part 052IW, when performing variable display of the first special symbol regardless of which of the set values "1" to "6", There is a 9% chance of being determined as a "10R probability variation big hit" and a 56% probability of being determined as a "6R probability variation jackpot".
With a probability of %, it is determined as “6R normal big hit”. Further, as shown in FIG. 10-5(B), in the characteristic portion 052IW, regardless of which of the setting values “1” to “6”, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. Is decided as "10R probability variation big hit" with a probability of 10%,
There is a 50% probability of being determined as a “6R probability variation jackpot”, a 5% probability of being determined as a “2R probability variation jackpot”, and a 35% probability of being determined as a “2R normal jackpot”.

"10R probability change big hit" is a big hit that is controlled to a big hit game state of 10 rounds and is shifted to a high probability state after the end of the big hit game state. In addition, "6R probability variation big hit" is
It is a big hit that is controlled to a big hit game state of 6 rounds, and shifts to a high probability state after the end of the big hit game state. Further, the "2R probability variation big hit" is a big hit that is controlled to a big hit game state of two rounds and is shifted to a high probability state after the end of the big hit game state.

The "6R normal big hit" is a big hit that is controlled to a big hit game state of 6 rounds and is shifted to a low probability state after the end of the big hit game state. Further, the "2R normal big hit" is a big hit that is controlled to a big hit game state for two rounds and is controlled to a low probability state after the big hit game state is finished.

In this characteristic part 052IW, "10R certainty variation big hit", "6R certainty variation big hit", and "6R certainty variation big hit"
In the case of "R normal big hit", a big win until a predetermined period (30 seconds in this example) elapses or a predetermined number (10 pieces in this example) of game balls is won in each round of the big hit game. The mouth is controlled to an open state, and it is possible to win a maximum of 10 big winning openings per round. On the other hand, in the case of "2R probability variable big hit" and "2R normal big hit", the big winning opening is controlled to be in an open state only for a short period (1.8 seconds in this example) in each round of the big hit game. The number of prizes that can be won in each round is about two to three.

Further, in this characteristic portion 052IW, when the big hit game is finished, it is controlled to any of the first KT state, the second KT state or the non-KT state according to the game state before the big hit game and the big hit type, How to transition the game state after the big hit game will be described later (see FIG. 10-29).

(Small hit type judgment table)
FIGS. 10-6(A) and (B) are explanatory diagrams showing the small hit type determination table stored in the ROM 101. The small hit type determination table, when it is determined that the variable display result is a small hit pattern, based on the random number for the small hit type determination, the small hit type is "small hit A.
, "Small hits B" or "Small hits C".

As shown in FIG. 10-6(A), in the characteristic part 052IW, regardless of whether the setting value is "1" to "6", when performing variable display of the first special symbol, 100% of the time, it is decided as "small hit A". In addition, as shown in FIG.
In 2IW, regardless of whether the setting value is "1" to "6", when executing the variable display of the second special symbol, it is determined as "small hit B" with a probability of 70%, 30 With a probability of %, it is determined as “small hit C”.

In this example, as will be described later, in the case of "small hit A", the special winning opening is opened only for a very short 0.2 seconds during the small hit game (see FIGS. 10-12), and the small hit game You can hardly expect to win a game ball into the special prize hole. Also, in the case of "small hit B", the special winning opening is opened for 0.8 seconds during the small hit game (see Fig. 10-13), and the winning of the game ball to the special winning opening during the small hit game. Can be expected to some extent. Also, in the case of "small hit C", the special winning opening is opened for 1.8 seconds during the small hit game (see FIG. 10-14), and the winning of the game ball into the special winning opening during the small hit game. Can be most expected.

(Variation pattern table)
FIGS. 10-7 to 10-9 are explanatory diagrams showing a variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol and the decorative symbol used in the characteristic part 052IW. EX shown in FIGS. 10-7 to 10-9
T is the second byte data of the effect control command (2-byte configuration) corresponding to each variation pattern.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 10-7 to 10-9, nine types of first variation patterns #01 to #09 for the first special symbol and the decorative symbol, and a second variation pattern for the second special symbol and the decorative symbol. 34 types of #01 to #34 are used. Hereinafter, for example, the variation pattern #n(n
= 01-09 or 01-34) means both the first variation pattern #n and the second variation pattern #n.

When performing the variable display of the first special symbol, in the non-KT state (low probability/non-KT state), the variation pattern for the first special symbol for non-KT time shown in FIG. 10-7(A) The table is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 10-7(A), when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed in the non-KT state, it is determined to be one of the first variation patterns #01 to #06.

When the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the KT state (low probability/first KT state, high probability/
In the case of the first KT state, high probability/second KT state), the variation pattern table is selected by selecting the variation pattern table for the first special symbol for KT shown in FIG. 10-7(B). Figure 1
As shown in 0-7(B), when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed in the KT state, it is determined to be one of the first variation patterns #07 to #09.

When performing the variable display of the second special symbol, in the non-KT state (low probability/non-KT state), the variation pattern for the second special symbol for non-KT time shown in FIG. 10-8(C) The table is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 10-8(C), when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the non-KT state, it is determined to be one of the second variation patterns #01 to #03. Specifically, when it is determined to be off, the second variation pattern #01 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for a long period of 15 minutes. Also,
The second variation pattern #02 is also determined when the small hit is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for a long period of 15 minutes. In addition, when it is determined to be a big hit, the second variation pattern #03 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for a certain long period of 5 minutes.

In this characteristic part 052IW, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed even in the non-KT state and a small hit occurs, a situation in which a certain amount of prize balls can be expected due to the winning of the game ball into the special winning opening occurs. Will end up. Therefore, in this characteristic part 052IW, as shown in FIG. 10-8(C), even if the variable display of the second special symbol is executed during the non-KT state, the variable time is extremely lengthened and the frequency of execution of the variable display is increased. The number of small hits is reduced to reduce the occurrence frequency of the small hits, thereby preventing a situation in which the small hits are aimed at to obtain a prize ball even in the non-KT state. In the characteristic part 052IW, the “frequency of occurrence of small hits” is, for example, the occurrence rate of small hits per unit time (for example, 1 minute), and in the KT state, for example,
The percentage of small hits per unit time is higher than in the normal state.

In this characteristic part 052IW, as shown in FIG. 10-8(C), when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the non-KT state, the variation time is obtained even when it is a big hit. 5
By making the length relatively long, it is possible to prevent the act of unreasonably aiming for a prize ball due to winning in the special winning opening during the non-KT state. However, in the case of a big hit, it is not necessary to lengthen the first reserved memory in comparison with the case of a small hit. There is.

When executing the variable display of the second special symbol, in the case of low probability/first KT state, the big hit game based on 6R normal big hit or 2R normal big hit that triggered the low probability/first KT state is ended. A fluctuation pattern table is selected according to the number of fluctuations since then. in this case,
If the variation display of the first variation is executed, the low probability/first KT shown in FIG.
At the same time, the second special symbol variation pattern table for the first variation is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 10-8(D), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the first variation of the low probability/first KT state, one of the second variation patterns #04 to #06. Will be decided.

As shown in FIG. 10-8(D), when it is determined that the first change of the low probability/first KT state is the deviation, the change time is shortened to 5 seconds and the second change pattern #04 of the shortened change is set. It is determined. Further, when it is determined that a small hit is the first change of the low probability/first KT state, the second change pattern #05 (the second start winning opening is opened) is a relatively long change time of 7 seconds for the small hit. (Variation pattern for preparation). As described above, in the characteristic part 052IW, when the first KT state is controlled, the frequency of small hits is high, but the variable winning ball device 6B is actually opened to increase the special variable winning amount. The special winning opening in the ball device 17 is set so as to rarely win a prize. However, in a state immediately after shifting to the low probability/first KT state, there is a possibility that a certain amount of game balls are accumulated on the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 6B or the special variable winning ball device 17, and the special variable winning ball is immediately generated. If the device 17 is controlled to be in the open state, a considerable number of game balls may win the special winning opening. Therefore, in the characteristic portion 052IW, in the first variation of the first KT state, by securing a variation time of at least 7 seconds, the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 are provided before the transition to the first KT state. By controlling the special variable winning ball device 17 to the open state after a sufficient time has passed until all the game balls accumulated on the bottom member are allowed to enter the special winning opening, This prevents the situation where a prize ball more than expected is obtained in the 1KT state. In addition, when it is determined as a big hit as the first variation of the low probability/first KT state, the second variation pattern #06 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for 2 minutes.

In the case of executing the variable display of 2 to 49 fluctuations after finishing the big hit game based on the 6R normal big hit or the 2R normal big hit that triggered the low probability/first KT state, FIG.
-8 (E) low probability / at the time of the first KT and the second special symbol fluctuation pattern table for 2 to 49 fluctuations is selected and the fluctuation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 10-8(E), when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed as the 2-49th variation of the low probability/first KT state, the second variation patterns #07 to #13 It is decided to either. Further, as shown in FIG. 10-8(E), when it is determined that the low probability/the 1st KT state is the 2-49th variation, the deviation is:
The second variation pattern #07 having a shortened variation with a variation time as short as 5 seconds and the second variation pattern #08 having a shortened variation with a variation time as short as 1 second may be determined. On the other hand, low probability/first K
When it is determined that there is a deviation from the 2nd to 49th variation of the T state, the second variation pattern #09 with reach may be determined. Further, when the small probability is determined as the second to 49th fluctuations of the low probability/first KT state, the fluctuation time is as short as 5 seconds and the second fluctuation pattern #10 of the shortened fluctuation or the fluctuation time is as short as 1 second. The second fluctuation pattern #11 of the shortened fluctuation may be determined. On the other hand, when it is determined as a small hit as the 2-49th variation of the low probability/first KT state,
The second variation pattern #12 with reach may be determined. Second variation pattern #07
, #10 are fluctuation patterns that can be selected only when the second hold storage is not stored,
The second variation patterns #08 and #11 are variation patterns that can be selected only when one or more second pending storages are stored. As a result, the pending storage is quickly consumed and the operating rate is increased. Further, when it is determined that the big hit is the second to 49th variation of the low probability/first KT state, the second variation pattern #13 with reach is determined.

Also, after the big hit game based on the 6R normal big hit or the 2R normal big hit that triggered the low probability/first KT state, the 50th fluctuation display (that is, the low probability/final change in the first KT state) is executed. If so, the low probability/first KT time and the 50th variation second special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 10-8(F) are selected, and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 10-8(F), as the 50th variation of the low probability/first KT state,
When the variable display of the special symbol is executed, it is determined to be one of the second variation patterns #14 to #16.

In the characteristic part 052IW, when the low probability/first KT state is controlled, for example, a character display such as “during chance time” is displayed on the image display device 5. Figure 10-
As shown in FIG. 8(F), when it is determined that the 50th variation of the low probability/first KT state is a deviation or a small hit, the image display device 5 displays a character such as “end of chance time!!” The second variation pattern #14 and the second variation pattern #15 accompanied by the display are determined. Further, as shown in FIG. 10-8(F), when it is determined that the 50th variation of the low probability/first KT state is a big hit, a character display such as "end of chance time!!" is displayed on the image display device 5. The second variation pattern #16 with a predetermined restoration display after the completion display to be performed is determined.

In addition, in this characteristic part 052IW, as shown in FIG. 10-7, when it is a big hit in the variation display of the first special symbol during the KT state, the first variation pattern #07 with a variation time of 10 seconds is displayed. Is configured to determine. This is a case where a big hit occurs immediately in the change display of the first special symbol immediately after the transition to the second KT state, and if the change time of the big hit change of the first special symbol is set to a long change time, Since the variation of the second special symbol executed during the big hit variation of the first special symbol is configured to be a forced outfall, the forced outfall frequently occurs even though the second KT state and the player is a small hit. You will not be able to receive any profit from.
Therefore, in this characteristic part 052IW, by changing the variation time of the big hit variation of the first special symbol to a short variation time, the big hit game state based on the variation of the first special symbol is frequently generated before the frequent forced deviation occurs. It is configured.

Unlike the characteristic part 052IW, even when the variation of the second special symbol is started during the jackpot variation of the first special symbol, the variation of the second special symbol is not forcedly removed (for example, the first Special symbol big hit symbol When the second special symbol is changing at the time of stop, if the gaming machine of the second special symbol is forced out), the variation time of the first special symbol big hit in the KT state May be a long fluctuation time (for example, 1 minute). This is a case where a big hit occurs immediately in the change display of the first special symbol immediately after the transition to the second KT state, and if the change time of the big hit is the same short change time as the deviation, the player You will not be able to receive any profit from the small hit. Therefore, if the variation time of the big hit of the first special symbol in the KT state is a long variation time (for example, 1 minute), even in such a case, a sufficient time that at least a plurality of small hits can occur. (For example, 1 minute) is ensured.

When executing the variation display of the second special symbol, if it is in the high probability / first KT state, the variation after finishing the jackpot game based on the 6R certainty variation jackpot that triggered the high probability / first KT state The variation pattern table is selected according to the number of times. In this case, if the variation display of the first variation is executed, the high probability/first KT shown in FIG. 10-9(G) and the second special symbol variation pattern table for the first variation are selected and varied. The pattern is determined. Figure 10-
As shown in FIG. 9(G), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the first variation of the high probability/first KT state, it is determined to be one of the second variation patterns #17 to #21. It

Note that, as in the case of the first change in the low probability/first KT state, as shown in FIG. 10-9(G), the change time is also determined when the deviation is determined as the first change in the high probability/first KT state. The second variation pattern #17 with a shortened variation as short as 5 seconds may be determined. On the other hand, high probability/first KT
The second variation pattern #18 with reach even when it is determined that the first variation of the state is off
May be decided. Also, when the small hit is determined as the first variation of the high probability/first KT state, the variation pattern (second variation pattern #19) for the second start winning opening opening preparation may be determined. On the other hand, when the small hit is determined as the first variation of the high probability/first KT state, the second variation pattern #20 with reach may be determined. In addition, FIG.
As shown in -9(G), when it is determined that the big variation is the first variation of the high probability/first KT state, the second variation pattern #21 with reach is determined.

Further, if the variation display after the second variation after the jackpot game based on the 6R certainty variation jackpot that triggered the high probability/first KT state is to be executed, the variation shown in FIG. The probability/first KT time and the second special symbol variation pattern table for the second variation and thereafter is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 10-9(H), 2 of high probability/first KT state
When the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the variation or later, the second variation pattern #2
2 to #28.

Note that, as in the case of the 2nd to 49th fluctuations of the low probability/first KT state, as shown in FIG. 10-9(H), when it is determined that there is a deviation after the second fluctuation of the high probability/first KT state, In some cases, the second variation pattern #22 with a shortened variation with a variation time as short as 5 seconds or the second variation pattern #23 with a shortened variation with a variation time as short as 1 second may be determined. On the other hand, high probability/first KT state 2
When it is determined that there is a deviation after the variation, the second variation pattern #24 with reach may be determined. Further, when it is determined that the small hit is the second variation of the high probability/first KT state and thereafter, the second variation pattern #25 of the shortened variation having a short variation time of 5 seconds and the variation time of 1
In some cases, the second variation pattern #26 having a shortened variation of a second and a shorter variation may be determined. On the other hand, when it is determined that the small hit is the second variation of the high probability/first KT state and thereafter, the second with the reach is decided.
The variation pattern #27 may be determined. The second fluctuation patterns #22 and #25 are fluctuation patterns that can be selected only when the second reserved memory is not stored, and the second fluctuation patterns #23 and #26 are stored when one or more second reserved memories are stored. This is a variation pattern that can be selected only when As a result, the pending storage is quickly consumed and the operating rate is increased. Also,
When it is determined to be a big hit after the second variation of the high probability/first KT state, the second variation pattern #28 with reach is determined.

When the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, in the case of high probability/second KT state, FIG.
The variation pattern is determined by selecting the variation pattern table for the second special symbol for the high probability/second KT time shown in 0-9(I). As shown in FIG. 10-9(I), when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the high probability/second KT state, the second variation pattern #29 to #
It is determined to be any of 34.

As shown in FIG. 10-9(I), when it is determined that there is a deviation in the high-probability/second KT state, the second variation pattern #29 of a short variation with a short variation time of 1.5 seconds is determined. In some cases, the second fluctuation pattern #30, which is a normal fluctuation having a fluctuation time of 5 seconds, may be determined.
On the other hand, when the high probability/second KT state is determined to be a deviation, the second variation pattern #31 with reach may be determined. Further, when it is determined that the small hit in the high probability/second KT state, the variation time is determined to be the second variation pattern #32 with a short variation time of 1.5 seconds, or the variation time is usually 5 seconds. The second fluctuation pattern #33 of fluctuation may be determined. Further, when it is determined that the big hit in the high probability/second KT state, the second variation pattern #34 with reach is determined.

When determining the variation pattern, more specifically, depending on which variation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is to be executed, the current game state, and the variable display result. Using the fluctuation pattern table, perform lottery processing based on random numbers for fluctuation pattern determination,
Which fluctuation pattern is used is determined. FIG. 10-10 is for determining the variation pattern when the variable display result is a small hit in the variation pattern table for the second special symbol for high probability/second KT time shown in FIG. 10-9(I). It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the fluctuation pattern table for small hits.

As shown in FIG. 10-10, in this characteristic part 052IW, when performing the variable display of the second special symbol during the high probability/second KT state, when performing the variable display that is a small hit, Regardless of which of the set values is "1" to "6", the second variation pattern #32 is determined with a probability of 70% and the second variation pattern #33 with a probability of 30%. Therefore, in this example, in the case of the second KT state, there is a high probability that the fluctuation pattern of the shortened fluctuation of 1.5 seconds will be selected.

In addition, in FIG. 10-10, as an example, the variation pattern table when executing the small hit variation of the second special symbol during the high probability/second KT state is shown, but in FIG. 10-7 to FIG. 10-9. The other variation pattern tables shown are similarly configured, and each variation pattern is determined with the same probability regardless of which of the set values is "1" to "6".

In the examples shown in FIGS. 10-8 to 10-10, the shortening fluctuation of 5 seconds or 1 second is executed in the case of the first KT state, and the shortening fluctuation of 1.5 seconds is high in the case of the second KT state. However, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, a shortened fluctuation of 5 seconds or 1 second may be performed in the low probability state, and a shortened fluctuation of 1.5 seconds may be performed in the high probability state.

(Opening pattern of special variable winning ball device 7)
Next, the opening pattern of the special variable winning ball device 7 will be described. FIG. 10-11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an opening pattern of the special variable winning ball device 7. First, Fig. 10-11 (
1) is used to explain the opening pattern of the special variable winning ball device 7 when controlled to a big hit game based on 10R certainty variation big hits, 6R certainty variation big hits, and 2R certainty variation big hits (hereinafter also simply referred to as "certain variation big hits") To do. As shown in FIG. 10-11(1), when the first round of the big hit game is started, the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door is driven, and the special variable winning ball device 7 (large winning opening) is in the open state. Controlled by. When the game ball wins while the special winning opening is open, it is detected by the first count switch 23.

Further, in the big hit game based on the probability variation big hit, as shown in FIG.
When the winning of the second game ball to the special winning opening is detected in the round, the solenoid 052I
W109 is driven, V area opening/closing plate 052IW101 is controlled to the open state, and V area 052
A game ball can enter the IW 104. Then, when a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) elapses or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning holes are detected in the first round, as shown in FIG. When the variable winning a prize ball device 7 (the special winning opening) is controlled to the closed state again and the special winning opening is controlled to the closed state, the V area opening/closing plate 052IW101 is also controlled to the closed state.

A game ball enters the V area 052IW104, and within the predetermined detection effective period, the V area switch 0
When detected by the 52IW 106, the gaming state is controlled to a probable state after the jackpot game is over. As shown in FIG. 10-11(1), in the jackpot game based on the probability variation jackpot, the predetermined detection effective period is started at the timing when the V area opening/closing plate 052IW101 is controlled to be in the open state, and the V area opening/closing plate 052IW101 is It is a period until a predetermined period (500 ms in this example) elapses after the closed state is controlled again.

Next, with reference to FIG. 10-11 (2), the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened when the jackpot game is controlled based on the 6R regular jackpot and the 2R regular jackpot (hereinafter, also simply referred to as “regular jackpot”). The pattern will be described. As shown in FIG. 10-11(2), when the first round of the big hit game is started, the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door is driven, and the special variable winning ball device 7 (large winning opening) is opened. Controlled by. When the game ball wins while the special winning opening is open, it is detected by the first count switch 23.

In the big hit game based on the normal big hit, as shown in FIG.
When the winning of the first game ball to the special winning opening is detected in the round, the solenoid 052I
W109 is driven, and the V area opening/closing plate 052IW101 is in an extremely short period (0.
It is controlled to open for 02 seconds. Then, in the first round, a predetermined period (for example, 29
10 seconds, or when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winnings in the special winning opening are detected, FIG.
As shown in 11 (2), the special variable winning ball device 7 (big winning opening) is controlled to be closed again,
The special winning opening is controlled to be closed.

As shown in FIG. 10-11(2), in a big hit game based on a normal big hit, a predetermined detection effective period is an extremely short opening period (0.02 in this example) of the V area opening/closing plate 052IW101.
It is a period until a predetermined period (500 ms in this example) elapses after (seconds).

As shown in FIG. 10-11(1), in the big hit game based on the probability variation big hit, the opening period of the V area opening/closing plate 052IW101 is long. Therefore, during the predetermined detection effective period, the V region 052
A game ball easily enters the IW 104, and is easily controlled to a probable state after the jackpot game is over.
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-11(2), in the big hit game based on the normal big hit, the opening period of the V area opening/closing plate 052IW101 is extremely short. Therefore, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the V region 052IW104 substantially during the predetermined detection effective period, and it is extremely rare that the game ball is controlled to the probable state after the big hit game ends. Therefore, in this example, in the big hit game based on the probability variation big hit, the game balls enter the V area 052IW104 at a higher rate during the big hit game than in the big hit game based on the normal big hit.

Next, the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the KT state will be described. FIGS. 10-12 to 10-14 are explanatory views for explaining the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the KT state. Of these, FIGS. 10-12 show opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the case of the small hit A. 10 to 13 show open patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the case of a small hit B. Also,
10-14 is a variable winning ball device 6B and a special variable winning ball device 1 in the case of a small hit C.
7 shows a release pattern of 7. 10-12(1) to 10-14(1) show the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the first KT state, respectively, and FIG. 10-12(2). 10 to 14(2) show open patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the second KT state, respectively.

First, the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the first KT state will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-12(1) to 10-14(1). Figure 10
As shown in -12(1) to 10-14(1), when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 and the game ball is detected by the gate switch 21, the normal symbol is displayed on the normal symbol display 20. The variable display is executed, and when it is determined that it is a normal figure, the hit symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display device 20, and when it is determined that it is out, the deviating symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display device 20. .. In this characteristic part 052IW, as shown in FIGS. 10-12(1) to 10-14(1), the variation time of the normal symbol is set to 0.2 seconds, and the symbol determination for deriving and displaying the hit symbol or the off symbol is determined. The time is 0.2 seconds. Then, when the winning symbol is derived and displayed, FIG.
As shown in (1) to FIG. 10-14 (1), after the symbol settlement time of 0.2 seconds has passed, the second start winning opening opening pre-processing time of 0.1 seconds has passed, and then the variable winning ball. The device 6B is opened for 5.5 seconds, and the game ball can be won in the second start winning port.

When the game ball is won in the second start winning port when the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, and when it is determined to be a small hit, The small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B. When the small hit symbol is derived and displayed, and in the case of the small hit A, the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened for 0.2 seconds as shown in FIG. 10-12(1). 10-13, in the case of small hit B,
As shown in (1), when the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened for 0.8 seconds and the small hit is C, as shown in FIG. Device 17 is 1
． It is opened for 8 seconds, and the game ball can be won in the special winning opening (however, in the case of the small hit A, the special variable winning ball device 17 opens for an extremely short 0.2 seconds, Almost no prize can be expected). However, in the first KT state, FIG.
), the downstream special variable winning ball device 17 has a short opening time of 0.2 seconds, 0.8 seconds or 1.8 seconds, while the upstream variable winning ball device 6B has an opening time. The time is as long as 5.5 seconds. Therefore, in the first KT state, although a small hit is likely to occur, it is extremely rare for a game ball to win a special winning opening (for example, about 1 ball for every 100 variable displays).

In the first KT state, as shown in FIGS. 10-12(1) to 10-14(1), after the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B is completed, the next variable winning ball device 6B can be opened. After the at least 0.5 seconds, which is the sum of the following variation time of the ordinary symbol of 0.2 seconds, symbol determination time of 0.2 seconds, and second starting winning opening opening pretreatment time of 0.1 seconds, is there. Therefore, this feature 05
In 2IW, in the first KT state, a closing period of at least 0.5 seconds is provided as an interval period after the variable winning ball device 6B is opened.

Further, in the present characteristic portion 052IW, in the first KT state, after the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41 in a state where the normal symbol is not changed, the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to be in an open state. Usually after 0.5 seconds which is the total of the variation time of the symbol 0.2 seconds, the symbol confirmation time 0.2 seconds and the second starting winning opening opening pretreatment time 0.1 seconds, the game ball is The time required to reach the variable winning ball apparatus 6B after passing through the passage gate 41 is configured to be about 0.6 seconds. In this way, in the first KT state, the time from when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 to when the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to be in an open state in a state where the normal symbol is not changed, Normally, the variable winning ball device 6B is already opened because it is shorter than the time it takes for the gaming ball to reach the variable winning ball device 6B after the gaming ball passes through the passing gate 41 in a state where the symbols are not changed. The game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 6B while being controlled to the state. Therefore, in the first KT state, the game balls that have passed through the passage gate 41 in a state where the normal symbols are not changed are easy to win in the variable winning ball device 6B.

Next, the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the second KT state will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-12(2) to 10-14(2). Figure 10
As shown in -12(2) to 10-14(2), when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 and the game ball is detected by the gate switch 21, the normal symbol is displayed on the normal symbol display 20. The variable display is executed, and when it is determined that it is a normal figure, the hit symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display device 20, and when it is determined that it is out, the deviating symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display device 20. .. In this characteristic part 052IW, as shown in FIGS. 10-12(2) to 10-14(2), the variation time of the normal symbol is set to 1.0 second, and the symbol determination for deriving and displaying the hit symbol or the deviating symbol is determined. The time is 0.2 seconds. Then, when the winning symbol is derived and displayed, FIG.
As shown in (2) to FIG. 10-14 (2), after the symbol confirmation time of 0.2 seconds has passed, after the second start winning opening opening pre-processing time of 2.6 seconds has passed, the variable winning ball The device 6B is opened for 0.2 seconds, and the game ball can be won in the second start winning port.

When the game ball is won in the second start winning port when the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, and when it is determined to be a small hit, The small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B. When the small hit symbol is derived and displayed, and in the case of the small hit A, as shown in FIG. 10-12 (2), the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened for 0.2 seconds. 10-13, in the case of small hit B,
As shown in (2), when the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened for 0.8 seconds and the small hit is C, as shown in FIG. Device 17 is 1
． It will be open for 8 seconds, and game balls can be won in the special winning opening.

In the second KT state, unlike the first KT state, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is extremely short at 0.2 seconds. Further, in the characteristic portion 052IW, in the second KT state, the variable winning ball device 6
As an interval period (closing period) after opening B, at least 3.8 seconds (normal symbol variation time of 1.0 seconds + symbol determination time of 0.2 seconds + second starting winning opening before opening processing of 2.6 seconds) ) Has been secured for a relatively long period. Therefore, in the second KT state, FIG.
As shown in FIG. 10-14(2), the variable winning ball device 6B on the upstream side has a short opening time and a long interval period (closing period). Therefore, compared to the first KT state, the downstream special variable winning device A game ball easily enters the ball device 17, and a game ball easily enters the special winning opening. However,
In the case of a small hit A, the special variable winning ball device 17 opens for an extremely short 0.2 seconds, so that the winning of the game ball into the special winning opening can hardly be expected even in the second KT state.

In the second KT state, the game balls are likely to enter the special winning opening and the prize balls are easily obtained. Therefore, in this example, it is also referred to as "small hit RUSH". In the second KT state, "small hit R
A character display such as "USH" is displayed.

In this example, the opening time of the special variable winning a prize ball device 17 (special winning opening) is changed depending on whether the small hit type is a small hit A to C. I can't stop. For example, the number of times of opening the special variable winning ball device 17 may be changed depending on which of the small hit types A to C. In this case, for example, in the case of the small hit A, the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened only once during the small hit game, whereas in the case of the small hit B or the small hit C, during the small hit game. The special variable winning ball device 17 may be configured to be opened 2 to 11 times. Further, for example, even if the opening time of the special variable winning ball device 17 is somewhat short, by opening the special variable winning ball device 17 for 0.4 seconds four times, the special variable winning ball device 17 (special winning opening ) May be provided with a small hit type in which a game ball can be won to some extent, and various modes are conceivable. Further, in this example, the small hit type is the small hit A to
Although the case of three types of C has been shown, the present invention is not limited to such an aspect, and for example, four or more types of small hit types may be provided.

Further, in the characteristic portion 052IW, in the second KT state, after the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41 in a state where the normal symbol is not changed, the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to be in an open state. It is after the total of 3.8 seconds which is the total of the variation time of the normal symbol of 1.0 second, the symbol fixing time of 0.2 seconds and the second starting winning opening opening pre-processing time of 2.6 seconds, and the game ball is The time required from passing through the passage gate 41 to reaching the variable winning ball apparatus 6B is about 0.6 seconds. In this way, in the second KT state, the time from when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 to when the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to be in an open state in a state where the normal symbol is not changed, Normally, the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state because it is longer than the time it takes for the gaming ball to reach the variable winning ball device 6B after the gaming ball passes through the passage gate 41 in a state where the symbols are not changed. The game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 6B before being controlled to. Therefore, in the second KT state, the game balls that have passed through the passage gate 41 in a state where the normal symbols are not changed are difficult to win in the variable winning ball device 6B.

In addition, in this characteristic part 052IW, the variable display of the normal symbols is executed and the variable winning ball device 6 is used.
The process of controlling the opening of B is performed by the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically,
It is performed by the normal symbol process process (see step S26) is executed by the CPU103). Further, the game control microcomputer 100, in the normal symbol process process of step S26, whether the game state is a probability change state (high probability state), whether in the non-KT state, the first KT state or the second KT state. Regardless of whether there is a big hit game state or not, it is determined with the same probability (for example, 10% or 100%) whether or not to be a universal figure hit.

In the characteristic part 052IW, in the first KT state and the second KT state, the variation time of the normal symbol and the symbol settlement time are the same at 0.2 seconds each, and the second starting winning opening opening pre-processing time is the second. A case has been shown in which the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball apparatus 6B is made different by shortening it to 0.1 seconds in the 1KT state and lengthening it to 2.6 seconds in the second KT state. I can't. For example, the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball apparatus 6B may be different by changing the variation time and the symbol determination time between the first KT state and the second KT state. Further, for example, the time after the second starting winning opening opening processing after closing the variable winning ball device 6B is configured to be controllable, and if the second starting winning opening opening processing time is different between the first KT state and the second KT state. The variable winning ball device 6B may be configured to have a different closing period (interval period). Particularly, if the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball device 6B in the first KT state is shortened by any of the above methods, the winning of the special winning opening in the first KT state can be suppressed. ..

As will be described later, in the characteristic portion 052IW, in the first KT state, by controlling the high base state by setting the high base flag indicating the high base state, the characteristics shown in FIGS. As shown in 10-14(1), control is performed so that the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B becomes longer. In the second KT state, the variable baseball apparatus 6B is opened by controlling the low base state without setting the high base flag, as shown in FIGS. 10-12(2) to 10-14(2). It is controlled to shorten the time.

In addition, for example, a special flag (open extension flag) indicating that the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is extended is provided, and if the special flag is set, it is shown in FIG.
10-14(1), the variable winning ball apparatus 6B is controlled by the first opening pattern (long opening) that opens for a long time, and if the special flag is not set, FIG. 10-12(2).
The variable winning ball device 6B shown in FIG. 10-14(2) may be configured to be controlled by the second opening pattern (short opening) that opens for a short time. That is, the special flag may be set only in the first KT state, and in other states including the big hit game state, the special flag may not be set.

Further, even in the first KT state, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B may be shortened when the low-probability/last variation display in the first KT state is executed. For example, low probability/first KT
In the shortened variation period of the special symbol of 50 times of the state, the above-mentioned special flag may be deleted according to the 49th variation of the special symbol. If so configured, low probability/
After the end of the first KT state, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the long open state of the variable winning ball device 6B when performing the left-handed notification.

As described above, in the case of configuring the variable winning ball device 6B by using the opening control flag (special flag) of the variable winning ball device 6B, further, a flag for shortening fluctuation of the variable display of the special symbol is used. The variable display of the special symbol may be controlled in this case, and in this case, the special flag and the flag for shortening variation may be separately managed and controlled.

Further, the variable winning ball device 6B may be configured to be short-circuited open during the low probability/non-KT state. With such a configuration, when the probability of opening the variable winning ball device 6B is high in the low probability/non-KT state (left hit state), only a few game balls are operated to be fired. It is possible to prevent winning in the variable winning ball device 6B with low probability/non-KT
It is possible to prevent the right hitting operation from being performed during the state.

In this characteristic part 052IW, as shown in FIGS. 10-12 to 10-14, the variation time of the normal symbol is set to a short time of 0.2 seconds. This is, for example, in the case where the variable display of the second special symbol having a relatively long variation time is executed in the first KT state, the variable winning ball is in a state in which the normal symbol is in a variation stop and the normal symbol is not stored. This is because the device 6B is in a closed state, and it is possible to capture with the aim of the variation stop timing of the second special symbol. The variable winning ball device 6B does not open by the time the game ball that has passed through 41 reaches the variable winning ball device 6B or the special variable winning ball device 17, and the special winning opening can be won. On the other hand, in this characteristic part 052IW, by shortening the variation time of the normal symbol, the variable winning ball device 6B is opened before the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 and before reaching the variable winning ball device 6B. Since it is set to be started, it is possible to eliminate the capture element by the firing operation aiming at the small hit occurrence timing based on the variable display of the second special symbol in the first KT state.

(Direction control command)
FIG. 10-15 and FIG. 10-16 are explanatory views showing an example of the content of the effect control command sent to the effect control CPU 120. In the example shown in FIGS. 10-15, command 80
00 (H) to 8009 (H), 8011 (H) to 8032 (H) are production control commands for designating the variation pattern of the decorative pattern variably displayed on the image display device 5 in correspondence with the variable display of the special symbol. (Variation pattern command). The effect control command for designating the variation pattern is also a command for designating the variation start. Therefore, CPU for production control
120 is a command 8000 (H) to 8009 (H), 8011 (H) to 8032 (H)
When either of the above is received, the image display device 5 is controlled to start variable display of the decorative pattern.

The command 9001 (H) is a production control command (display result 1 designation command) (deviation designation command) that designates that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern designated by the variation pattern command is designated as a margin. Command 9002 (H) is a production control command (display result 2 designation command (10R probability variation big hit designation command)) which designates that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern designated by the variation pattern command is 10R probability variation big hit. . The command 9003(H) displays the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern designated by the variation pattern command as 6
It is an effect control command (display result 3 designation command (6R probability variation big hit designation command)) that designates the R probability variation big hit. Command 9004 (H) is a production control command (display result 4 designation command (6R normal jackpot designation command)) that designates that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern designated by the variation pattern command is 6R normal jackpot. . The command 9005 (H) displays the display result of the variable display of the decorative design specified by the variation pattern command as 2
It is an effect control command (display result 5 designation command (2R probability variation big hit designation command)) that specifies that the R probability variation big hit is to be performed. Command 9006 (H) is an effect control command (display result 6 designation command (2R normal jackpot designation command)) that designates that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern designated by the variation pattern command is 2R normal jackpot. .. The command 9007 (H) is an effect control command (display result 7 designation command (small hit designation command)) that designates that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern designated by the variation pattern command is a small hit.

Hereinafter, the display result 1 designation command to the display result 7 designation command may be referred to as a display result designation command. In addition, in this characteristic part 052IW, the game control microcomputer 1
00 transmits the display result designation command immediately before the variation pattern command, so that the display result designation command received by the production control CPU 120 immediately before the first variation pattern command is the first
It can be determined that it is a display result designation command for the special symbol, and the display result designation command received immediately before the second variation pattern command can be determined to be a display result designation command for the second special symbol, so the display result designation command Although the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be combined, the display result designation command for the first special symbol and the display result designation command for the second special symbol may be different.

In addition, the game control microcomputer 100 does not send a display result designation command, but responds to each of 10R probability variation big hit, 6R probability variation big hit, 6R normal big hit, 2R probability variation big hit, 2R normal big hit, small hit, and out. The variation pattern command may be defined, and the effect control CPU 120 may determine the stop symbol of the decorative symbol based on the received variation pattern command.

Command 9C00 (H) is a production control command (right-handed lighting end designation command) that specifies that the right-handed indicator 26 has finished lighting. Command 9C01 (H) is a production control command (right-handed lighting start designation command) that specifies that the right-handed indicator 26 has started lighting.

Command A000 (H) is a production control command (first symbol confirmation designation command) that can specify the stop of the variable display of the first special symbol. Command A001 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol confirmation designation command) that can specify the stop of the variable display of the second special symbol.

Command A002 (H) is a production control command (first compulsory symbol confirmation designation command) that can specify to forcibly stop the variable display of the first special symbol. Command A003 (H) is a production control command (second forced symbol confirmation designation command) that can specify that the variable display of the second special symbol is forcibly stopped.

Command BXXX (H) (X = arbitrary hexadecimal number) is a production control command sent from the start of the big hit game to the end of the big hit game. Among them, B000 (H) is an effect control command (big hit start designation command: fanfare designating command) for designating the start of the big hit game. B001 (H) is an effect control command that specifies the end of the big hit game (
Big hit end designation command: ending designation command). B004 (H) is an effect control command (small hit start designation command) for designating the start of the small hit game. B005
(H) is a production control command (small hit end designation command) for designating the end of the small hit game.

Command B1XX (H) is a production control command (display command during the opening of the special winning opening) for designating the display during the round during the big hit game. The number of rounds displayed in "XX" is set. Command B2XX (H) is a production control command (display command after opening the special winning opening) that specifies display after the round during the big hit game (display of interval between rounds).

The command B400 (H) is an effect control command (a special winning opening winning designation command) that specifies that the game ball has won in the special winning opening. Command B401 (H) is an effect control command (special winning a prize winning designation command) that specifies that a game ball has won a special winning opening.

The command C000 (H) is an effect control command (first effective start winning award designation command) indicating that the game ball has won the first starting winning opening in a state where the first reserved memory number has not reached 4. The command C001 (H) is an effect control command (second effective start winning award designation command) indicating that the game ball has won in the second starting winning opening in a state where the second reserved memory number has not reached 4. It should be noted that a command indicating the first reserved memory number may be transmitted as the first effective start winning combination designation command, and a command indicating the second reserved memory number may be transmitted as the second effective start winning combination designation command. Then, the first effective start winning award designating command and the second effective starting award winning designating command are commands indicating that there is a starting winning.

Command C801 (H) is a production control command (gate passage designation command) that designates that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41.

Command D000 (H), the first customer waiting state (the first special symbol has not changed,
It is an effect control command (first customer waiting demonstration display designation command) that specifies that the first hold memory is not stored. Command D001(H) is in the second customer waiting state (second
It is a production control command (second customer waiting demo display designation command) that specifies that the special symbol is not changed and the second hold storage is not stored). The first customer waiting demo display designation command may be a command that can be transmitted only in the normal state. Further, the second customer waiting demonstration display designation command may be a command that can be transmitted only in the KT state.

The command E000(H) is an effect control command (low probability/non-KT background designating command) for designating the background display when the game state is the low probability/non-KT state. Command E001 (
H) is an effect control command (low probability/first KT background designation command) for designating the background display when the gaming state is the low probability/first KT state. Command E002 (H) is a production control command (high accuracy/first) that specifies the background display when the game state is the high probability/first KT state.
KT background designation command). Command E003 (H) has a high probability of a game state/second K
It is a production control command (high-accuracy/second KT background designation command) for designating the background display in the T state.

Command E1XX (H) is a production control command (which specifies the currently set value.
Setting value command). The set value is set to "XX". For example, setting value "1"
When set to, the command E101(H) is transmitted as the set value command. Further, for example, when the set value is set to "6", the command E106(H) is transmitted as the set value command.

The effect control CPU 120 (specifically, the effect control CPU 120) mounted on the effect control board 12 is the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11.
10-15 and 10-16 according to the contents shown in FIGS. 10-15 and 10-16, the display state of the image display device 5 is changed and the display state of the lamp is changed. The sound number data is output to. 10-15 and FIG.
Production control commands other than the production control command shown in -16 are also transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. For example, more detailed effect control commands related to the big hit game and effect control commands indicating the game state (for example, effect control commands indicating initialization commands) are also transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

(First special symbol normal processing)
10-17 is a flowchart showing a first special symbol normal process (step S110A) in the first special symbol process process. The state where the first special symbol normal process is executed,
This is the case where the value of the first special figure process flag is the value indicating step S110A. In addition, when the value of the first special figure process flag is the value indicating step S110A,
It is a state in which the variable display of the first special symbol is not made in the first special symbol display device 4A.

In the first special symbol normal processing, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103), first, the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal processing (step S120). It is confirmed whether or not (step 052IWS50A). The case where the value of the accessory control process flag is the value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), that is, the value of the accessory control process flag is the gate passage waiting process (step S121) to small hit. It is a case where the value does not indicate the ending process (step S128), and it is neither during the big hit game (opening the special variable winning ball device 7 a predetermined number of times) nor during the small hit game (opening the special variable winning ball device 17). is there.

If the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), the game control microcomputer 100 confirms the value of the first reserved memory number (
Step 052IWS51A). Specifically, the count value of the first reserved storage number counter is confirmed. If the number of the first pending storage is 0, the first customer waiting demonstration display designation command is the production control C
It is transmitted to the PU 120 (step 052IWS52A).

If the first number of reserved memories is not 0, the game control microcomputer 100 is RAM1
Each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of reserved memories in the first reserved memory number 02 of 02 is read and stored in the first random number buffer area of the RAM 102 (step 052IWS53A), and the first reserved memory. The number value is decremented by 1 (the count value of the first pending storage number counter is decremented by 1), and the contents of each storage area are shifted (step 052IW).
S54A). That is, each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number=n (n=2, 3, 4) in the first reserved storage number buffer of the RAM 102 is calculated as follows: Stored in the save area corresponding to 1. Therefore, the order in which the random number values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the respective first reserved storage numbers are extracted is always the first reserved storage number=1.
, 2, 3, 4 are in order. That is, in this example, the content of each storage area is shifted each time the variable display start condition is satisfied, so that the order in which each random value is extracted can be specified. In this example, the random number values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the first reserved storage number and the random number values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the second reserved storage number are The extraction order is also saved so that it can be specified.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 performs control to transmit a set value command indicating a set value set in the RAM 102 to the effect control board 12 (step 052I).
WS55A). In this example, the setting value command is transmitted every time the variable display is started by executing the processing of step 052IWS55A. The set value command is also sent when is executed.

Note that the timing of transmitting the set value command is not limited to that shown in this example. It may be configured to do so.

After that, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a background designation command according to the current game state to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS56A). Specifically, when the probability variation flag and the high base flag are off, the low probability/non-KT state is determined and the low probability/non-KT background designation command is issued, and the probability variation flag is off and the high base flag is on. If there is a low probability/first KT state, it is determined that the low probability/first KT background designation command,
When the probability variation flag is on and the high base flag is on, the high probability/first KT background determination command is determined to be the high probability/first KT state, and the probability variation flag is on and the high base flag is off. , A high probability/second KT background determination command is transmitted, and a high probability/second KT background designation command is transmitted.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the big hit of the second special symbol is changing (step 052IWS57A). Specifically, it is determined that the big hit of the second special symbol is changing when the second big hit flag indicating that it is a big hit based on the variable display of the second special symbol is set. If it is determined that the big hit of the second special symbol is fluctuating, step 052I is performed without performing the processing after step 052IWS58A.
Move to WS69A. As a result, when the variation of the first special symbol is started during the variation of the big bonus of the second special symbol, the configuration is forcibly deviated regardless of whether or not the jackpot determination value is stored.

The method of forcibly disengaging is not limited to the above. For example, when the big hit variation of the second special symbol is in step 052IWS57A, a process of setting a random number value (fixed value) that is out of alignment as the hit determination random number is performed, and step 052IWS59A
By shifting to, it may be forcibly disregarded regardless of which random number for hit determination is acquired at the time of winning the start.

In addition, for example, when the big hit variation of the second special symbol is in step 052IWS57A, without performing the processing of step 052IWS58A to S63A, a random number value (fixed value) that is deviated as a random number for hit determination is set and set to a small value. By performing the hit determination, the hit may be forcibly disregarded regardless of which random number for hit determination is acquired at the time of winning the start prize.

When the big hit of the second special symbol is not changing, the game control microcomputer 100
Reads out the random number for hit determination from the first random number storage buffer (step 052IWS58A
), the jackpot determination module is executed (step 052IWS59A). The big hit determination module is a program that decides to make a big hit if the random number for hit determination matches a predetermined big hit determination value. When it is determined to be a big hit (step 052IWS60A), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a first big hit flag indicating that it is a big hit based on the variable display of the first special symbol (step 052IWS61A). . Then, based on the hit type determination random number, it is determined whether the big hit type is a 10R sure change big hit, a 6R sure change big hit, or a 6R normal big hit (step 052IWS62A), and the big hit type is stored (step 052IWS63A), step 052IWS69A. Move to.

If the big hit is not made in step 052IWS60A, the game control microcomputer 100 executes the small hit determination module (step 052IWS6).
4A). The small hitting judgment module uses a random number for hitting judgment (may be a random number for small hitting judgment)
It is a program that decides to make a small hit if it matches a predetermined small hit judgment value. When it is determined to be a small hit (step 052IWS65A), the game control microcomputer 100 sets the first small hit flag indicating that the small hit will be made based on the variable display of the first special symbol ( Step 052IWS66A). Also,
The game control microcomputer 100 judges the small hit type based on the random number for judging the hit type (step 052IWS67A), and stores the small hit type (step 052IW).
S68A). In this example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the small hit type is determined to be the small hit A (see FIG. 10-6(A)). Then, Step 052IWS
Move to 69A.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the value of the high base number counter indicating the remaining number of times of the high base state is "0" (step 052IWS69A).
, "0", the process proceeds to step 052IWS75A. When the value of the high base number counter is not "0", that is, when it is in the low probability/first KT state, the gaming control microcomputer 100 subtracts "1" from the value of the high base number counter (step 052I).
WS70A), it is determined whether or not it has become “0” (step 052IWS71A). When the value of the high base number counter does not become "0", the process proceeds to step 052IWS75A. When the value of the high base number counter becomes “0”, the game control microcomputer 1
00 resets the high base flag indicating the high base state (step 052).
Along with IWS72A), the special symbol time saving flag indicating that the variable display of the special symbols is being shortened is reset (step 052IWS73A). Further, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a lighting extension flag (state extension flag) indicating that the lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 is extended to the end of fluctuation (step 052IWS74A). Then, the process proceeds to step 052IWS75A.

In this characteristic part 052IW, as will be described later, the high base flag is set and the number of executions of the variable display in the high base state is managed, because it is a low probability at the end of the big hit game based on the 6R normal big hit or the 2R normal big hit. / It is a case where it is controlled to a high base state (low probability/first KT state) and variable display is executed 50 times. Low Probability/High Base State (Low Probability/First KT
State), when the variable display for the 50th time is started, step 052IWS7
1A, S71B is determined to be Y, the high base flag is reset in steps 052IWS72A, S72B, and the special drawing time saving flag is also reset in steps 052IWS73A, S73B, so that a low probability/low base state (normal state (non-KT state)) ) Will be moved to.

In addition, the lighting extension flag (state extension flag) is for continuing the right hitting state by continuing the right hitting notification, and as the gaming state, the high base state has ended, but the variation reduction common to the first KT state is shortened. It is a flag for setting the state and making it a production background common to the first KT state.

In this example, the processing of step 052IWS74A and step 052IWS described later are performed.
By the process of 74B is executed, the variation of the first special symbol or the variation display of the second special symbol is started, and the final variation in the high base state (in this example, the 50th variation display) When is started, the lighting extension flag (state extension flag) is set and the fluctuation shortening state is extended. In this case, when the lighting extension flag (state extension flag) is set, the variable display of the first special symbol or the variable display of the second special symbol (in this example, 50
When the variation display of the first time) ends or the variation display of the other special symbol (in this example, the 51st variation display) starts, the lighting extension flag (state extension flag) is reset and the variation reduction state. It is desirable that the extension be completed.

Then, in step 052IWS75A, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the first fluctuation pattern setting processing (step 052IWS75A). Although illustration is omitted, the symbols to be stopped immediately before step 052IWS75A are confirmed.

In addition, in step 052IWS59A, it is determined whether or not to make a big hit, by taking into consideration the game state and using either the non-probability change big hit judgment table or the probability change big hit judgment table.

(First fluctuation pattern setting process)
10-18 is a flowchart showing a first variation pattern setting process (step S111A) in the first special symbol process process. In the first variation pattern setting process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first determines whether or not the special symbol time saving flag indicating that the variation display of the special symbol is under shortening control is set. It is confirmed (step 052IWS1700A). In this example, the special symbol time saving flag is set and the shortening control of the variable display of the special symbol is performed, so that it is advantageous to execute the variable display of the second special symbol (Fig. 10-7). (See FIGS. 10-9)) Since a small hit is likely to occur, the KT state is controlled. If the special time saving flag is not set (that is, not in the KT state), the game control microcomputer 10
0, as the variation pattern table for determining the variation pattern, the variation pattern table for the first special symbol for non-KT time shown in FIG. 10-7(A) is selected (step 052IW).
S1701A). If the special time saving flag is set (that is, in the KT state)
, The gaming control microcomputer 100 selects the variation pattern table for the first special symbol for KT shown in FIG. 10-7(B) as the variation pattern table for determining the variation pattern (step 052IWS1702A).

Next, the game control microcomputer 100, step 052IWS1701A,
Which of the fluctuation patterns shown in FIG. 10-7 is to be used based on the fluctuation pattern table determined to be used in S1702A and the fluctuation pattern determination random number stored in the first special symbol determination buffer? Is determined (step 052IWS1703A). In this example, the variation time of the first special symbol is determined by determining the variation pattern. Further, after determining the variation time, the variation pattern in which the determined variation time is set may be selected from a plurality of variation patterns.

When the variation pattern is determined, the game control microcomputer 100 performs control to transmit a variation pattern command indicating the determined variation pattern to the effect control CPU 120 (
Step 052IWS1704A).

Also, in step 052IWS1703A, the variation time of the first special symbol (variation pattern)
When the game control microcomputer 100 determines, the variation time data indicating the determined variation time is set in the first variation time timer to start measuring the variation time (step 052IWS1705A), and the first special symbol display device. The variable display of the first special symbol in 4A is started (step 052IWS1706A). Then, the game control microcomputer 100 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol variation process (step 052IWS1707A).

(First special symbol variation process)
10-19 is a flowchart showing a first special symbol variation process (step S112A) in the first special symbol process process. In the first special symbol variation process, CPU10
3 first confirms whether or not the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120) (step 052IWS1120A). The case where the value of the accessory control process flag is the value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), that is, the value of the accessory control process flag is the gate passage waiting process (step S121).
)~ It is a case where the value does not indicate the small hit end process (step S128), and during the small hit game (special variable prize ball device 17 during the special hit prize ball device 7 is opened a predetermined number of times).
Open) if not even in.

If the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), the CPU 103 determines whether or not to make a big hit, if not yet transmitted.
And one of the display result designation commands (display result 1 designation command, display result 2 designation command, display result 3 designation command, display result 4 designation command, display result 7 designation command) based on the determination result of the jackpot type Transmission control is performed to the control CPU 120 (step 052IWS1121A).

Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the first variable time timer (step 052IWS11
22A), if the first variable time timer times out (step 052IWS1123A)
), control to transmit the first symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS1124A). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop process (step S113A) (step 052).
IWS1130A).

When the first fluctuation time timer has not timed out, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the big hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B (step 052I).
WS1125A). Whether or not the big hit symbol is displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is, for example, the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop process, The second showing that it is a big hit based on the variable display of the second special symbol
It can be determined by checking whether or not the big hit flag is set.

If the big hit symbol is not derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B (step 052IWS1126A). In addition, whether or not the small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B, for example, the value of the second special symbol process flag becomes a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop process. , It can be determined by checking whether or not the second small hit flag indicating that a small hit is to be set based on the variable display of the second special symbol.
If the small hitting symbol is not derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B, the process is ended as it is.

If the small-hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the variable display of the first special symbol that is being executed is a big hit (step 0).
52IWS1127A). Whether or not the variable display of the first special symbol being executed is a big hit can be determined by, for example, checking whether or not the first big hit flag is set. If the variation display of the first special symbol that is being executed is not a big hit, the process is ended as it is.

If the variation display of the first special symbol being executed is a big hit, the CPU 103 confirms whether the big hit type is a 10R certainty variation big hit or a 6R certainty variation big hit (step 052IWS1128A). Whether or not the 10R certainty variation big hit or the 6R certainty variation big hit can be determined by, for example, confirming the big hit type stored in step 052IWS63A. If it is the 10R certainty variation big hit or the 6R certainty variation big hit, the processing is ended as it is.

When the big hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B (step 052IWS)
(Y of 1125A), or when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed (step 052IWS112)
6A Y) and neither 10R probability variation big hit nor 6R probability variation big hit (that is, 6R normal big hit) When the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed (step 0)
52IWS1127A Y, step 052IWS1128A N), CPU103
Performs control for transmitting the first compulsory symbol determination designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS1129A). In this case, if the first big hit flag and the first small hit flag are set, the CPU 103 resets the first big hit flag and the first small hit flag. Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop process (step S113A) (step 052IWS113).
0A).

By performing the processing of steps 052IWS1125A to S1129A, in this characteristic part 052IW, when the variable display of the second special symbol is a big hit or while the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed, it is a small hit. If the normal special jackpot (in this example, 6R normal jackpot) and the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed, the variable display of the first special symbol is forcibly stopped, and the first special symbol And the second special symbol is designed to prevent a big hit and a small hit from occurring at the same time. In this case, on the production control CPU 120 side, when the variable display of the first special symbol is forced out, the variation of the decorative symbol is based on the second forced symbol confirmation designation command transmitted in step 052IWS1129A. As a display result, it is forcibly controlled to stop and display the symbol.

In this example, when the variable display of the second special symbol is a small hit during the execution of the variable display of the first special symbol, the probability variation big hit (in this example, 10R probability variation big hit or 6R probability variation big hit) When the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed, the first special symbol variation process is terminated as it is (see Y in step 052IWS1128A), but in this case, the second
Based on the fact that the variable display of the special symbol is a small hit, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the small hit opening preprocessing (step S126), and the small hit game is started. Therefore, after the next timer interrupt, it is determined as N in step 052IWS1120A, the processing of steps 052IWS1121A to S1130A is skipped, and the first fluctuation time timer of step 052IWS1122A is not updated. Therefore, when the variation display of the second special symbol is a small hit and the variation display of the first special symbol which is a sure variation big hit is being executed, during the small hit game, the first variation time timer Is suspended and the variable display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small hit game is finished, the value of the accessory control process flag is again updated to a value corresponding to the accessory control normal process (step S120), and the update of the first variable time timer is restarted.

In addition, in this example, when the variable display of the second special symbol is a small hit during the execution of the variable display of the first special symbol, during the variable display of the first special symbol that is out or a small hit. In some cases, the first special symbol variation process is terminated as it is (see N in step 052IWS1127A). Therefore, when the variable display of the second special symbol is a small hit, even when the variable display of the first special symbol that is a shift or a small hit is being executed, the first variation during the small hit game. The update of the time timer is interrupted, the variable display of the first special symbol is continuously executed, and when the small hit game is finished, the update of the first variable time timer is restarted.

(First special symbol stop processing)
FIG. 10-20 is a flowchart showing a first special symbol stop process. In the first special symbol stop processing, first, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the lighting extension flag is set (step 052IWS2010A). If the lighting extension flag is set, C
The PU 103 resets the lighting extension flag that has been set (step 052IWS).
2011A). Further, the CPU 103 performs control for ending the lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 (
Along with step 052IWS2012A), control for transmitting a right-handed lighting end designation command to the effect control CPU 120 is performed (step 052IWS2013A).

In this example, the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning port) is provided on the right side of the game area. Therefore, when the game state is controlled to the KT state, the person who has performed the right hitting operation. Is advantageous to the player, and the right-handed indicator 26 is turned on. Therefore, in this example, low probability/first K
In the T state, the right-handed indicator 26 is turned on, but steps 052IWS69A to S
By executing the processes of 74A and S69B to S74B, the low-probability/first KT state is terminated and the normal state (non-KT state) is entered at the time of starting the 50th variation display, and steps 052IWS2010A to S2013A are performed. , S2010B to S2013B, the right-handed indicator 26 is turned off when the 50th variation display is completed.

Next, the CPU 103 causes the stop symbol of the first special symbol to be derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A (step 052IWS2014A). In this case, if the first forced symbol confirmation designation command is transmitted in step 052IWS1129A of the first special symbol variation process, regardless of the determination result at the start of variation, forced as the stop symbol of the first special symbol. The outlying design is derivatized and displayed.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the first jackpot flag is set (step 052IWS2015A). If the first jackpot flag is set, CPU1
03 sets the big hit start flag which indicates that the big hit is started (step 052I).
WS2016A). Further, the CPU 103 clears the first jackpot flag (step 0).
52IWS2017A).

Next, the CPU 103 controls to start lighting the right-handed indicator 26 (step 0).
52IWS2018A) and control for transmitting a right-handed lighting start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS2019A). Then, the process proceeds to step 052IWS2027A.

By executing the processing of steps 052IWS2018A and S2019A, in the present example, the right-handed indicator 26 is started to be turned on when a big hit occurs in the variable display of the first special symbol. That is, in this example, since the special variable winning ball device 7 (big winning opening) is provided on the right side of the game area in this example, it is advantageous for the player to perform a right-handed operation during the big hit game. Therefore, the right-handed indicator 26 is turned on.

In this example, after the big hit symbol is derived and displayed, the big hit game is started based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41, so the right hit is made at the timing when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41. The display 26 may be configured to start lighting.

When the first big hit flag is not set (N in step 052IWS2015A), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the first small hit flag is set (step 052IWS2020A). When the first small hit flag is set, C for effect control
Control to transmit a small hit start designation command to the PU 120 (step 052IW
S2021A). Further, the CPU 103 clears the first small hit flag (step 05).
2IWS2022A). Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the small hit opening pretreatment (step 052IWS2026A). Then, the process proceeds to step 052IWS2027A.

In this example, since the special variable winning ball device 17 (special winning opening) is provided on the right side of the game area, it is originally advantageous for the player to perform a right-handed operation during the small hit game. But,
As already described, when the small hit in the variable display of the first special symbol is only the small hit type is the small hit A, the winning of the game ball to the special winning opening can hardly be expected. Therefore, in this example, when a small hit occurs in the variable display of the first special symbol, the right hit indicator 26 is not turned on, and the right hit lighting start designation command is not transmitted.

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol normal process (step 052IWS2027A).

In this example, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol, the right hit notification for prompting the player to shoot a game ball to the right of the game area can be executed. There is. In addition, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed with the first special symbol, as a right hit notification, it is possible to execute a launch promotion alert that prompts the player to shoot the game ball aiming at the passage gate 41. May be.

In addition, in the state where the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the second special symbol, right-handing notification and launch promotion information are not executed, and in that state when the game ball wins the first starting winning opening, right-handing notification and launch promotion information (In this case, because it is in the gate passage waiting state, even if the game ball wins the first starting winning opening, the variable display of the first special symbol does not start immediately and becomes the first reserved memory) You may comprise.

On the other hand, when the passage of the game ball at the passage gate 41 is detected in the normal state (low probability/non-KT state), the degree of recognition is low (for example, sound output of small volume or small screen display). Thus, it may be configured to perform a left-hand hit notification that prompts the player to shoot a game ball to the left of the game area. On the other hand, in the normal state (low probability/non-KT state), when the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening or the special winning opening is detected, a mode in which the degree of recognition is high (for example, a loud sound output or The left-handed notification may be performed by a large screen display). With such a configuration, it is possible to accurately notify the launch. In particular, with the above configuration, for the player who accidentally shoots the game ball to the right of the game area, while performing a slight left-handing notification while the degree of recognition to the surroundings of the game machine is low. For players who intentionally perform right-handed operation,
The left-handed hit notification may be performed in a mode in which the degree of recognition of the surroundings of the gaming machine is high.
With such a configuration, the player who intentionally performs the right-handed operation can be urged by the clerk of the game store to return to the left-handed operation.

Further, in the above case, the left-handed notification may be performed when the number of game balls detected at the passage gate 41, the second start winning opening, and the special winning opening reaches a certain number. In addition, passage gate 4
In 1, when a game ball is detected a plurality of times (for example, 5 times) within a predetermined period (for example, 1 minute), a left-handed notification is given, and a specific number smaller than a predetermined number at the second start winning opening and special winning opening. It may be configured to perform a left-handed notification when more than one (for example, one) game ball is detected.

Although the characteristic part 052IW displays a demo when a specific condition is satisfied, the passage gate 41, the second start winning opening or the special winning opening is displayed when the demo is displayed in the normal state. When the winning of the game ball is detected, the execution of the demonstration display that has been executed may be ended and the left-handed notification may be performed.

(Second special symbol normal processing)
10-21 is a flowchart showing a second special symbol normal process in the second special symbol process process. The state in which the second special symbol normal process is executed is a case where the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value indicating the second special symbol normal process. In addition, when the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value indicating the second special symbol normal processing, there is a state in which the variable display of the second special symbol is not made in the second special symbol display device 4B.

In the second special symbol normal processing, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103), first, the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal processing (step S120) It is confirmed whether or not (step 052IWS50B). The case where the value of the accessory control process flag is the value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), that is, the value of the accessory control process flag is the gate passage waiting process (step S121) to small hit. It is a case where the value does not indicate the ending process (step S128), and it is neither during the big hit game (opening the special variable winning ball device 7 a predetermined number of times) nor during the small hit game (opening the special variable winning ball device 17). is there.

If the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), the game control microcomputer 100 confirms the value of the second reserved storage number (
Step 052IWS51B). Specifically, the count value of the second reserved storage number counter is confirmed. If the number of second reserved memories is 0, the second customer waiting demonstration display designation command is used for the production control C.
The data is transmitted to the PU 120 (step 052IWS52B).

If the second reserved memory number is not 0, the game control microcomputer 100 is RAM1
Each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number=1 in the second reserved storage number buffer 02 of 02 is stored in the second random number buffer area of the RAM 102 (step 052IWS53B) and the second reserved storage. The value of the number is decremented by 1 (the count value of the second pending storage number counter is decremented by 1), and the contents of each storage area are shifted (step 052IW).
S54B). That is, each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number=n (n=2, 3, 4) in the second reserved storage number buffer of the RAM 102 is set to the second reserved storage number=n−. Stored in the storage area corresponding to 1. Therefore, the order in which the random number values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the respective second reserved storage numbers are extracted is always the second reserved storage number=1.
, 2, 3, 4 are in order. That is, in this example, the content of each storage area is shifted each time the variable display start condition is satisfied, so that the order in which each random value is extracted can be specified.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 performs control to transmit a set value command indicating a set value set in the RAM 102 to the effect control board 12 (step 052I).
WS55B). In this example, the setting value command is transmitted every time the variable display is started by executing the processing of step 052IWS55B. However, the setting change processing (processing of changing the setting value) is performed when the power is turned on. The set value command is also sent when is executed.

After that, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a background designation command according to the current game state to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS56B). In addition, the specific way of transmitting the background designation command is step 052IWS of the first special symbol normal processing.
This is the same as the processing indicated by 56A.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the big hit of the first special symbol is changing (step 052IWS57B). Specifically, it is determined that the big hit of the first special symbol is changing when the first big hit flag indicating that it is a big hit based on the variable display of the first special symbol is set. When it is determined that the big hit of the first special symbol is changing, step 052I is performed without performing the processing after step 052IWS58B.
Move to WS69B. As a result, when the variation of the second special symbol is started during the variation of the big bonus of the first special symbol, it is forcibly disengaged regardless of whether or not the jackpot determination value is stored.

The method of forcibly disengaging is not limited to the above. For example, when the big hit of the first special symbol is changing in step 052IWS57B, a process of setting a random number value (fixed value) that is out of alignment as a random number for hitting determination is performed, and the process proceeds to step 052IWS59B, so that at the time of starting winning. It may be forcibly deviated regardless of whether or not the random number for hit determination has been acquired.

Further, for example, when the big hit of the first special symbol is changing in step 052IWS57B, the random number value (fixed value) that is out of alignment is set as the hit determination random number without performing the processing in steps 052IWS58B to S63B, and the small value is set. By making the hit determination, the hit determination may be forcibly disregarded regardless of which random number for the hit determination is obtained at the time of winning the start prize.

When the big hit of the first special symbol is not changing, the game controlling microcomputer 100
Reads the random number for hit determination from the second random number storage buffer (step 052IWS58B
), the jackpot determination module is executed (step 052IWS59B). The big hit determination module is a program that decides to make a big hit if the random number for hit determination matches a predetermined big hit determination value. When it is determined to be a big hit (step 052IWS60B), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a second big hit flag indicating that it is a big hit based on the variable display of the second special symbol (step 052IWS61B). .. Then, it is determined whether the big hit type is a 10R certainty big hit, a 6R certainty big hit, a 2R certainty big hit, or a 2R normal big hit based on the random number for hit type determination (step 052IWS62B), and the big hit type is stored (step 052IWS6).
3B), and proceeds to step 052IWS69B.

If the big hit is not made in step 052IWS60B, the game control microcomputer 100 executes the small hit determination module (step 052IWS6).
4B). The small hitting judgment module uses a random number for hitting judgment (may be a random number for small hitting judgment)
It is a program that decides to make a small hit if it matches a predetermined small hit judgment value. When it is determined to be a small hit (step 052IWS65B), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a second small hit flag indicating that the small hit will be made based on the variable display of the second special symbol ( Step 052IWS66B). Also,
The game control microcomputer 100 judges the small hit type based on the random number for judging the hit type (step 052IWS67B), and stores the small hit type (step 052IW).
S68B). In this example, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the small hit type is determined to be the small hit B or the small hit C (see FIG. 10-6(B)). Then, the process proceeds to step 052IWS69B.

Next, in the gaming control microcomputer 100, the value of the high base number counter is "0.
"(052IWS69B), and if it is "0", the process proceeds to step 052IWS75B. When the value of the high base number counter is not "0", that is, when it is in the low probability/first KT state, the game control microcomputer 100 subtracts "1" from the value of the high base number counter (step 052IWS70B), It is determined whether or not it has become “0” (step 052IWS71B). The value of the high base counter is "0"
If not, the process proceeds to step 052IWS75B. When the value of the high base number counter becomes “0”, the game control microcomputer 100 resets the high base flag indicating that it is in the high base state (step 052IWS72B), and shortens the variable display of the special symbol. The special figure time saving flag indicating that control is in progress is reset (step 052IWS73B). Further, the gaming control microcomputer 100 sets a lighting extension flag (state extension flag) (step 052IWS74B). Then, the process proceeds to step 052IWS75B.

Then, in step 052IWS75B, the value of the second special figure process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the second variation pattern setting process (step 052IWS75B). Although illustration is omitted, the symbol to be stopped is determined immediately before step 052IWS75B.

In addition, in step 052IWS59B, in consideration of the game state, it is determined whether or not to make a big hit, using one of the non-probability change big hit judgment table and the probability change big hit judgment table.

The second variation pattern setting process is the same as the first variation pattern setting process (step S111A) shown in FIG. 10-18. That is, in the first variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 10-18, the second variation pattern process is explained by replacing “first” with “second”. However, in the second variation pattern setting process, the CPU 103 first executes step 0.
The same processing as that of the 52IWS1700A is performed, and it is confirmed whether or not the special drawing time saving flag is set. If the special time saving flag is not set (that is, not in the KT state)
, The gaming control microcomputer 100 selects the second special symbol variation pattern table for non-KT time shown in FIG. 10-8C as the variation pattern table for determining the variation pattern. If the special figure time saving flag is set (that is, in the KT state), the game control microcomputer 100 changes depending on whether the probability variation flag and the high base flag are set or not, and the number of variations. As a variation pattern table for determining a pattern, any of the second KT-use second ones shown in FIGS. 10-8(D) to 10-9(I) is used.
Select the variable pattern table for special symbols. For example, if the probability variation flag is off and the high base flag is on (low probability/first KT state), if it is the first change, then FIG.
The variable pattern table for the second special symbol shown in FIG.
The variation pattern table for the second special symbol shown in -8(E) is selected, and if it is the 50th variation, the variation pattern table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 10-8(F) is selected. Also, for example,
If both the probability variation flag and the high base flag are on (high probability/first KT state), if it is the first variation, the variation pattern table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 10-9(G) is selected. However, if it is the second variation or later, the variation pattern table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 10-9(H) is selected. Further, for example, if the probability variation flag is on and the high base flag is off (high probability/second KT state), the second special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 10-9(I) is selected.

(Second special symbol variation process)
10-22 is a flowchart showing a second special symbol variation process in the second special symbol process process. In the second special symbol variation process, the CPU 103 first confirms whether or not the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120) (step 052IWS1120B). The case where the value of the accessory control process flag is the value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), that is, the value of the accessory control process flag is the gate passage waiting process (step S121) to small hit. It is a case where the value does not indicate the ending process (step S128), and it is neither during the big hit game (opening the special variable winning ball device 7 a predetermined number of times) nor during the small hit game (opening the special variable winning ball device 17). is there.

If the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), the CPU 103 determines whether or not to make a big hit, if not yet transmitted.
And one of the display result specification commands (display result 1 specification command, display result 2 specification command, display result 3 specification command, display result 5 specification command, display result 6 specification command, display result) 7 designation command) CPU120 for production control
Control is performed (step 052IWS1121B).

Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the second variable time timer (step 052IWS11
22B), if the second variable time timer times out (step 052IWS1123B)
), control to transmit the second symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS1124B). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop processing (step 052IWS1130B).

When the second fluctuation time timer has not timed out, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the big hit symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A (step 052I).
WS1125B). Whether or not the big hit symbol is displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is, for example, the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop process, 1st showing that it is a big hit based on the variable display of the 1st special symbol
It can be determined by checking whether or not the big hit flag is set.

If the big hit symbol is not derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A (step 052IWS1126B). In addition, whether or not the small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A, for example, the value of the first special symbol process flag becomes a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop process. , It can be determined by checking whether or not the first small hit flag that indicates a small hit is set on the basis of the variable display of the first special symbol.
If the small-hit symbol is not derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A, the process is ended as it is.

If the small-hit symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the variable display of the second special symbol that is being executed is a big hit (step 0).
52IWS1127B). Whether or not the variable display of the second special symbol that is being executed is a big hit can be determined by, for example, checking whether or not the second big hit flag is set. If the variation display of the second special symbol that is being executed is not a big hit, the process is ended as it is.

If the variation display of the second special symbol that is being executed is a big hit, the CPU 103 confirms whether the big hit type is 10R certainty variation big hit, 6R certainty variation big hit, or 2R certainty variation big hit (step 052IWS1128B). .. Whether it is the 10R certainty variation big hit, the 6R certainty variation big hit, or the 2R certainty variation big hit can be determined, for example, by checking the big hit type stored in step 052IWS63B. 10R probability variation big hit, 6R probability variation big hit,
Alternatively, if it is the 2R certainty variation big hit, the process is finished as it is.

When the big hit symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A (step 052IWS)
(Y of 1125B), or when a small hit symbol is derived and displayed (step 052IWS112)
6B Y) and is not any of 10R certainty variation big hit, 6R certainty variation big hit, and 2R certainty variation big hit (that is, 2R normal big hit) When the variable display of the second special symbol is being executed (step 052IWS1127B Y) , Step 052 N of IWS1128B)
In, CPU103 performs control for transmitting the second compulsory symbol determination designation command to the effect control CPU120 (step 052IWS1129B). In this case, if the second big hit flag and the second small hit flag are set, the CPU 103 resets the second big hit flag and the second small hit flag. Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop process (step 052IWS1130B).
).

By executing the processing of steps 052IWS1125B to S1129B, in this characteristic portion 052IW, when the variable display of the first special symbol is a big hit or while the variable display of the second special symbol is being executed, it is a small hit. If it is normal big hit (in this example, 2R normal big hit) and the variable display of the second special symbol is being executed, the variable display of the second special symbol is forcibly stopped, and the first special symbol. With the second special design, the situation in which a big hit and a small hit occur at the same time does not occur. In this case, on the CPU 120 side for effect control, when the variable display of the second special symbol is forced out, the variation of the decorative symbol is based on the second compulsory symbol confirmation designation command transmitted in step 052IWS1129B. As a display result, it is controlled to forcibly discontinue display of the symbol.

In this example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is a small hit during the execution of the variable display of the second special symbol, the probability variation big hit (in this example, 10R probability variation big hit, 6R probability variation big hit, Or 2R probability variation big hit) When the variation display of the second special symbol is being executed, the second special symbol variation process is terminated as it is (see Y in step 052IWS1128B), but in this case, the first special symbol. Based on the fact that the variable display of the symbols is a small hit, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the small hit opening pre-processing (step S126),
It shifts to small hit game. Therefore, after the next timer interruption, step 052IWS1
The determination in step 120B is N, the processing in steps 052IWS1121B to S1130B is skipped, and the second fluctuation time timer in step 052IWS1122B is not updated.
Therefore, when the variation display of the first special symbol is a small hit and the variation display of the second special symbol which is a sure variation big hit is being executed, during the small hit game, the second variation time timer Is suspended and the variable display of the second special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small hit game is finished, the value of the accessory control process flag is set again to the accessory control normal processing (step S12).
0) and the value of the second variable time timer is restarted.

Further, in this example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is a small hit during the execution of the variable display of the second special symbol, during the variable display of the second special symbol that is out or a small hit. In some cases, the second special symbol variation process is ended as it is (see N in step 052IWS1127B). Therefore, when the variable display of the first special symbol is a small hit, even when the variable display of the second special symbol which is a deviation or a small hit is being executed, during the small hit game, the second variation The update of the time timer is interrupted, the variable display of the second special symbol is continuously executed, and when the small hit game is finished, the update of the second variable time timer is restarted.

With the above configuration, the remaining second reserved memory can be consumed in the normal state after the end of the first KT state (after the end of the time saving state), and a big hit occurs at an unintended timing when the player is absent. Can be suppressed.

In addition, it is configured to provide a variable winning ball device for the first special symbol below the winning ball device 6A (first starting winning opening), and a winning ball device for the second special symbol on the right side of the game area ( Second winning state (small hit RUSH) configured by providing a starting winning opening that is not a variable winning ball device
In the gaming machine configured to shift to the normal state via the time saving state of the first special symbol after the end, the configuration in which the variable display of the second special symbol is forcibly removed as described above may be applied. In this case, the frequency of small hits based on the variable display of the first special symbol is increased due to the higher variation efficiency of the first special symbol, but the variable display of the second special symbol is forcibly removed accordingly. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of the variable display of the second special symbol based on the second reserved memory in the normal state by increasing the frequency of playing, and further suppress the occurrence of the big hit at an unintended timing when the player is absent. You can

(Second special symbol stop processing)
FIG. 10-23 is a flowchart showing a second special symbol stop process. In the second special symbol stop process, first, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the lighting extension flag is set (step 052IWS2010B). If the lighting extension flag is set, C
The PU 103 resets the lighting extension flag that has been set (step 052IWS).
2011B). Further, the CPU 103 performs control for ending the lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 (
Along with step 052IWS2012B, control for transmitting a right-handed lighting end designation command to the effect control CPU 120 is performed (step 052IWS2013B).

Next, the CPU 103 causes the stop symbol of the second special symbol to be derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B (step 052IWS2014B). In this case, if the second compulsory symbol confirmation designation command is transmitted in step 052IWS1129B of the second special symbol variation processing, regardless of the determination result at the start of variation, it is forced as the stop symbol of the second special symbol. The outlying design is derivatized and displayed.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the second jackpot flag is set (step 052IWS2015B). If the second jackpot flag is set, CPU1
03 sets the big hit start flag (step 052IWS2016B). Also, C
The PU 103 clears the second jackpot flag (step 052IWS2017B).

Next, the CPU 103 controls to start lighting the right-handed indicator 26 (step 0).
52IWS2018B) and control for transmitting a right-handed lighting start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS2019B). Then, the process proceeds to step 052IWS2027B.

By executing the processing of steps 052IWS2018B and S2019B, in this example, the right-handed indicator 26 is started to be lit when a big hit occurs in the variable display of the second special symbol. That is, in this example, since the special variable winning ball device 7 (big winning opening) is provided on the right side of the game area in this example, it is advantageous for the player to perform a right-handed operation during the big hit game. Therefore, the right-handed indicator 26 is turned on.

When the second big hit flag is not set (N in step 052IWS2015B), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the second small hit flag is set (step 052IWS2020B). When the second small hit flag is set, C for effect control
Control to transmit a small hit start designation command to the PU 120 (step 052IW
S2021B). Further, the CPU 103 clears the second small hit flag (step 05).
2IWS2022B).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the special drawing time saving flag is set (step 052IWS2023B). If the special time saving flag is not set (that is,
If it is not in the KT state), the CPU 103 controls to start lighting the right-handed indicator 26 (step 052IWS2024B), and also controls to send a right-handed lighting start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step). 052IWS2025B).

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the small hit opening preprocessing (step 052IWS2026B). Then, Step 052IWS20
Move to 27B.

By executing the processing of steps 052IWS2024B and S2025B, in the present example, when the small hit in the variable display of the second special symbol is a small hit, lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 is started. That is, in this example, in this example, the special variable winning ball device 17 (special winning opening)
Is provided to the right of the game area, it is more advantageous for the player to perform a right-handing operation during the small hitting game, and the right-handing indicator 26 is turned on.

However, in this example, even if a small hit occurs in the variable display of the second special symbol, K
If it is in the T state, the right-handed indicator 26 should already be lit. Therefore, in this example, by performing the determination processing of step 052IWS2023B, it is possible to perform the second determination during the KT state.
When a small hit occurs in the variable display of the special symbol, the processing of starting the lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 and transmitting the right-handed lighting start designation command in duplicate is not performed.

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol normal process (step 052IWS2027B).

(Normal processing for accessory control)
FIG. 10-24 shows a character control normal process (step S120) in the character control process process.
) Is a flowchart showing In the accessory control normal processing, the CPU 103 first confirms whether or not the big hit start flag is set (step 052IWS2101).
.. If the jackpot start flag is not set, the process is terminated.

If the big hit start flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the big hit start flag (step 052IWS2102). Next, the CPU 103 sets a big winning opening pre-opening timer (step 052IWS2103), sets round 1 opening pattern data according to the big hit type (step 052IWS2104), and sets "1" to a round number counter indicating the number of big hits. Is set (step 052IWS2105).

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the gate passage waiting process (step 052IWS2106).

(Gate passage waiting process)
FIG. 10-25 is a gate passage waiting process (step S12) in the accessory control process process.
It is a flowchart which shows 1). In the gate passage waiting process, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the detection signal from the gate switch 21 is input (step 052IWS25).
01). If the detection signal from the gate switch 21 has not been input, the processing ends. If the detection signal from the gate switch 21 is input, the CPU 103 resets the probability change flag, the high base flag, and the special drawing time saving flag if set, and clears the value of the high base number counter to 0 ( Step 052IWS2502). Then, the CPU 10
3 transmits the big hit start designation command (step 052IWS2503) and sets the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the big hit opening preprocessing (step 052IWS2).
504).

In this characteristic part 052IW, by executing the gate passage waiting process, when the big hit symbol is derived and displayed as the variable display result of the second special symbol, the big hit game is not started immediately, but the passage gate 41 is played. It is configured to shift to the big hit game on condition that the ball passes and is detected by the gate switch 21.

(Processing during big hit opening)
FIG. 10-26 is a jackpot opening process (step S123) in the accessory control process process.
) Is a flowchart showing In the big hit opening process, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the first count switch 23 is in the ON state (step 052IWS24).
01). If the first count switch 23 is in the ON state, that is, if the game balls that have won the special winning opening are detected, the CPU 103 counts the number of game balls that have won the special winning opening. The counter value is incremented by 1 (step 052IWS2402). Then, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a special winning opening winning designation command to the effect controlling CPU 120 (step 052IWS2403).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the V area switch 052IW106 is in the ON state (step 052IWS2404). If the V area switch 052IW106 is turned on, that is, if a game ball that has entered the V area 052IW104 is detected, the CPU 103 sets a V winning flag that indicates that the game ball has entered the V area 052IW104. (Step 052IWS2405).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the winning number counter is 10 (step 052IWS2406). If the value of the winning number counter is 10, the process proceeds to step 052IWS2409. If the value of the winning number counter is not 10, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the opening time timer for measuring the opening time of the special winning opening (step 052IWS2407), and the opening time timer after subtraction has timed out. It is confirmed whether or not (step 052IWS2408). If the open time timer has not timed out, the process is terminated as it is.

When the value of the winning number counter is 10 (Y in step 052IWS2406)
, Or when the release time timer times out (Y in step 052IWS2408)
First, the CPU 103 stops the driving of the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door and controls the special winning opening to the closed state (step 052IWS2409). In addition, the CPU 103 controls to transmit a display command after opening the special winning opening to the effect control CPU 120 (step 0).
52IWS2410). Further, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the round number counter (
Step 052IWS2411).

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the big hit opening post-processing (step 052IWS2412).

(Big hit end processing)
FIG. 10-27 is a jackpot end process in the accessory control process process (step S125).
It is a flowchart showing. In the big hit ending process, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the big hit end display timer is set (step 052IWS2200), and when the big hit end display timer is set, moves to step 052IWS2202. When the big hit end display timer is not set, the CPU 103 displays the big hit end display timer on the image display device 5 for the big hit end display time (big hit end display time).
A value corresponding to the display time corresponding to is set (step 052IWS2201), and the process ends.

In step 052IWS2202, the value of the jackpot end display timer is decremented by 1 (step 052IWS2202). Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether the value of the big hit end display timer is 0, that is, whether the big hit end display time has elapsed (step 0).
52 IWS 2203). If not, the process ends.

If the jackpot end display time has passed (Y in step 052IWS2203), the CPU
The player 103 confirms whether or not the V winning flag is set (step 052IWS2).
204). If the V winning flag is set, the CPU 103 clears the V winning flag (step 052IWS2205), sets the probability variation flag, and shifts to the probability variation state (high probability state) (step 052IWS2206).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the type of the jackpot that has ended this time is the 10R certainty variation jackpot or the 2R certainty variation jackpot (step 052IWS2207). Whether or not the 10R probability variation big hit or the 2R probability variation big hit can be determined, for example, by confirming the big hit type stored in step 052IWS63A of the first special symbol normal processing or step 052IWS63B of the second special symbol normal processing. If the 10R probability variation big hit or the 2R probability variation big hit, the CPU 103 sets the special figure time saving flag and shifts to the KT state (step 05).
2IWS2208). Then, the process proceeds to step 052IWS2215. 10R
In the case of probability variation big hit or 2R probability variation big hit, the high base flag is not set, so if the game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during the big hit game, the high probability/low base state (high probability/first 2KT state) will be controlled.

If neither the 10R certainty variation jackpot nor the 2R certainty variation jackpot, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the type of the jackpot that has ended this time is the 6R certainty variation jackpot (step 052IWS).
2209). Whether or not the 6R probability variation big hit can be determined, for example, by checking the big hit type stored in step 052IWS63A of the first special symbol normal process or step 052IWS63B of the second special symbol normal process. 6R probability variation big hit, CPU10
3 sets the high base flag and shifts to the high base state (step 052IWS221).
0), further, the special figure time saving flag is set to shift to the KT state (step 052IWS2).
211). Then, the process proceeds to step 052IWS2215. Therefore, if the 6R probability variation big hit, if the game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during the big hit game, it will be controlled to a high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state).

In the case of a 6R probability variation big hit, only the high base flag is set and the high base number counter is not set. In this case, the high base number counter is reset to 0 when the big hit game is started (step 052IWS25 of the gate passage waiting process).
02), the value of the high base number counter remains 0. Therefore, after the jackpot game based on 6R probability variation jackpot is controlled to a high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state), and since the value of the high base number counter is 0 in the variable display thereafter, Step 052IWS69A of the first special symbol normal processing and step 052I of the second special symbol normal processing
When it is determined as Y in WS69B, step 052IWS70A or step 052IWS70B
The high base count counter is not subjected to the subtraction process. Then, the high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state) is maintained until the next big hit occurs.

If it is not the 6R probability variation big hit (that is, if it is the 6R normal big hit or the 2R normal big hit), the CPU 103 sets the high base flag to shift to the high base state (step 052IWS2212), and sets the special figure time saving flag. And shifts to the KT state (step 052IWS2213). Further, the CPU 103 sets the high base counter to "50.
Is set (step 052IWS2214). Then, Step 052IWS22
Move to 15. Therefore, in the case of 6R normal big hit or 2R normal big hit, it is controlled to a low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the accessory control normal processing (step 052IWS2215).

(Small hit end processing)
FIG. 10-28 is a small hit end process in the accessory control process process (step S128).
It is a flowchart showing. In the small hit end processing, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the small hit end display timer is set (step 052IWS2300), and when the small hit end display timer is set, moves to step 052IWS2302. If the small hit end display timer is not set, the CPU 103 displays the small hit end display timer on the image display device 5 for the small hit end display time (small hit end display time).
A value corresponding to the display time corresponding to is set (step 052IWS2301), and the process ends.

In step 052IWS2302, the value of the small hit end display timer is decremented by 1 (step 052IWS2302). Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the small hit end display timer is 0, that is, whether the small hit end display time has elapsed (step 0).
52 IWS 2303). If not, the process ends.

If the small hit end display time has elapsed (step 052 IWS2303 Y), the CPU
103 confirms whether or not the special drawing time saving flag is set (step 052IWS).
2304). If the special drawing time saving flag is not set (that is, not in the KT state), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the right-handed indicator 26 is lighting (step 05).
2IWS2305). If the right-handed indicator 26 is on, the CPU 103 controls to end the right-handed indicator 26 (step 052IWS2306), and at the same time, transmits a right-handed illumination end designation command to the effect control CPU 120. Control is performed (step 052IWS2307).

In this example, when the variable display of the second special symbol is a small hit in the non-KT state, the right hitting indicator 26 is started to be turned on at the start of the small hit game (step 052IWS2).
023B to S2025B), the processing of steps 052IWS2304 to S2307 is executed, so that the right hitting indicator 26 is turned off at the end of the small hit game.

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the accessory control normal processing (step 052IWS2308).

(Transition of game state)
Here, the transition of the game state in the characteristic part 052IW will be described. Figure 10-2
9 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a method of transition of a game state in the characteristic portion 052IW. First, in this characteristic part 052IW, the low probability/low base state (normal state (non-KT state))
), the player aims at the left side of the game area and performs a shooting operation (left hit) of the game ball. Therefore, in the normal state, mainly the start winning to the first start winning opening occurs, mainly the variable display of the first special symbol is executed. Further, since the variable display of the first special symbol is mainly executed, when a big hit occurs in a low probability/low base state, mainly a 10R certainty variation big hit, a 6R certainty variation big hit, or a 6R normal big hit occurs.

As shown in FIG. 10-29, when the 10R certainty variation big hit occurs in the low probability/low base state, if the game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during the big hit game, the high probability/after the big hit game ends. Transition to a low base state (high probability/second KT state) and the high probability/low base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (steps 052IWS2204 to S2).
208). However, if the game ball does not enter the V area 052IW 104 during the big hit game, the high probability state may not be controlled. Also, 6R in low probability/low base state
When the probability variation big hit occurs, if the game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during the big hit game, the high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state) is entered after the end of the big hit game, and the next The high probability/high base state is maintained until a big hit occurs (step 052I).
WS2204 to S2206, S2209 to S2211). However, V during the big hit game
If the game ball does not enter the area 052IW104, the high probability state may not be controlled. In addition, when the 6R normal big hit occurs in the low probability/low base state, after the big hit game ends, the low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state) is entered, and the next big hit occurs? The low-probability/high-base state is maintained until the variable display of 50 times is completed (see steps 052IWS2212 to S2214).

In the case where it is after the transition to the KT state (high-probability/high-base state, low-probability/high-base state, high-probability/low-base state), in this characteristic part 052IW, the player aims at the right side of the game area. And perform the shooting operation (right hit) of the game ball. Therefore, in the KT state, a start winning is mainly generated in the second starting winning opening, and a variable display of the second special symbol is mainly executed. Further, since the variable display of the second special symbol is mainly executed, when the big hit occurs in the KT state, mainly 10R certainty big hit, 6R certainty big hit, 2R certainty big hit, or 2R normal big hit occurs.

As shown in FIG. 10-29, when a 10R certainty variation jackpot or a 2R certainty variation jackpot occurs in a high-probability/high-base state (high-probability/first KT state), a V region 05 during a big-hit game.
If the game ball enters the 2IW104, the high probability / low base state (
High probability/second KT state), and the high probability/low base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps 052IWS2204 to S2208). However, if the game ball does not enter the V area 052IW 104 during the big hit game, the high probability state may not be controlled. In addition, when the 6R certainty variation big hit occurs in the high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state), if the game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during the big hit game, the high probability after the big hit game ends. /High base state (high probability/first KT state), and the high probability/high base state is maintained until the next big hit (step 052IWS2204).
-S2206, S2209-S2211). However, V area 052I during the big hit game
If a game ball does not enter W104, it may not be controlled to a high probability state. In addition, in the characteristic part 052IW, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the probability of being the 6R certainty variation jackpot is 50% in total (see FIG. 10-5 ), so once high probability/high In the base state, the high probability/high base state is looped at a rate of 50%. Also, high probability/
When a 2R normal big hit occurs in the high base state (high probability/first KT state), after the big hit game is over, the low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state) shifts to the next big hit. The low-probability/high-base state is maintained until it occurs or the variable display of 50 times is completed (see steps 052IWS2212 to S2214).

As shown in FIG. 10-29, when a 10R certainty variation jackpot or a 2R certainty variation jackpot occurs in a low-probability/high-base state (low-probability/first KT state), a V area 05 is played during the jackpot game.
If the game ball enters the 2IW104, the high probability / low base state (
High probability/second KT state), and the high probability/low base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps 052IWS2204 to S2208). However, if the game ball does not enter the V area 052IW 104 during the big hit game, the high probability state may not be controlled. In addition, when the 6R certainty variation big hit occurs in the low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state), if the game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during the big hit game, the high probability after the big hit game ends. /High base state (high probability/first KT state), and the high probability/high base state is maintained until the next big hit (step 052IWS2204).
-S2206, S2209-S2211). However, V area 052I during the big hit game
If a game ball does not enter W104, it may not be controlled to a high probability state. Also, when a 2R normal big hit occurs in a low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state), it shifts to a low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state) after the end of the big hit game. The low probability/high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs or the variable display of 50 times is completed (see steps 052IWS2212 to S2214). Note that this characteristic part 052I
In W, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the probability of being a 2R normal jackpot is 3
Since it is 5% (see FIGS. 10-5 (D) and (E)), once the low probability/high base state is reached, the low probability/high base state is looped at a rate of 35%. After the 6R normal big hit and the 2R normal big hit occur and the low probability/high base state is reached, the next big hit does not occur and the variable display of 50 times is finished, the result is shown in FIG. As shown, a low probability/low base state (normal state (non-KT state)) is entered (steps 052IWS69A to S73).
A, S69B-S73B).

As shown in FIG. 10-29, when a 10R certainty variation jackpot or a 2R certainty variation jackpot occurs in a high-probability/low-base state (high-probability/second KT state), a V area 05 during a big-hit game.
If the game ball enters the 2IW104, the high probability / low base state (
High probability/second KT state), and the high probability/low base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps 052IWS2204 to S2208). However, if the game ball does not enter the V area 052IW 104 during the big hit game, the high probability state may not be controlled. In addition, in the characteristic part 052IW, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the probability of 10R certainty variation big hit or 2R certainty variation big hit is 15 % (See FIGS. 10-5 (D) and (E)), once the high probability/low base state is reached, the high probability/low base state loops at a rate of 15%. Also,
If a 6R certainty variation big hit occurs in the high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state), if a game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during the big hit game, the high probability/high after the big hit game ends. It shifts to the base state (high probability/first KT state), and the high probability/high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (steps 052IWS2204 to S2206).
, S2209 to S2211). However, if the game ball does not enter the V area 052IW 104 during the big hit game, the high probability state may not be controlled. Also, when a 2R normal jackpot occurs in a high-probability/low-base state (high-probability/second KT state), it shifts to a low-probability/high-base state (low-probability/first KT state) after the jackpot game ends. The low probability/high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs or the variable display of 50 times is completed (see steps 052IWS2212 to S2214).

Note that in FIG. 10-29, in the low probability/low base state (normal state (non-KT state)), the first
The case where the variable display of the special symbol is executed has been described, but the variable display of the second special symbol may be executed at a low rate. In this case, if the 10R probability variation big hit or the 2R probability variation big hit occurs, if the game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during the big hit game,
A high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state) will be entered. In addition, when the 6R probability variation big hit occurs, if the game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during the big hit game, the state will shift to the high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state). 2R
When a big jackpot usually occurs, the low probability/high base state shifts to a low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state) until the next big jackpot occurs or 50 variable display ends. Will be maintained.

Further, in FIG. 10-29, the case where the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state) has been described, but the variable display of the first special symbol at a low rate. May be performed. In this case, if a 10R probability variation big hit occurs,
If the game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during the big hit game, a high probability/low base state (
High probability/second KT state). In addition, when the 6R probability variation big hit occurs, if the game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during the big hit game, the state will shift to the high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state). In addition, when the 6R normal big hit occurs, it shifts to a low-probability/high-base state (low-probability/first KT state), and the low-probability/high probability continues until the next big hit occurs or 50 times of variable display ends. The base state will be maintained.

Further, in FIG. 10-29, the case where the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state) has been described, but the variable display of the first special symbol at a low rate. May be performed. In this case, if a 10R probability variation big hit occurs,
If the game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during the big hit game, a high probability/low base state (
High probability/second KT state). In addition, when the 6R probability variation big hit occurs, if the game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during the big hit game, the state will shift to the high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state). In addition, when the 6R normal big hit occurs, it shifts to a low-probability/high-base state (low-probability/first KT state), and the low-probability/high probability continues until the next big hit occurs or 50 times of variable display ends. The base state will be maintained.

Further, in FIG. 10-29, the case where the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state) has been described, but the variable display of the first special symbol at a low rate. May be performed. In this case, if a 10R probability variation big hit occurs,
If the game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during the big hit game, a high probability/low base state (
High probability/second KT state). In addition, when the 6R probability variation big hit occurs, if the game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during the big hit game, the state will shift to the high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state). In addition, when the 6R normal big hit occurs, it shifts to a low-probability/high-base state (low-probability/first KT state), and the low-probability/high probability continues until the next big hit occurs or 50 times of variable display ends. The base state will be maintained.

(Normal pattern process processing)
Next, the normal symbol process process (step S29) executed by the game control microcomputer 100 will be described. FIG. 10-30 is a flowchart showing an example of a normal symbol process process. In the normal symbol process processing, the game control microcomputer 10
When 0 (specifically, the CPU 103) detects that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41 and the gate switch 21 has been turned on (step 052IWS5111), a gate passage designation command is sent to the effect control CPU 120. Control is performed (step 052).
IWS5112). Then, the CPU 103 causes the gate switch passage process (step 052).
IWS5113) is executed.

In this characteristic part 052IW, when the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 41 is detected by executing the processing of steps 052IWS5111-S5113, a gate passage designation command is transmitted. In addition, in this characteristic part 052IW, the passage gate 41 is configured as a dual-purpose gate and also plays a role of an operating area, but is it in a gate passage waiting state after the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed and before the big hit game is started? Regardless of whether it is sent or not, the gate passage designation command is transmitted.

Then, the CPU 103, step 052IWS according to the value of the normal symbol process flag
Any one of the processes shown in 5100 to S5104 is executed.

In addition, in this characteristic part 052IW, regardless of whether it is in the gate passage waiting state or not, when the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 41 is detected in step 052IWS5111, the gate switch passage processing of step 052IWS5113 is executed. Normally, variable display of symbols is executed, but it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 when not in the gate passage waiting state, the variable display of the ordinary symbol is executed, and in the state of waiting for the gate passage, the regular symbol even if the game ball passes through the passage gate 41. The variable display may be configured not to be executed.

Further, in this characteristic portion 052IW, the passage gate 41 is normally used as a combined gate of the starting region and the operating region, but the special symbol process process (see steps S25A and S25B) is normal in the timer interrupt process. Design process processing (see step S26)
Since it is executed before the passage of the game ball of the passage gate 41 as the operation area is detected, the passage of the game ball of the passage gate 41 as the normal start area is detected. Therefore, the process for starting the big hit game can be executed quickly.

Gate switch passage processing (step 052IWS5113): The CPU 103 stores a gate passage memory counter (a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed through the passage gate 41).
It is confirmed whether or not the count value (number of stored data passing through the gate) has reached the maximum value (“4” in this example). If it has not reached the maximum value, the count value of the gate passage storage counter is incremented by one.
It should be noted that the LED of the universal figure reservation display 25C is turned on according to the value of the gate passage storage counter. Then, the CPU 103 performs a process of extracting the value of the random number per ordinary symbol for determination, and storing it in the storage area (normal symbol determination buffer) corresponding to the value of the number of passing memories.

Normal symbol normal processing (step 052IWS5100): CPU103 is a state in which the fluctuation of the normal symbol can be started (for example, the value of the normal symbol process flag is step 052I).
If it is a value indicating WS5100, specifically, the variable display of the ordinary symbol is not made on the ordinary symbol display device 20, and the variable symbol is derived based on the winning symbol being displayed on the ordinary symbol display device 20. If the winning ball device 6B is not in the opening/closing operation), the value of the number of stored memories passing through the gate is confirmed. Specifically, the count value of the gate passage memory number counter is confirmed.
If the number of memory passing through the gate is not 0, it is determined whether or not to win (whether or not the stop symbol of the normal symbol is to be the hit symbol). Then, the variable time of the normal symbol is set in the normal symbol process timer, and the timer is started. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically "1") indicating the normal symbol variation process (step 052IWS5101).

Normal symbol variation process (step 052IWS5101): The CPU 103 confirms whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out. If it has, the normal symbol process timer sets the normal symbol stop symbol display time and starts the timer. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically "2") indicating the normal symbol stop process (step 052IWS5102).

Normal symbol stop processing (step 052IWS5102): The CPU 103 confirms whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out, and if it has timed out, confirms whether or not the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol. If it is not a winning symbol (if it is a deviating symbol), the value of the normal symbol process flag is the normal symbol normal processing (step 052IWS5100).
Is updated to a value (specifically, “0”). On the other hand, if the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol, the normal symbol process timer is set to the time before the normal electric accessory release, and the timer is started. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is set to the normal electric accessory release pretreatment (step 052).
IWS5103) is updated to a value (specifically, “3”).

Normal electric accessory release pre-processing (step 052IWS5103): CPU103 confirms whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out, and if it has timed out, sets the normal electric auditors product operating time to the normal symbol process timer, and the timer To start opening the variable winning ball device 6B. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically "4") indicating the normal electric auditors product operating process (step 052IWS5104).

Normal electric auditors product operation process (step 052IWS5104): The CPU 103 measures the normal symbol process timer, and when the normal symbol process timer times out, closes the variable winning ball device 6B. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically “0”) indicating the normal symbol normal process (step 052IWS5100).

(Normal design normal processing)
FIG. 10-31 is a flowchart showing a normal symbol normal process (step 052IWS5100). In the normal symbol normal processing, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the gate passage memory number is 0 by confirming the count value of the gate passage memory number counter (step 052IWS5121). If the number of memory passing through the gate is 0 (step 052IWS
(Y of 5121), and the processing ends. If the gate passing memory number is not 0 (N in step 052IWS5121), the CPU 103 reads the normal symbol per determination random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the gate passing memory number=1 (step 052IWS512).
2). Then, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the gate passage memory number counter by 1 and shifts the content of each storage area (step 052IWS5123). That is, the random number for normal symbol per determination stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of gate passage memory=n (n=2, 3, 4), in the storage area corresponding to the number of gate passage memory=n-1 Store. Therefore, the order in which the normal symbol per determination random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to each gate passing memory number is always the order of gate passing memory number=1, 2, 3, 4 and It is supposed to match.

Next, the CPU 103 uses a normal symbol determination table for determining whether or not to make a normal symbol, and performs a lottery process based on a random number (ordinary symbol per determination random number value) to determine whether or not to make a normal symbol. It is determined (step 052IWS5127). In addition, this characteristic part 0
In 52IW, in step 052IWS5127, the CPU 103 uniformly sets 99 regardless of whether the probability variation state, the KT state, or the high base state.
With a probability of /100, it is decided to be a normal symbol.

In step 052IWS5127, when the read random number per normal symbol for judgment is within the range of hit (in the case of hit), the CPU 103 sets the hit symbol as the display result (step 052IWS5128), and proceeds to step 052IWS5130. Further, in step 052IWS5127, if the read random number per normal symbol for judgment is not within the hit range (if it is out of alignment), the CPU 103 sets the outlier as the display result (step 052IWS5129), and proceeds to step 052IWS5130.

In step 052IWS5130, if the high base flag is set, the CPU 103 sets 0.2 seconds as a normal symbol variation time in the normal symbol process timer (
Step 052 YWS5130 Y, S5131). Also, if the high base flag is not set, that is, if it is the normal state or the second KT state, 1.0 seconds as the normal symbol variation time is set in the normal symbol process timer (step 052IWS5130, N,
S5132).

Then, the game control microcomputer 100 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag to a value (specifically "1") indicating the normal symbol variation process (step 052IWS5101) (step 052IWS5133).

(Normal symbol stop processing)
FIG. 10-32 is a flowchart showing the normal symbol stop processing (step 052IWS5102). In the normal symbol stop process, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the normal symbol process timer by -1 (step 052IWS3701). Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether the value of the normal symbol process timer has become 0, that is, whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out (step 052IWS3702). Normally, if the symbol process timer has not timed out (N in step 052IWS3702), the process is ended as it is.

When the normal symbol process timer times out, that is, when the normal symbol stop symbol display time has elapsed (Y in step 052IWS3702), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol (hit in step 052IWS5127). It is confirmed (whether or not it is determined) (step 052IWS3703). Whether or not the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol is set by, for example, setting a normal symbol hit determination flag when it is determined to be a hit in step 052IWS5127, and whether or not the flag is set is confirmed. You can

When it is determined that the stop symbol of the normal symbol is not a hit symbol but a deviating symbol (N in step 052IWS3703), the CPU 103 sets the value of the normal symbol process flag to a value indicating normal symbol normal processing (step 052IWS5100) ( Specifically, it is updated to "0" (step 052IWS3708).

In step 052IWS3703, when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is the winning symbol (Y in step 052IWS3703), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the high base flag is set (step 052IWS3704), and if it is set, That is, in the case of the first KT state, 0.1 seconds is set in the normal symbol process timer as the time before the normal electric accessory release (step 052IWS3706). Moreover, when the high base flag is not set, that is, in the normal state or the second KT state, 2.6 seconds is set to the normal symbol process timer as the time before opening the normal electric accessory (step 052IWS3705). ..

Next, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special figure process flag to a value (specifically “3”) corresponding to the normal electric auditors product opening preprocessing (step 052IWS5103) (step 0).
52IWS3707).

(Ordinary electric accessory release pretreatment)
FIG. 10-33 is a flowchart showing the normal electric auditors product opening preprocessing (step 052IWS5103). In the normal electric accessory release preprocessing, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the normal symbol process timer by -1 (step 052IWS3801). Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the normal symbol process timer has become 0, that is, whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out (step 052IWS3802). Normally, if the symbol process timer has not timed out (N in step 052IWS3802),
The process is terminated as it is.

When the normal symbol process timer times out, that is, when the time before opening the normal electric auditors product has passed (Y in step 052IWS3802), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the high base flag is set (step 052IWS3803). If it is set, that is, if it is in the first KT state, the normal electric accessory release time is 5.
5 seconds is set to the normal symbol process timer (step 052IWS3805). Also,
When the high base flag is not set, that is, in the normal state or the second KT state, 0.2 seconds is set in the normal symbol process timer as the normal electric accessory release time (step 052IWS3804).

As described above, in the characteristic part 052IW, the ordinary electric auditors opening time is set to 5.5 seconds in the first KT state, and the ordinary electric auditors opening time is set to 0.2 seconds in the normal state or the second KT state. By doing so, the first KT state is a state in which it is easier to make a start winning at the second start winning opening than in the normal state or the second KT state. Therefore, the first KT state is configured so that the game ball does not easily reach the special variable winning ball device 17 provided downstream of the variable winning ball device 6B than the normal state or the second KT state.

The control method for facilitating the starting winning in the second starting winning opening when the gaming state is the first KT state is not limited to that shown by the characteristic portion 052IW. For example, in the case of the first KT state, the variable winning ball device 6B is opened more times than in the case of the normal state or the second KT state (for example, in the normal state or the second KT state, the variable winning ball device 6B). 6B may be set as the number of times of opening 6B, whereas in the first KT state, the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 6B may be set as 2). By doing so, in the case of the first KT state, by increasing the number of times of opening the variable winning ball device 6B, it is possible to facilitate the starting winning in the second starting winning opening.

Further, for example, in the case of the first KT state, as compared with the case of the normal state or the second KT state, the control for increasing the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B and the variable winning ball device 6B. May be executed in combination with a control for increasing the number of times of release of the.

Next, the CPU 103 controls the variable winning ball device 6B to the open state (step 052).
IWS3806). Specifically, the solenoid 81 is driven to open the variable winning ball device 6B.

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special figure process flag to a value (specifically, “4”) corresponding to the normal electric auditors product operating process (step 052IWS5104) (step 05).
2IWS3807).

(Command analysis process)
Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. 10-34 to 10-37 are flowcharts showing a specific example of the command analysis process (step S75). The effect control command received from the main board 11 is stored in the received command buffer, but in the command analysis processing, the effect control CPU 120 confirms the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

In the command analysis processing, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not the received command is stored in the command reception buffer (step 052IWS611). Whether it is stored or not is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the received command is stored in the command receiving buffer, the production control CP
The U120 reads the received command from the command reception buffer (step 052IWS).
612). When read, the value of the read pointer is incremented by 2 (step 052IWS).
613). The reason why +2 is performed is that two bytes (one command) are read.

If the received effect control command is the set value command (step 052IWS614)
The effect control CPU 0120 stores the set value indicated by the received set value command in the RAM 1
It is stored in the setting value storage area formed in No. 22 (step 052IWS615).

If the received production control command is a variation pattern command (step 052IWS6)
16), the CPU 120 for effect control stores the received variation pattern command in the variation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step 052IWS617).
). Then, the fluctuation pattern command reception flag is set (step 052IWS61).
8).

If the received effect control command is the display result designation command (step 052IWS6)
19), the CPU 120 for effect control stores the received display result designation command in the display result designation command storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step 052IWS620).
).

If the received production control command is any symbol confirmation designation command (first symbol confirmation designation command, second symbol confirmation designation command, first forced symbol confirmation designation command, second forced symbol confirmation designation command) (step 052IWS621) ), the production control CPU 120 sets a confirmation command reception flag according to the received symbol confirmation designation command (step 0).
52IWS622). For example, when the first symbol confirmation designation command is received, the first confirmation command reception flag is set. Further, for example, when the second symbol confirmation designation command is received, the second confirmation command reception flag is set. Further, for example, when the first compulsory symbol confirmation designation command is received, the first compulsory confirmation command reception flag is set. Further, for example, when the second forced symbol confirmation designation command is received, the second forced confirmation command reception flag is set.

If the received effect control command is the big hit start designation command (step 052IWS
623), the CPU 120 for effect control performs control to start the display of right-handed display on the display screen of the image display device 5 (step 052IWS624). In addition, CPU1 for production control
20 sets the big hit start designation command reception flag (step 052IWS625).
).

If the received production control command is a big hit end designation command (step 052IWS
626), the CPU 120 for effect control controls to end the display of the right-handed display on the display screen of the image display device 5 (step 052IWS627). In addition, CPU1 for production control
20 sets the big hit end designation command reception flag (step 052IWS628).
).

In this example, the right hit display is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 during the big hit game by executing the processing of steps 052IWS624 and S627.

It should be noted that, for example, by changing the display mode (for example, display color) of the right-handed display that is displayed during the big hit game, a set value suggesting effect that suggests the current set value may be executed. For example, when the right-handed display is started in step 052IWS624, normally, the right-handed display of the white display color is started, whereas when the execution of the set value suggestive effect is determined, the set value “1” is set. If the set value is “2”, the right-handed display of the green display color is started at a relatively high rate. When the set value is "3", the right-handed display of the yellow display color is started at a relatively high rate, and when the set value is "4", the right display of the orange display color is started at a relatively high rate. When the set value is "5", the hitting display is started at a relatively high rate. When the set value is "6", the right hitting display is started at a relatively high rate. The right-handed display of the rainbow display color may be started.

Further, for example, the right hit display is configured to be continuously executed even during the KT state after the big hit game is finished, and the display mode (for example, display color) of the right hit display is changed and set at the timing of the big hit game end. You may comprise so that a value suggestion production may be performed.

In addition, for example, in the low probability/first KT state, the variable display is completed 50 times and the normal state (
When shifting to a low probability/low base state), the left-handed display is configured to start, and the display mode (for example, display color) of the left-handed display is changed to execute the set value suggestion effect. You may comprise. Thus, when the control of the game state is switched in some form, the set value suggestion effect may be configured to be executable.

If the received effect control command is a small hit start designation command (step 052IWS
629), the production control CPU 120 sets the small hit start designation command reception flag (step 052IWS630).

If the received effect control command is a small hit end designation command (step 052IWS
631), CPU120 for production control, sets the small hit end designated command reception flag (step 052IWS632).

If the received effect control command is a special winning opening open display command (step 052I)
WS633), the effect control CPU 120 resets (clears to 0) the value of the winning number counter for counting the number of game balls that have won the special winning opening during the big hit game round (
Step 052IWS 634). Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets a special winning opening opening flag that specifies that the special winning opening is open (that is, the round period during the big hit game) (step 052IWS635).

In this example, the processing of step 052IWS634 is executed, so that the value of the winning number counter is cleared to 0 at the timing of receiving the special winning opening opening display command (the timing of starting the round), which is extremely rare. Even when an over-winning prize is detected during the interval period after the end of the round period, the value is counted in the winning number counter.

If the received effect control command is a display command after opening the special winning opening (step 052I
WS636), CPU120 for production control, after the special winning opening opening flag which specifies that it is the interval period after the opening of the special winning opening (step 052IWS637).

If the received production control command is a right-handed lighting start designation command (step 052I)
WS638), the effect control CPU120 performs the control to start the lighting of the LED37 for right hitting notification (step 052IWS639).

If the received production control command is a right-handed lighting end designation command (step 052I)
(WS640), the CPU 120 for effect control performs control for ending the lighting of the LED 37 for right-hand hitting notification (step 052IWS641).

If the received effect control command is a low-accuracy/non-KT background designating command (step 052)
The IWS 642) and the effect control CPU 120 perform control to display the background image in the image display device 5 as a background image (for example, a blue background image) corresponding to the low probability/non-KT state (step 052IWS 643). Further, the effect control CPU 120 resets the first KT state flag indicating the first KT state if set (step 052IWS).
644). Also, the effect control CPU 120 counts the cumulative number of prize balls paid out based on winning in the special winning opening and the special winning opening during the big hit game and the high probability/second KT state. If the sphere number counter is set, the value of the prize sphere number counter is reset (cleared to 0) (step 052IWS645).

In this example, a game ball wins the big winning opening during the big hitting game (except during the big hitting game based on the 2R certainty variation big hitting and the 2R regular big hitting), or the special winning opening is played during the high probability/second KT state. The value of the award ball number counter is cumulatively updated when a ball is won (see steps 052IWS660 and S667), but by executing the process of step 052IWS645, the gaming state has a low probability/ High base state (low probability/first KT state)
When the variable display is completed 50 times and the low probability/low base state is reached, the value of the prize ball number counter is cleared to 0.

If the received effect control command is the low accuracy/first KT background designation command (step 05)
2IWS646), CPU120 for production control performs the control which displays the background image in image display device 5 with the background image (for example, green background image) according to the low probability/first KT state (
Step 052IWS647). Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets the first KT state flag (step 052IWS648) and, if set, the high-probability state flag indicating the high-probability state, and the high-probability state flag indicating the second KT state. The 2KT status flag is reset (step 052IWS649).

If the received production control command is the high-precision/first KT background designating command (step 05)
2IWS 650), the CPU 120 for effect control performs control to display the background image in the image display device 5 as a background image (for example, a yellow background image) corresponding to the high probability/first KT state (
Step 052IWS651). Moreover, the CPU 120 for effect control sets the high-probability state flag and the first KT state flag (step 052IWS652) and, if set, resets the second KT state flag (step 052IWS653).

If the received production control command is the high-precision/second KT background designating command (step 05)
2IWS 654), the effect control CPU 120 performs control to display the background image in the image display device 5 as a background image (for example, a red background image) corresponding to the high probability/second KT state (
Step 052IWS655). In addition, the production control CPU 120 sets the high-probability state flag and the second KT state flag (step 052IWS656), and resets the first KT state flag if set (step 052IWS657).

If the received effect control command is a special winning award winning designation command (step 052IW
S658), CPU120 for production control, 10R probability variation big hit, 6R probability variation big hit, or 6R.
R It is confirmed whether or not the big hit game based on the normal big hit is being played (step 052IWS6).
59). Whether or not the big hit game based on the 10R probability big hit, the 6R probability big hit, or the 6R normal big hit is being played, for example, when the value of the effect control process flag is big hit performance processing (
It is confirmed whether or not the values indicate the step S176) to the ending effect processing (step S177), and the display result designation command stored in the display result designation command storage area is the display result 2 designation command to the display result 4 It can be determined by checking whether it is a designated command.

During the big hit game based on the 10R sure change big hit, the 6R sure change big hit, or the 6R normal big hit, the effect control CPU 120 adds 15 to the value of the prize ball number counter (step 0).
52IWS660). Further, the effect control CPU 120 updates the prize sphere number display displayed on the image display device 5 based on the value of the prize sphere number counter after the addition (step 052I).
WS661). The prize ball number display is a display of the cumulative number of prize balls paid out based on winning in the special winning opening and the special winning opening during the big hit game and the high probability/second KT state.

By executing the processing of steps 052IWS658 to S661, in this example,
The value of the prize ball number counter and the prize ball number display are updated based on the fact that a prize has been won at the special winning opening during the big hit game based on the 10R probability variation big hit, the 6R probability variation big hit, or the 6R normal big hit. On the other hand, even during the big hit game, if a winning in the special winning opening occurs during the big hit game based on the 2R probability variation big hit or the 2R normal big hit, the value of the prize ball number counter is not updated, and the prize ball The number display is not updated either.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes an over-winning suggestion effect process for determining and executing an over-winning suggestion effect (step 052IWS662). In addition,
The "over-winning suggestion effect" is an effect executed at the timing when an over-winning to the special winning opening occurs and suggesting the currently set setting value.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes the prize sphere number display suggestion effect process for determining and executing the prize sphere number indication suggestion effect (step 052IWS663). In addition, "the prize ball number indication suggestion effect" is a predetermined cumulative number of prize balls paid out based on winning at the special winning opening or the special winning opening during the big hit game or the high probability/second KT state. Number (in this example, 456, 5
(55 pieces, 666 pieces, 2456 pieces, 2555 pieces, 2666 pieces), and is an effect that suggests the currently set setting value.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes the prize ball number emphasis effect process for determining and executing the prize ball number emphasis effect (step 052IWS664). In addition, the "award ball number emphasizing effect" is the cumulative number of award balls paid out based on the fact that the player has won a special winning opening or a special winning opening during a big hit game or a high probability/second KT state. (In this example, 1000 pieces, 2000 pieces,
It is an effect that highlights that the number has reached 3000, 4000, 5000).

If the received effect control command is the special winning a prize winning designation command (step 052I
WS665), the CPU 120 for effect control confirms whether or not the second KT state flag is set (step 052IWS666). If the second KT state flag is set (that is, in the high probability/second KT state), the effect control CPU 120 adds 10 to the value of the prize ball counter (step 052IWS667). In addition, CP for production control
The U120 updates the prize ball number display displayed on the image display device 5 based on the value of the prize ball number counter after the addition (step 052IWS668).

By executing the processing of steps 052IWS665 to S668, in this example,
The value of the prize ball number counter and the prize ball number display are updated based on the fact that a small hit occurs during the high probability/second KT state and a prize is won in the special prize hole. On the other hand, even during the KT state, if a special prize is won during the high probability/first KT state or the low probability/first KT state, the value of the prize ball counter is not updated, The prize ball number display is not updated (however, the value of the prize ball number counter is not updated, and is not performed until the value of the prize ball number counter is reset).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes a small hit prize suggestive effect process for determining and executing a small hit prize suggestive effect (step 052IWS669). The "small hit winning suggestion effect" is an effect that is executed at the timing when a small hit occurs in the high probability/second KT state and a special winning opening is won, and suggests the currently set setting value. ..

Next, the effect control CPU 120 moves to step 052IWS663 and executes the prize ball number display suggestion effect process (step 052IWS663). Next, CPU for production control
The player 120 executes the prize ball number enhancement effect process (step 052IWS664).

If the received production control command is any other command, the production control CPU 120
Processing for storing the received effect control command and setting a flag according to the received effect control command is executed (step 052IWS670). And step 05
2Move to IWS611.

(Suggestive production process when winning over)
FIG. 10-38 is a flowchart showing the over-winning suggestion production process (step 052IWS662). In the over-winning suggestion production process, the production control CPU 120
First, 1 is added to the value of the winning number counter (step 052IWS301). Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether the value of the winning number counter after addition is 11 or more (step 052IWS302). If the value of the prize number counter is 11 or more (that is, if the over-winning to the big winning opening has occurred) CPU1 for effect control
20 uses the over-winning suggestion effect determination table for determining the presence and type of the over-winning suggestion effect, and performs a lottery process based on a random number to determine the presence and type of the over-winning suggestion effect (step). 052IWS303).

FIG. 10-39 is an illustration of a specific example of the over-winning suggestion effect determination table.
As shown in FIG. 10-39, in the over-winning suggested effect determination table, there is no over-winning suggested effect, over-winning suggested effect A, over-winning suggested effect B, over-winning suggested effect C, and over-winning effect. A determination value is assigned to each of the suggestion effect D, the over-winning suggestion effect E, and the over-winning suggestion effect F.

As shown in FIG. 10-39, in this example, when a game ball is won in the special winning opening, a prize display (in this example, “+15” in a normal display color (white in this example)) is displayed on the image display device 5. Character display) is displayed and the normal winning sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-39, when the "over prize winning suggestion effect A" is executed, the winning display is displayed in the blue display color on the image display device 5, and the speaker 8L is displayed. , 8R outputs a winning sound of a sound A different from the normal sound. Further, when the “over-winning suggestion effect B” is executed, the winning display is displayed in the green display color on the image display device 5 and the winning of the sound B different from the normal sound from the speakers 8L and 8R is performed. Sound is output. Further, when the "over-winning suggestion effect C" is executed, the winning display is displayed in a yellow display color on the image display device 5 and the winning of the sound C different from the normal sound from the speakers 8L and 8R. Sound is output. Further, when the "over prize winning suggestion effect D" is executed, the winning display is displayed in the orange display color on the image display device 5 and the sound D different from the normal sound is won from the speakers 8L and 8R. Sound is output. When the “over-winning suggestion effect E” is executed, the winning display is displayed in a red display color on the image display device 5 and the sound E different from the normal sound is won from the speakers 8L and 8R. Sound is output. When the “over-winning suggestion effect F” is executed, the winning display is displayed in the rainbow display color on the image display device 5 and the sound F different from the normal sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. The winning sound is output.

As shown in FIG. 10-39, different determination values are assigned to the over-winning suggestion determination table depending on whether the current setting value is the setting value “1” to “6”. In step 052IWS303, the effect control CPU 120 confirms the stored contents of the setting value storage area (see step 052IWS615) and specifies the current setting value. Then, the presence or absence and the type of the over-winning suggestion effect are determined based on the determination value corresponding to the specified setting value.

As shown in FIG. 10-39, in the present example, when the setting value is “1”, the rate at which execution of the over-winning suggestion effect A is determined is relatively high. In addition, in the present example, when the set value is "2", the rate at which execution of the over-winning suggestion effect B is determined is relatively high. In addition, in the present example, when the set value is “3”, the rate at which execution of the over-winning suggestion effect C is determined is relatively high. In addition, in the present example, when the set value is "4", the rate at which execution of the over-winning suggestion effect D is determined is relatively high. In addition, in the present example, when the set value is "5", the rate at which execution of the over-winning suggestion effect E is determined is relatively high. In addition, in the present example, when the set value is “6”, the rate at which execution of the over-winning suggestion effect F is determined is relatively high.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-39, in the present example, when the set value is “1”, the proportion of determining the execution of the over-winning suggestion effect that is the sum of the over-winning suggestion effects A to F is: 10
%+8%+7%+5%+5%+5%=40%, and 45% when the set value is “2”
Is 50% when the set value is "3", and 55% when the set value is "4"
And 60% when the set value is "5" and 65% when the set value is "6"
Is. As described above, in this example, the over-winning occurs relatively rarely, and therefore, the ratio of determining the execution of the over-winning suggesting effect is relatively high as compared with the small hit winning suggesting effect described later. There is.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not it has been decided to execute the over-winning suggestion effect in step 052IWS303 (step 052IWS304). If the execution of the over-winning suggestion effect has been determined, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to display a prize display according to the determined over-winning suggestion effect type on the image display device 5 (
Step 052IWS305). For example, when it is determined to execute the over-winning suggestion effect A, the image display device 5 is controlled to display the winning display in a blue display color. Further, the effect control CPU 120 controls the speakers 8L and 8R to output the winning sound according to the determined type of the over-winning suggestion effect (step 052IWS306). For example, if it is determined to execute the over-winning suggestion effect A, control is performed to output the winning sound of the sound A from the speakers 8L and 8R.

On the other hand, when the value of the winning number counter is 10 or less (N in step 052IWS302)
, Or when it is determined that there is no suggestion effect at the time of over winning (step 052 IWS304 N
), the CPU 120 for effect control performs control to display the winning display in the normal display color (white in this example) on the image display device 5 (step 052IWS307). In addition, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to output the normal winning sound from the speakers 8L and 8R (step 052IWS308).

(Small prize winning suggestion processing)
FIG. 10-40 is a flowchart showing a small hit winning suggestion effect process (step 052IWS669). In the suggestion processing at the time of winning the small hit, the CPU 120 for effect control,
First, using the small hit prize suggestive effect determination table for determining the existence and type of the small hit prize suggestive effect, a lottery process is performed based on a random number to determine the existence and type of the small hit prize suggestive effect. (Step 052IWS321).

FIG. 10-41 is an explanatory view showing a specific example of the small hit winning suggestion effect determination table. As shown in FIG. 10-41, in the small hit winning suggestion effect determination table, there is no small hit winning suggestion effect, small hit winning suggestion effect A, small hit winning suggestion effect B, small hit winning suggestion effect C,
Judgment values are assigned to the small hitting prize suggestive effect D, the small hit prize suggesting effect E, and the small hit prize suggesting effect F, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 10-41, in this example, when a game ball is won in the special winning opening, a prize display (in this example, “+10” in the normal display color (white in this example) is displayed on the image display device 5. "
Character display) is displayed, and normal winning sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-41, when the “small hitting winning suggestion effect A” is executed, the winning display is displayed in the blue display color on the image display device 5 and the speaker is displayed. The winning sound of the sound A different from the normal sound is output from 8L and 8R. When the “small hit prize suggestion effect B” is executed, the prize display is displayed in the green display color on the image display device 5 and the sound B different from the normal sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. The winning sound is output. When the “small hit winning suggestion C” is executed, the winning display is displayed in the image display device 5 in a yellow display color and the sound C different from the normal sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. The winning sound is output. When the “small hit prize suggestion effect D” is executed, the prize display is displayed in the orange display color on the image display device 5 and the speaker 8L is displayed.
, 8R outputs a winning sound of a sound D different from the normal sound. When the “small hit winning suggestion effect E” is executed, the winning display is displayed in a red display color on the image display device 5 and the sound E different from the normal sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. The winning sound is output. When the “small hit prize suggestion effect F” is executed, the prize display is displayed in the rainbow display color on the image display device 5, and the sound F different from the normal sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. The winning sound of is output.

As shown in FIG. 10-41, different determination values are assigned to the suggestion determination table for winning a small prize depending on whether the current setting value is one of the setting values “1” to “6”. . In step 052IWS 321, the effect control CPU 120 causes the setting value storage area (step 0
52 IWS 615) and confirms the present setting value. Then, based on the determination value corresponding to the specified setting value, the presence or absence and the type of the small hit winning suggestion effect are determined.

As shown in FIG. 10-41, in the present example, when the setting value is “1”, the rate at which the execution of the small hit winning suggestion effect A is determined is relatively high. Further, in the present example, when the set value is “2”, the proportion of the execution of the small hit winning suggestion effect B being determined is relatively high. In addition, in the present example, when the set value is "3", the rate at which the execution of the small hit winning suggestion effect C is determined is relatively high. Further, in the present example, when the set value is "4", the proportion of the execution of the small hit winning suggestion effect D determined is relatively high. Further, in the present example, when the setting value is "5", the proportion of the execution of the small hit winning suggestion effect E determined is relatively high. Further, in this example, the set value is "6"
In the case of, the proportion of the execution of the small hit winning suggestion effect F determined is relatively high.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-41, in the present example, when the setting value is “1”, the proportion of determining the execution of the small hitting prize suggestive effect which is the sum of the small hit prize suggesting effects A to F Is 2%+1
%+1%+1%=5%, 6% when the setting value is “2”, 7% when the setting value is “3”, and 7% when the setting value is “4” Is 8%, 9% when the set value is "5", and 10% when the set value is "6". As described above, in this example, as compared with the above-described over-winning time suggestive effect, the rate of determining execution of the small hit winning time suggestive effect is relatively low.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the execution of the small hit winning suggestion effect has been determined in step 052IWS321 (step 052IWS322). If the execution of the small hit winning suggestion effect has been determined, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to display a prize display according to the determined type of the small hit prize suggesting effect (step). 052IWS323). For example, if it is determined to execute the small hit winning suggestion effect A, the image display device 5 is controlled to display the winning display in a blue display color. Further, the effect control CPU 120 controls the speakers 8L and 8R to output the winning sound according to the determined type of the small hit winning suggestion effect (step 052IWS324). For example, when the execution of the small hit winning suggestion effect A is determined, control is performed to output the winning sound of the sound A from the speakers 8L and 8R.

On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no suggestive effect at the time of winning the small hit (step 052 IWS322 N).
In addition, the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display a normal display color (in this example,
The control for displaying the winning display in white is performed (step 052IWS325). In addition, the production control CPU 120 performs control to output the normal winning sound from the speakers 8L and 8R (
Step 052IWS 326).

The reliability of the set value suggestion may be different between when the over-winning suggestion effect is executed and when the small hit winning suggestion effect is executed. For example, the over-winning suggestion effect F can be executed with any of the set values “1” to “6”, but is executed at a relatively high rate when the set value is “6”, while the small hit. Set value "6" if the suggested effect F at the time of winning is executed
It may be configured to determine that On the other hand, conversely, for example, the small hitting prize suggestive effect F is executed at a relatively high rate when the set value is “6” although the set value “1” to “6” can be executed. On the other hand, when the over-winning suggestion effect F is executed, it may be determined that the set value is “6”.

Further, in this example, the over-winning suggestion effect and the small hit winning suggestion effect cause the display mode of the prize display (in this example, the display color) to be different from the normal one, and output a different prize sound. Although the case is shown where it is executed according to an aspect, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example,
By making only one of the display mode (display color in this example) and the winning sound of the prize display different from the normal mode, the over-winning suggestion effect and the small hit winning suggestion effect are executed. You may comprise. In addition, for example, an effect display may be displayed at the timing of occurrence of an over-winning prize or a winning in a special winning opening, or the display color of a lamp or LED may be changed to suggest an over-winning prize or a small winning prize. The time suggestion effect may be configured to be executed.

(Award ball number indication suggestion processing)
FIG. 10-42 is a flowchart showing the prize sphere number display suggesting effect process (step 052IWS663). In the award ball number display suggesting effect process, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not the value of the award ball number counter reaches 456 first (step 052IW).
S341). In this example, if a game ball is won in the special winning opening during the big hit game, 15 prize balls are obtained, and the value of the prize ball number counter is incremented by 15. Therefore, step 052IWS3
In 41, if the value of the prize ball number counter is 465, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the value of the prize ball number counter has reached 456 first.

If the value of the prize ball counter reaches 456 first, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current setting value is equal to or more than the setting value “4” (step 052IWS342).
.. It should be noted that whether or not the current set value is equal to or larger than the set value “4” can be specifically determined by checking the storage content of the set value storage area (see step 052IWS615). If the current set value is equal to or more than the set value “4”, the effect control CPU 120 uses the prize ball number display suggestion effect determination table for determining the presence or absence of the prize ball number display suggestion effect, and the lottery based on the random number. Processing is performed to determine the presence or absence of the prize ball number display suggestive effect A (step 052IWS343).
Then, the process proceeds to step 052IWS359.

FIG. 10-43 is an explanatory diagram of a specific example of the award ball number display suggestive effect determination table. Figure 1
As shown in 0-43, in this example, when the prize ball number display suggesting effect A is executed, a character display such as “456 OVER” is displayed on the image display device 5, and the current set value is set. It is suggested that the value is “4” or more. As shown in FIG. 10-43, in this example, the execution of the prize ball number display suggestive effect A is determined with a probability of 3%. In this example, the prize number display indication effect A
Is only executed when the set value is greater than or equal to the set value "4", so the prize number display suggestive effect A
If is executed, it is determined that at least the set value is “4” or more.

Unless the value of the prize ball counter reaches 456 for the first time (step 052IWS
341 N), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the value of the prize ball number counter first reaches 555 (step 052IWS344). In this example, if a game ball is won in the special winning opening during the big hit game, 15 prize balls are obtained, and the value of the prize ball number counter is incremented by 15. Therefore, in step 052IWS344, the effect control is performed. If the value of the prize ball number counter is 555, the CPU 120 determines that the value of the prize ball number counter has reached 555 first.

If the value of the prize ball counter reaches 555 for the first time, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current setting value is the setting value “5” or more (step 052IWS345).
.. It should be noted that whether or not the current set value is equal to or larger than the set value “5” can be specifically determined by checking the storage content of the set value storage area (see step 052IWS615). If the current set value is greater than or equal to the set value “5”, the effect control CPU 120 performs a lottery process based on a random number by using the prize ball number indication suggestion effect determination table, and determines whether or not there is the prize ball number indication suggestion effect B. Is determined (step 052IWS346). Then, the process proceeds to step 052IWS359.

As shown in FIG. 10-43, in the present example, in the case where the prize ball number display suggesting effect B is executed,
A character display such as “555 OVER” is displayed on the image display device 5, which suggests that the current set value is equal to or more than the set value “5”. In this example, as shown in FIG.
Execution of the prize ball number display suggestive effect B is determined with a probability of %. In this example, since the prize sphere number display suggestive effect B is executed only when the set value is equal to or more than the set value “5”, if the prize sphere number suggestive effect B is executed, at least the set value “5” is set. It will be decided that it is above.

Unless the value of the prize ball counter reaches 555 for the first time (step 052IWS
344 N), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the value of the prize ball number counter reaches 666 first (step 052IWS347). In this example, if a game ball is won in the special winning opening during the big hit game, 15 prize balls are obtained, and the value of the prize ball number counter is incremented by 15. Therefore, in step 052IWS347, the effect control is performed. If the value of the prize ball counter is 675, the CPU 120 determines that the value of the prize ball counter has reached 666 first.

If the value of the prize ball number counter has reached 666 first, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current setting value is the setting value "6" (step 052IWS348). Whether or not the current set value is the set value “6” can be specifically determined by checking the stored contents of the set value storage area (see step 052IWS615). If the current set value is the set value "6", the effect control CPU 120 performs a lottery process based on a random number by using the prize ball number display suggestion effect determination table and determines whether or not the prize ball number indication suggestion effect C is present. It is determined (step 052IWS349). Then, the process proceeds to step 052IWS359.

As shown in FIG. 10-43, in the present example, when the prize ball number display suggestive effect C is executed,
A character display such as "666 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5, which suggests that the current setting value is the setting value "6". As shown in FIG. 10-43, in this example, the execution of the prize ball number display suggestive effect C is determined with a probability of 1%. In this example, since the prize sphere number display suggestive effect C is executed only when the set value is the set value "6", if the prize sphere number indication suggestive effect C is executed, the set value is "6". It will be confirmed that there is.

Unless the value of the prize ball counter reaches 666 for the first time (step 052IWS
347 N), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the value of the prize ball number counter reaches 2456 for the first time (step 052IWS350). In this example, 15 award balls will be obtained if a game ball is won in the special winning opening during the big hit game, and 10 award balls if the game ball is won in the special winning opening during the high probability/second KT state. Since the value of the prize ball number counter is incremented by 15 or 10, the effect control CPU 120 determines in step 052IWS350 if the prize ball number counter value is 2460 or 2465. It is determined that the value of the number counter reaches 2456 first.

If the value of the prize ball counter reaches 2456 first, the effect control CPU 120
It is confirmed whether or not the current setting value is the setting value “4” or more (step 052IWS351).
). It should be noted that whether or not the current set value is equal to or larger than the set value “4” can be specifically determined by checking the storage content of the set value storage area (see step 052IWS615). If the current set value is greater than or equal to the set value “4”, the effect control CPU 120 performs lottery processing based on a random number by using the prize ball number indication suggestion effect determination table, and whether or not the prize ball number indication suggestion effect D is present. Is determined (step 052IWS352). Then, the process proceeds to step 052IWS359.

As shown in FIG. 10-43, in this example, when the prize ball number display suggestive effect D is executed,
A character display such as "2456 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5, and it is suggested that the current setting value is the setting value "4" or more. As shown in FIG. 10-43, in this example,
Execution of the prize ball number display suggestive effect D is determined with a probability of 5%. In this example, since the prize sphere number display suggestive effect D is executed only when the set value is equal to or more than the set value “4”, if the prize sphere number indication suggestive effect D is executed, the set value “4”. It is confirmed that the above is done.

Unless the value of the prize ball counter reaches 2456 for the first time (step 052IW
N of S350), the CPU 120 for effect control confirms whether or not the value of the prize ball number counter has reached 2555 first (step 052IWS353). In this example, 15 prize balls are obtained if the game balls enter the special winning opening during the big hit game, and 10 if the game balls enter the special winning opening during the high probability/second KT state. Is obtained, and the value of the prize ball number counter is incremented by 15 or 10, so in step 052IWS353, the effect control CPU 120
If the value of the prize ball number counter is 2555 or 2560, it is determined that the value of the prize ball number counter reaches 2555 first.

If the value of the prize ball counter has reached 2555 first, the effect control CPU 120
It is confirmed whether or not the current setting value is the setting value “5” or more (step 052IWS354).
). It should be noted that whether or not the current set value is equal to or larger than the set value “5” can be specifically determined by checking the storage content of the set value storage area (see step 052IWS615). If the current set value is greater than or equal to the set value “5”, the effect control CPU 120 performs a lottery process based on a random number by using the prize ball number indication suggestion effect determination table, and determines whether or not there is the prize ball number indication suggestion effect E. Is determined (step 052IWS355). Then, the process proceeds to step 052IWS359.

As shown in FIG. 10-43, in the present example, in the case where the award ball number display suggestive effect E is executed,
A character display such as “2555 OVER” is displayed on the image display device 5, and it is suggested that the current setting value is the setting value “5” or more. As shown in FIG. 10-43, in this example,
Execution of the prize ball number display suggestive effect E is determined with a probability of 3%. In this example, since the prize sphere number display suggestive effect E is executed only when the set value is equal to or more than the set value “5”, if the prize sphere number suggestive effect E is executed, the set value “5” is set. It is confirmed that the above is done.

Unless the value of the prize ball counter reaches 2555 for the first time (step 052IW
(N of S353), the CPU 120 for effect control confirms whether or not the value of the prize ball number counter first reaches 2666 (step 052IWS356). In this example, 15 prize balls are obtained if the game balls enter the special winning opening during the big hit game, and 10 if the game balls enter the special winning opening during the high probability/second KT state. Is obtained, and the value of the prize ball counter is incremented by 15 or 10, so in step 052IWS356, the effect control CPU 120
If the value of the prize ball number counter is 2670 or 2675, it is determined that the value of the prize ball number counter reaches 2666 first.

If the value of the prize ball counter reaches 2666 first, the effect control CPU 120
It is confirmed whether or not the current set value is the set value "6" (step 052IWS357).
Whether or not the current set value is the set value “6” can be specifically determined by checking the stored contents of the set value storage area (see step 052IWS615). If the current set value is the set value “6”, the effect control CPU 120 performs a lottery process based on a random number by using the prize ball number display suggestion effect determination table and determines whether or not the prize ball number indication suggestion effect F is present. decide(
Step 052IWS358). Then, the process proceeds to step 052IWS359.

As shown in FIG. 10-43, in the present example, in the case where the prize sphere number display suggesting effect F is executed,
A character display such as "2666 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5, which suggests that the current setting value is the setting value "6". As shown in FIG. 10-43, in this example, 2%
Execution of the prize ball number display suggestion effect F is determined with the probability of. In this example, since the prize sphere number display suggestive effect F is executed only when the set value is the set value “6”, the prize sphere number display suggestive effect F
Is executed, it is determined that the set value is "6".

Next, the effect control CPU 120, Steps 052IWS343, S346, S34.
It is confirmed whether or not the execution of the prize sphere number display suggesting effect is decided in 9, S352, S355, and S358 (step 052IWS359). If the execution of the prize sphere number display suggesting effect has been decided, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to execute the decided type of prize sphere number indicating suggestion effect (step 052IWS360). For example, the prize number display suggestion effect A
If it is decided to execute, the image display device 5 is controlled to display a character display such as “456 OVER”.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 10-43, when viewing the prize ball number indication suggestive effects A to C executed during the big hit game, the period during the big hit game becomes longer and the number of prize balls increases. As a result, the execution probability of the award ball number indication suggestion effect decreases to 3%, 2%, and 1%, while the setting value “4” or more is determined, the setting value “5” or more is determined, and the setting value “ 6” Accuracy of confirmation and suggestion of set value is increasing. Further, in this example, as shown in FIG. 10-43, when viewed in the award number display indication effects D to F executed during the high probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH), the small hit RUSH is shown. As the number of award balls increases and the number of award balls increases, the probability of executing the award number indication suggestion effect decreases to 5%, 3%, and 2%, while the set value "4" or more is confirmed and the set value is set. "5
The accuracy of the above confirmation and setting value "6" confirmation and setting value suggestion is increasing.

In addition to the aspect shown in this example, for example, as the period during the big hit game or the period during the small hit RUSH becomes longer and the number of prize balls increases, the probability of executing the prize ball number indication suggestive effect becomes higher. It may be configured to go. Further, for example, the precision of suggesting the set value may be lowered as the period during the big hit game or the period during the small hit RUSH becomes longer and the number of prize balls increases.

Further, in this example, as shown in FIG. 10-43, the prize ball number display suggestion effects A to C executed during the period of the big hit game and the prize ball number display suggestion executed during the period of the small hit RUSH. Production DF
In the above, the case where the execution probabilities of the prize ball number display suggestive effect are different is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode, and the prize ball number display suggestive effect may be configured to be executed with the same execution probability.

(Awards ball number emphasis production process)
FIG. 10-44 is a flowchart showing the prize ball number emphasis effect process (step 052IWS664). In the prize ball number enhancement effect process, the effect control CPU 120 first sets the threshold value of the prize ball number counter for each 1000 (in this example, 1000, 2000, 3000, 4000).
It is confirmed whether or not (5000) is reached first (step 052IWS371). In this example, if a game ball wins in the special winning opening during the big hit game, 15 prize balls are obtained, and the value of the prize ball number counter is incremented by 15. Therefore, in step 052IWS371, the effect control is performed. For example, if the value of the prize ball counter is 1000 or 1005, the CPU 120 determines that the value of the prize ball counter has reached 1000 first. Further, for example, if the value of the prize ball counter is 2000 or 2005, the value of the prize ball counter is 200.
It is determined that 0 is reached first. Further, for example, the value of the prize ball counter is 3000 or 3
If it is 005, it is determined that the value of the prize ball counter reaches 3000 first. Further, for example, if the value of the prize ball counter is 4000 or 4005, it is determined that the value of the prize ball counter has reached 4000 first. Further, for example, if the value of the prize ball counter is 5000 or 5005, it is determined that the value of the prize ball counter reaches 5000 first.

If the value of the prize ball counter reaches the threshold value for every 1000, the effect control CPU 1
20 uses the prize ball number emphasis effect determination table for determining the presence or absence of prize ball number emphasis effect,
A lottery process based on a random number is performed to determine whether or not there is a prize ball number highlighting effect (step 052IW
S372).

FIG. 10-45 is an explanatory diagram of a specific example of the prize ball number emphasis effect determination table. Figure 10-
As shown in 45, in this example, when the value of the prize ball counter reaches 1000,
Execution of the prize ball number emphasis effect A is determined with a probability of 50%. When the prize ball number enhancement effect A is executed, a character display such as “1000 OVER” is displayed on the image display device 5.
Further, in the present example, when the value of the prize ball number counter reaches 2000, the execution of the prize ball number emphasizing effect B is determined with a probability of 60%. When the prize sphere emphasis effect B is executed, a character display such as “2000 OVER” is displayed on the image display device 5. Further, in this example, when the value of the prize ball number counter reaches 3000, the execution of the prize ball number emphasizing effect C is determined with a probability of 70%. When the prize ball number enhancement effect C is executed, a character display such as “3000 OVER” is displayed on the image display device 5. Further, in this example, when the value of the prize ball number counter reaches 4000, the execution of the prize ball number emphasizing effect D is determined with a probability of 80%. When the award ball number enhancement effect D is executed, “40” is displayed on the image display device 5.
A character display such as "00 OVER" is displayed. In addition, in this example, when the value of the prize ball number counter reaches 5000, the execution of the prize ball number emphasizing effect E is determined with a probability of 90%. When the award ball number emphasis effect E is executed, “5000 OVER” is displayed on the image display device 5.
Character display such as "R" is displayed.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the execution of the award ball number emphasis effect is determined in step 052IWS372 (step 052IWS373). If execution of the prize sphere emphasis effect has been determined, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to execute the determined type of prize sphere emphasis effect in the image display device 5 (step 052IWS374). For example, if it is decided to execute the prize ball number emphasizing effect A, the image display device 5 displays “1000 O”.
Control to display a character display such as "VER" is performed.

In this example, the case where the prize ball number emphasizing effect is configured to be executable when the number of prize balls reaches 1000, 2000, 3000, 4000, and 5000 has been described. It is not limited to the mode. For example, not only when it is possible to execute the prize ball number emphasizing effect in all of these cases, it is possible to execute the prize ball number emphasizing effect when the number of prize balls reaches 1000, 2000, and 3000. You may comprise. Also, for example, the number of prize balls is 600
The number of prize balls emphasis effect may be configured to be executable even when the number reaches 0 or 7,000, and various modes are possible.

As shown in FIGS. 10-44 and 10-45, the prize ball number emphasis effect is not related to the current set value, unlike the prize ball number display suggestion effect shown in FIGS. 10-42 and 10-43. It is a performance that is decided and executed. Not limited to such an aspect, for example, by changing the display mode of the prize sphere number emphasis effect, the prize sphere number emphasis effect may be configured to be executed in a mode that suggests the current set value. For example, "1000 OVER" or "
The present setting value may be suggested by displaying a character display such as "2000 OVER".

(Variable display start wait processing)
FIG. 10-46 is a flowchart showing the variable display start waiting process (step S170). In the variable display start waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the variation pattern command is received (step 052IWS811). Whether or not the variation pattern command is received is determined by, for example, in the command analysis process (step S75), when the variation pattern command is received, a variation pattern command reception flag indicating that the variation pattern command is received is set. Step 052 IWS811
Then, it suffices to confirm whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag is set.

If the variation pattern command is received, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the first KT state flag or the second KT state flag is set (step 052I).
WS812). If neither the first KT state flag nor the second KT state flag is set (that is, if it is a non-KT state), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the variable display of the first special symbol. Is confirmed (step 052IWS813). Whether or not the variation display of the first special symbol is executed is, for example, whether or not the variation pattern indicated by the received variation pattern command specifies the first variation patterns #01 to #09. It can be determined by confirming that. Unless the variable display of the first special symbol is executed (that is, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed), the process is ended as it is. If the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, CPU 12 for effect control
0 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the variable display start setting process (step S171) (step 052IWS815).

If the first KT state flag or the second KT state flag is not set (ie,
If it is in the KT state), the CPU 120 for effect control confirms whether or not it is the time to execute the variable display of the second special symbol (step 052IWS814). Whether or not the variation display of the second special symbol is executed is, for example, whether or not the variation pattern indicated by the received variation pattern command specifies the second variation patterns #01 to #34. It can be determined by confirming that. Unless the variable display of the second special symbol is executed (that is,
If the variable display of the first special symbol is to be executed), the process is ended as it is. When performing the variable display of the second special symbol, the CPU 120 for effect control updates the value of the effect control process flag to the value corresponding to the variable display start setting process (step S171) (step 052IWS815).

By performing the processing of steps 052IWS812 to S815, in the characteristic portion 052IW, in the non-KT state, the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed in the image display device 5 in correspondence with the variable display of the first special symbol. Is executed, in the case of the KT state, the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed in the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol. In other words, even when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, it is in the KT state,
Even when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, in the non-KT state, the variable display of the decorative symbol is not executed.

(Variable display start setting process)
FIG. 10-47 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171). In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the variable display of the first special symbol is to be executed (step 052IWS920). Whether or not the variable display of the first special symbol is executed is, for example, the variation pattern command stored in the variation pattern command storage area specifies the first variation pattern #01 to #09. It can be determined by checking whether or not there is. If the variable display of the first special symbol is to be executed, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the variable display this time is a small hit (step 052IWS921). Whether or not the variable display this time is a small hit is confirmed by, for example, confirming whether or not the display result designation command stored in the display result designation command storage area is the display result 7 designation command. It can be determined by If it is a small hit variation, the effect control CPU 120 determines a non-reach out-of-range design as a stop design of the decorative design (step 052IWS922).

As described above, in this example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and the small hit occurs, there is only a small hit A, and the game ball to the special winning opening during the small hit game. I can hardly expect to win the prize. Therefore, when the processing of steps 052IWS920 to S922 is executed, in the present example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and a small hit occurs,
By forcibly displaying the non-reach outliers, the player is prevented from having excessive expectations.

When performing the variable display of the second special symbol (N in step 052IWS920), or if it is not a small hit variation (N in step 052IWS921), the production control CPU 120, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol according to the variable display result. Is determined (step 052IWS923)
.. In step 052IWS923, the effect control CPU 120, when the display result 1 designation command is received (when it is determined to be off), only the out-of-left or left or right decorative designs in which the left-middle-right decorative design does not match at all. Determine the combination of out-of-match reach patterns. When the display result 2 designation command is received (when it is determined to be the 10R probability variation big hit), the combination of symbols arranged in the symbol “7” among the odd left symbols is determined. In addition, when the display result 3 designation command is received (when it is determined that the 6R probability variation big hit), the combination of the symbols arranged in the odd-numbered symbols other than "7" is determined for the left middle right decorative symbol. Further, when the display result 5 designation command is received (when it is determined to be the 2R probability variation big hit), the combination of symbols including the special symbol (in this example, the symbol “R”) as the decorative symbol in the symbol is determined. .. Further, when the display result 4 designation command or the display result 6 designation command is received (when it is determined to be the 6R normal big hit or the 2R normal big hit), the combination of symbols in which the left middle right decorative pattern is arranged in an even number pattern To decide. Further, when the display result 7 designation command is received (when it is determined to be a small hit), the combination of the decorative designs of the small hit design (for example, "135") is determined.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current variable display is out of order (step 052IWS924). It should be noted that whether or not the variable display this time is out of order is, for example, whether or not the display result designation command stored in the display result designation command storage area is the display result 1 designation command. Can be determined by. If it is not a deviation variation, the process directly proceeds to step 052IWS928. If it is a deviation variation (Y in step 052IWS924), the effect control CPU 120 executes the set value suggestion effect setting process for determining the presence and type of the set value suggestion effect that suggests the currently set setting value. (Step 052IWS925).

In step 052IWS925, the effect control CPU 120 identifies the setting value stored in the setting value storage area (see step 052IWS615). Then, the effect control CPU 120 performs a lottery process based on a random number by using a table corresponding to the specified setting value as a setting value suggestion effect determination table for determining the presence and type of the setting value suggestion effect, and the setting is performed. Determine the presence and type of value suggestion production.

FIG. 10-48 is an explanatory diagram for describing a specific example of the setting value suggestive effect determination table. As shown in FIG. 10-48, in the setting value suggesting effect determination table, there is no setting value suggesting effect,
A determination value is assigned to each of the setting value suggesting effect A, the setting value suggesting effect B, the setting value suggesting effect C, the setting value suggesting effect D, the setting value suggesting effect E, and the setting value suggesting effect F.

The set value suggesting effect A is, for example, an effect executed in a mode in which a predetermined character image is displayed in a blue display color on the image display device 5, and as shown in FIG. In some cases, the execution rate is highest. The set value suggestive effect B is, for example, an effect executed in a mode in which a predetermined character image is displayed with a green display color on the image display device 5, and as shown in FIG. ", the highest execution rate.
Further, the set value suggestive effect C is, for example, an effect executed in a mode in which a predetermined character image is displayed in the yellow display color on the image display device 5, and as shown in FIG. ", the highest execution rate. Further, the set value suggestive effect D is, for example, an effect executed in a mode in which a predetermined character image is displayed in the orange display color on the image display device 5, and as shown in FIG. ", the highest execution rate. Further, the set value suggestive effect E is, for example, an effect executed in a mode of displaying a predetermined character image in a red display color on the image display device 5, and as shown in FIG. ", the highest execution rate. Further, the set value suggestive effect F is, for example,
This is an effect executed in a mode in which a predetermined character image is displayed in a rainbow display color on the image display device 5. As shown in FIG. 10-48, the execution rate is highest when the setting value is "6". ..

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the second KT state flag is set (step 052IWS926). If the second KT state flag is not set (that is, it is not the second KT state), the process directly proceeds to step 052IWS928. If the second KT status flag is set (Y in step 052IWS926),
That is, if the second KT state, the effect control CPU120, the second KT state (small hit R.
USH) small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect setting processing for determining the presence and type of a small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect (step 052IWS92).
7).

FIG. 10-49 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect determination table. As shown in FIG. 10-49, in the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect determination table, there is no small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect, small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect A, and small hit R.
A judgment value is assigned to each USH continuation suggestion effect B. The small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect A is, for example, an effect executed in a mode of displaying a predetermined effect image in a blue display color on the image display device 5. The small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect B is, for example, an effect executed in a mode in which a predetermined effect image is displayed in a red display color on the image display device 5.

As shown in FIG. 10-49, in the present example, the small hitting RUSH continuation suggesting effect is highest when the setting value is "1" and the small hitting RUSH continuation suggesting effect is when the setting value is "2". The execution ratio of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is further higher when the execution ratio of is the next highest and the setting value is "3", and the execution ratio of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is when the setting value is "4". Is the next highest and the setting value is "5", the execution ratio of the small hit RUSH continuation suggesting effect is the next highest, and the setting value is "6", the execution ratio of the small hit RUSH continuation suggesting effect is the highest. It's getting low.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-49, the execution ratio of the small hit RUSH continuation suggesting effect A is highest when the setting value is "1", and the small hitting RUSH continuation suggesting effect B is when the setting value is "6".
Has the highest execution rate.

In this example, the jackpot probability is the lowest when the setting value is "1", and the highest jackpot probability is the highest when the setting value is "6". Since the second KT state may end as a trigger, the setting value "1" is the setting state in which the second KT state is most likely to continue (high continuation expectation level) and the setting value "6". In some cases, it can be said that the second KT state is the setting state in which it is most difficult to continue (the degree of continuation expectation is low).
Therefore, in this example, when the setting value is "1", the execution ratio of the small hit RUSH continuation suggesting effect is the highest, and when the setting value is "6", the execution ratio of the small hit RUSH continuation suggesting effect is the lowest. Since the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed, the second
It is possible to increase the expectation that the KT state (small hit RUSH) will continue.

As described above, the degree of continuation expectation of the second KT state (small hit RUSH) is the degree of expectation that the control period to the second KT state will be long without a big hit.

Further, in the present example, when the set value is "1", the execution ratio of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect A is the highest, so that the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect A is particularly executed, It is possible to further increase the expectation for continuing the second KT state (small hit RUSH).

Next, when the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the variation pattern of the decorative pattern to be used and the set value suggestion effect or the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect based on the change pattern indicated by the received change pattern command. , Set value suggestion production and small hit RUSH
A process table corresponding to the continuation suggestion effect is selected (step 052IWS928).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets the process timer set value of the process data 1 in the process table selected in step 052IWS928 to the process timer and starts the process timer (step 052IWS929). Next, the effect control CPU 120, according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1), the effect device (image display device 5, various lamps, speaker 8L).
, 8R) is executed (step 052IWS930). For example, a control signal (display control execution data) is output to the VDP in order to display an image according to the variation pattern on the image display device 5. In addition, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the LED control board 14 in order to control the turning on/off of various lamps. In addition, the speaker 8L,
A control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound from the 8R.

When the execution of the set value suggestion effect is determined, the step 052IWS930 and the variable display effect effect process (step S172) are executed according to the process table including the set value suggestion effect selected in step 052IWS928, so that the decoration is performed. The set value suggestion effect is executed during the variable display of the symbols (during the deviation).

When it is determined to execute the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect, step 052IWS
In accordance with the process table including the small hitting RUSH continuation suggestion effect selected in 928, step 052IWS930 and variable display during effect processing (step S172) are executed, so that the decorative pattern is displayed in variation (during variation in the second KT state). ) The small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to the variation time in the decorative symbol variation time timer to start the decorative symbol variation time timer (step 052IWS931). Then, the effect control process flag is updated to a value according to the variable display effect process (step S172) (step 052IWS932).

(Direction processing during variable display)
FIG. 10-50 shows the production process during variable display in the production control process process (step S17).
It is a flow chart which shows 2). In the variable display during effect processing, effect control CPU 12
For 0, first, the value of the process timer is decremented by 1 (step 052IWS8101).
), the value of the decorative symbol variation time timer is subtracted by 1 (step 052IWS8102). When the process timer times out (step 052IWS8103), the process data is switched. That is, the process timer set value set next in the process table is set in the process timer (step 052IWS8104). Further, the control state for the effect device is changed based on the display control execution data, the lamp control execution data and the sound number data set next (step 052IWS8105).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the first KT state flag or the second KT state flag is set (step 052IWS8106). If neither the first KT state flag nor the second KT state flag is set (that is, if it is in the non-KT state), the effect control CPU 120 has received the first symbol confirmation designation command (for example, the first 1 confirmation command reception flag is set) (step 052IWS8107). If the first symbol confirmation designation command is received, C for effect control
PU120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to the value according to the special figure per waiting process (step S173) (step 052IWS8110).

If the first symbol confirmation designation command has not been received, the effect control CPU 120 has received the first compulsory symbol confirmation designation command (for example, whether or not the first compulsory confirmation command reception flag has been set). Is confirmed (step 052IWS8108). If the first compulsory symbol fixing designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 replaces the decorative symbol stop symbol determined in step 052IWS923 of the variable display start setting process with a falling symbol (step 052IWS8109). And the CPU 120 for effect control,
The value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special figure waiting process (step S173) (step 052IWS8110).

If the first KT state flag or the second KT state flag is set in step 052IWS8106 (that is, if it is the KT state), the effect control CPU 120 has received the second symbol confirmation designation command (for example, the first 2) Confirmation command reception flag is set) (step 052IWS8111). If the second symbol confirmation designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value according to the special figure hit waiting process (step S173) (step 052IWS8114).
).

If the second symbol confirmation designation command has not been received, the effect control CPU 120 has received the second forced symbol confirmation designation command (for example, whether or not the second forced confirmation command reception flag is set). Is confirmed (step 052IWS8112). If the second compulsory symbol confirmation designating command is received, the effect control CPU 120 performs a process of replacing the stop symbol of the decorative symbol determined in step 052IWS923 of the variable display start setting process with a falling symbol (step 052IWS8113). And the CPU 120 for effect control,
The value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special figure waiting process (step S173) (step 052IWS8114).

If the first forced symbol confirmation designation command is not received in step 052IWS8108, or if the second forced symbol confirmation designation command is not received in step 052IWS8112, the effect control CPU 120 is a decorative symbol variation time timer. Whether or not has timed out (step 052IWS8115). If the decorative symbol variation time timer has timed out, the effect control CPU 120 switches to process data for standby effect (step 052IWS8116). Then, the effect control CPU 120 restarts the process timer (step 052IWS8117).

In this example, as already described, when the variable display of the second special symbol is a small hit, if the variation display of the first special symbol that is a deviation or a small hit, the probability big hit is being executed. In, during the small hit game, the update of the first fluctuation time timer is interrupted and the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. Also, when the variation display of the first special symbol is a small hit, if the variation display of the second special symbol that is a deviation or a small hit, the probability variation big hit is being executed, during the small hit game. The update of the second variable time timer is interrupted, and the variable display of the second special symbol is continuously executed. That the decorative symbol variation time timer has timed out in step 052IWS8115 without receiving any symbol confirmation designation command,
In this way, the update of the first variable time timer or the second variable time timer is interrupted, and the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is continuously executed. In this case, in this example, the processing of steps 052IWS8116 and S8117 is executed to switch to the standby effect, and then the update of the first variation time timer or the second variation time timer is restarted, and finally one special The standby effect is continued until the variable display of the symbols or the second special symbols is completed. The “standby effect” is, for example, an effect in which the left, right, and right decorative patterns on the image display device 5 are temporarily stopped in a swinging or slightly varying state.

Note that, for example, in the image display device 5, for example, when the variable display of the system small symbol or the fourth symbol is also executed, the update of the first variable time timer or the second variable time timer is interrupted, and the first special time is interrupted. When the variable display of the symbol or the second special symbol is continuously executed, the variable display of these system small symbols and the fourth symbol is also continuously executed. Then, the update of the first variation time timer or the second variation time timer is restarted, and when the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is finally stopped and displayed, these system small symbols and fourth symbols The variable display is also stopped.

(Waiting process for special maps)
FIG. 10-51 and FIG. 10-52 are flowcharts showing the special figure hit waiting process (step S173) in the effect control process process. In the special figure hit waiting process, the CPU 120 for effect control first confirms whether or not the stop symbol display flag 1 indicating that the big hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is set (step 052IWS).
9701). If the stop symbol display flag 1 is set, step 052IWS970
Go to 6. In this characteristic part 052IW, when the big hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol, the stop symbol display flag 1 is set in step 052IWS9705.
Then, the stop symbol display flag 1 is reset when executing the big hit mid effect. Therefore, the fact that the stop symbol display flag 1 is set means that the big hit symbol has been confirmed and displayed, but since the big hit mid effect has not yet been executed, the process of displaying the stop symbol of the decorative symbol in step 052IWS9703 is executed. Without executing, the process proceeds to step 052IWS9706.

If the stop symbol display flag 1 is not set, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the stop symbol display flag 2 indicating that the small hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is set. (Step 052IWS9702). Stop symbol display flag 2
If is set, the process proceeds to step 052IWS9717. This feature 052I
In W, when the small hitting design is displayed as the stop design of the decorative design, step 052IW
In S9716, the stop symbol display flag 2 is set. Then, the stop symbol display flag 2 is reset when executing the effect during the small hit. Therefore, the fact that the stop symbol display flag 2 is set means that the small hit symbol has been fixedly displayed but the effect during the small hit has not been executed yet, so the stop symbol of the decorative symbol of step 052IWS9703 is displayed. The process moves to step 052IWS9717 without executing the process.

If neither the stop symbol display flag 1 nor the stop symbol display flag 2 is set, the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to stop the stop symbol of the left-middle-right decorative symbol (stopping symbol, jackpot symbol). , Small hit symbol) is confirmed and displayed (step 052IWS9703). In addition, when the first compulsory symbol confirmation designation command or the second compulsory symbol confirmation designation command is received, and the process of replacing the deviation symbol is executed in steps 052IWS8109 and S8113, in step 052IWS9703, the production control CP
U120 performs control to confirm and display the outlier symbol.

When the big hit symbol is confirmed and displayed in the process of step 052IWS9703 (Y of step 052IWS9704), the effect control CPU 120 sets the stop symbol display flag 1 (step 052IWS9705).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the big hit start designation command has been received (step 052IWS9706). When the big hit start designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 resets the stop symbol display flag 1 (step 052).
IWS9707).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the award ball number display is being displayed on the image display device 5 (step 052IWS9708). If the number of prize balls is not being displayed, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the type of big hit that has occurred this time is a 10R probability variation big hit, 6
It is confirmed whether or not it is the R certainty jackpot or the 6R normal jackpot (step 052IWS9).
709). Whether or not the big hit type is the 10R probability big hit, the 6R probability big hit, or the 6R normal big hit is, for example, the received display result designation command is the display result 2 designation command to
It can be determined by confirming whether the command is the display result 4 designation command. If it is the 10R probability variation big hit, the 6R probability variation big hit, or the 6R normal jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to start displaying the number of prize balls on the image display device 5 (step 052IWS97).
10).

By executing the processing of steps 052IWS9708 to S9710, in the present example, the display of the number of prize balls is started when the big hit game based on the 10R certainty big hit, the 6R certainty big hit, or the 6R regular big hit is started. On the other hand, even if it is a big hit, when the big hit game based on the 2R certainty variation big hit or the 2R normal big hit is started, the display of the number of prize balls is not started.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the effect during the big hit (step 052IWS9711). Next, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer by setting the process timer setting value to the process timer (step 052IWS9712), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number). According to the data 1) production device (image display device 5 as production parts, various lamps as production parts, and speakers 8L, 8R as production parts)
) Is executed (step 052IWS9713).

After that, the CPU 120 for effect control updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value according to the effect process during big hit (step S176) (step 052IWS9714).

If the big hit symbol is not fixedly displayed in the process of step 052IWS9703 (N of step 052IWS9704), if the small hit symbol is fixedly displayed in the process of step 052IWS9703 (Y of step 052IWS9715), the CPU 120 for effect control stops. The symbol display flag 2 is set (step 052IWS9716).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the small hit start designation command has been received (step 052IWS9717). When the small hit start designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 resets the stop symbol display flag 2 (step 052).
IWS9718).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table corresponding to the effect during the small hit (step 052IWS9719). Next, the production control CPU 120 starts the process timer by setting the process timer set value to the process timer (step 052IWS9720), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number). According to the data 1) production device (image display device 5 as production parts, various lamps as production parts, and speakers 8L, 8R as production parts)
) Is executed (step 052IWS9721).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value according to the effect process during small hit (step S174) (step 052IWS9722).

When the big hit symbol and the small hit symbol are not displayed in the process of step 052IWS9703 (that is, when the deviating symbol is displayed) (N in step 052IWS9704, and N in step 052IWS9715), the effect control CPU 120 causes the effect control. The value of the process flag is updated to a value according to the variable display start waiting process (step S170) (step 052IWS9723).

(Ending production process)
FIG. 10-53 is a flowchart showing the ending effect process (step S177) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. In the ending effect process, the effect control CPU 120 first subtracts 1 from the value of the effect period measurement timer (step 052).
IWS951). The production period measurement timer is set based on the fact that all the rounds of the big hit game have been completed in the big hit midway production process (see step S176).
Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the effect period measurement timer has timed out (step 052IWS952).

When the production period measurement timer has not timed out (N in step 052IWS952), the production control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step 052IW).
S953), a process for controlling the effect device (image display device 5, game effect lamp 9, speakers 8L, 8R, etc.) is executed in accordance with the content of the process data n (step 052IWS954).
). For example, an effect of displaying that the jackpot is over or displaying a predetermined character is executed.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the process timer has timed out (step 052IWS955), and if the process timer has timed out, switches the process data (step 052IWS956). Then, the process timer set value in the next process data is set in the process timer and the process timer is started (step 052IWS957).

If the production period measurement timer has timed out (Y in step 052IWS952),
The production control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the big hit game to be finished this time is a big hit game based on the 6R certainty variation big hit or the 6R normal big hit (step 052IWS958). Whether or not the 6R probability variation big hit or the 6R normal big hit is whether the display result designation command stored in the display result designation command storage area is the display result 3 designation command or the display result 4 designation command, for example. It can be determined by checking. If it is the 6R probability variation big hit or the 6R normal big hit, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to end the display of the number of prize balls displayed on the image display device 5 (step 052IWS959).

By executing the processing of steps 052IWS958 to S959, in this example,
When executing the big hit game based on 6R probability variation big hit or 6R normal big hit, the prize ball number display is displayed during the big hit game, and when the big hit game is finished, the prize ball number display is erased, and the big hit game The number of prize balls is not displayed during the high probability/first KT state or the low probability/first KT state after the end.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the big hit game to be finished this time is a big hit game based on the 2R certainty variation big hit (step 052IWS960). It can be determined whether or not the 2R probability variation big hit is, for example, by confirming whether or not the display result designation command stored in the display result designation command storage area is the display result 5 designation command. If it is a 2R probability variation big hit, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the award ball number display is being displayed on the image display device 5 (step 052IWS961). If the award ball number display is not being displayed, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to start displaying the award ball number display on the image display device 5 (step 052IWS962).

By executing the processing of steps 052IWS960 to S962, in this example,
When executing the big hit game based on the 2R probability variation big hit, the prize ball number display is not displayed during the big hit game (However, in this example, the prize ball number display is displayed before the 2R probability variation big hit. If so, the number of prize balls is continuously displayed, but the display is not updated), and the number of prize balls is displayed during the high probability/second KT state after the jackpot game is over.

After that, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value according to the variable display start waiting process (step S170) (step 052IWS963).

(Direction example)
Next, a description will be given of a performance mode of the performance executed in the present characteristic part 052IW. First, the presentation mode of the set value suggestion production will be described. FIG. 10-54 is an explanatory diagram for describing an effect mode of the set value suggestion effect. In this example, the set value suggesting effect can be executed in the variable display of the decorative pattern that is out of alignment. As shown in FIG. 10-54(A), the image display device 5
At the execution timing of the set value suggestive effect, while the variable display of the left middle right is being executed, the variable display of the decorative pattern is being displayed as shown in FIGS. 10-54 (B1) to (B3). The set value suggestion effect is executed.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 10-54 (B1) to (B3), the set value suggestion effect is executed in a mode in which the predetermined character images 052IW001, 052IW002, 052IW003 are displayed on the image display device 5. In this case, for example, when the set value suggestive effect A is executed, as shown in FIG. 10-54 (B1), the predetermined character image 052IW001 is displayed on the image display device 5 in a blue display color. Value suggestion production is executed. Further, for example, when the set value suggesting effect C is executed, as shown in FIG. 10-54 (B2), the predetermined character image 052IW00 is displayed in the image display device 5 in a yellow display color.
The set value suggestion effect is executed in the mode in which 2 is displayed. In addition, for example, the set value suggestion effect E
In the case of executing, the set value suggestion effect is executed in a mode in which the predetermined character image 052IW003 is displayed in the red display color on the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 10-54 (B3).

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 10-54, the case where the set value suggestive effect A, the set value suggestive effect C, and the set value suggestive effect E are executed is shown, but for example, when the set value suggestive effect B is executed. Indicates a predetermined character image with a green display color, a predetermined character image with an orange display color when the set value suggestion effect D is executed, and a rainbow when the set value suggestion effect F is executed. A predetermined character image is displayed in the color display color.

In the present example, which setting value is currently set for the player depending on whether a character image of a different display color is displayed during the variable display of the decorative pattern that is out of order and the setting value suggesting effect is executed. Can be expected.

Next, an effect mode of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect will be described. FIG. 10-55 is an explanatory diagram for describing a production mode of a small hit RUSH continuation suggestion production. In this example, the second K
Small hit RUS in the variable display of the decorative pattern which is out of the T state (during small hit RUSH)
The H continuation suggestion effect can be executed.

In the present example, when in the second KT state, as shown in FIG. 10-55(A), for example, a character display 052IW004 such as “small hit RUSH” is displayed on the image display device 5, and the second KT state is displayed. It is displayed so that it is in the middle. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-55(A), when the variable display of the left-middle-right decorative design is being executed on the image display device 5 during the second KT state, the execution timing of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect Then, Fig. 10-5
5 (B1) to (B3), the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 10-55 (B1) and (B2), the small hit RUSH is performed by the mode in which the predetermined effect images 052IW005 and 052IW006 are displayed on the image display device 5.
Continuation suggestion production is executed. In this example, the predetermined effect image 052IW005,052
A case where an image of a racing car is displayed as IW006 is shown. in this case,
For example, in the case of executing the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect A, as shown in FIG. 10-55 (B1), the small effect is displayed by displaying a predetermined effect image 052IW005 in a blue display color on the image display device 5. The RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed. Also, for example, small hit RU
In the case of executing the SH continuation suggestion effect B, as shown in FIG. 10-55 (B2), the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is achieved by displaying the predetermined effect image 052IW005 in the red display color on the image display device 5. Is executed.

In this example, the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion is performed by executing the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect while the variable design which is out of the second KT state is being displayed, or by displaying an effect image of any display color. Depending on whether or not the effect is executed, the player can be expected to continue the second KT state (small hit RUSH).

Next, the display mode of the right-handed notification will be described. FIG. 10-56 is an explanatory diagram for describing the display mode of the right-handed notification. In this example, regardless of whether it is a big jackpot in the variable display of the first special symbol or a big jackpot when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, it is during the big hit game. As shown in FIG. 10-56(1), the right-handed indicator 26 is turned on by the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) (see steps 052IWS2018A and S2018B). Further, based on the reception of the right-handing lighting start designation command, the right-handling notification LED 37 is turned on by the effect control CPU 120 as shown in FIG. 10-56(1) (step 052IWS).
2019A, S2019B, S639). Further, as shown in FIG. 10-56(1), the right-handed display 05 is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 by the effect control CPU 120.
2IW007 is displayed (see step 052IWS624).

Further, in this example, when the small hit in the variable display of the second special symbol, during the small hit game, as shown in FIG. 10-56 (2), the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically The right-handed indicator 26 is turned on by the CPU 103) (step 052IWS2).
024B). In addition, based on the reception of the right-handed lighting start designation command,
As shown in 0-56(2), by the effect control CPU 120, the right-handing notification LED 3
7 is turned on (see steps 052IWS2025B and S639). However, unlike during the big hit game, as shown in FIG. 10-56(2), the right hit display 052IW007 is not displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5.

On the other hand, in this example, when a small hit occurs in the variable display of the first special symbol, FIG.
As shown in 3), during the small hitting game, the right-handed indicator 26 is lit and the right-handed notification LED is used.
37 is not lit, and the right-handed display 052IW007 on the display screen of the image display device 5 is displayed.
Is not displayed.

Next, description will be made regarding the effect modes of the over-winning suggestion effect, the small hit winning suggestion effect, and the award ball number display suggesting effect. FIGS. 10-57 and 10-58 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the effect modes of the over-winning suggestion effect, the small hit winning suggestion effect, and the award ball number display suggesting effect. 10-57 and 10-58, the display screen transitions in the order of (A), (B), (C),.... Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 10-57 and 10-58, the case where the jackpot gaming state is controlled based on the fact that the 10R probability variation jackpot has been achieved is shown.

As shown in FIG. 10-57(A), during the big hit game, the image display device 5 displays a character display such as "big hit!" and a round number display such as "round 2". The number of prize balls display 052IW008 is displayed. Also, when a normal winning (non-over winning) to the special winning opening occurs during the big hit game, as shown in FIG. 10-57(B), the normal display color (white in this example) is displayed. 052IW009 (in this example, “+15
Is displayed), and the winning sound of the normal sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R (see steps 052IWS307 and S308).

Next, it is assumed that the over-winning occurs during the big hit game, and the execution of the over-winning suggestion effect is decided based on the occurrence of the over-winning. In this case, FIG.
As shown in C), the prize display 052IW according to the determined over-winning suggestion effect type
010 (in this example, the character display of "+15") is displayed and the speakers 8L and 8R are displayed.
From the above, a winning sound corresponding to the determined type of over-winning suggestion effect is output (step 0).
52 IWS305, S306). For example, when the over-winning suggestion effect A is executed, the winning display of the sound A is output from the speakers 8L and 8R while the winning display is displayed in the blue display color on the image display device 5.

Next, it is assumed that the number of prize balls reaches 456, and the execution of the prize ball number display suggestion effect A is decided based on the number of prize balls reaching 456. In this case, as shown in FIG. 10-57(D), the character display 052IW01 such as “456 OVER” is displayed on the image display device 5.
1 is displayed, and the prize ball number indication suggestion effect A is executed (see step 052IWS360).
..

In addition, in this example, the case where the prize sphere number display suggesting effect A is executed is shown. O
A character display such as "VER" is displayed, and the prize ball count indication suggestion effect B is executed. In addition, for example, when the execution of the prize sphere number display suggestion effect C is determined, “666” is displayed on the image display device 5.
A character display such as "OVER" is displayed, and the prize ball count indication suggestion effect C is executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-58(E), when the big hit game is finished, the game state is controlled to the high probability/second KT state after the big hit game is finished. When the high probability/second KT state is controlled, as shown in FIG. 10-58(F), a character display such as “Small hits RUSH medium!” is displayed, and the number of prize balls display 052IW008 continues. Will be displayed.

Next, in the high probability/second KT state, a small hit occurs and a game ball is won into the special winning opening, but if the execution of the small hit winning suggestive effect is not decided, then FIG. As shown in (F), the winning display 052IW012 (in this example, a normal display color (white in this example))
The character display of "+10") is displayed, and the winning sound of the normal sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R (see steps 052IWS325 and S326).

Next, during the high probability/second KT state, a small hit occurs and a special game ball is awarded to the special winning opening. Based on the fact that the game ball is winning to the special winning opening, the small hit winning suggestion is directed. It has been decided to execute. In this case, as shown in FIG. 10-58(G), the prize display 052IW013 (in this example, the character display of “+10”) corresponding to the determined type of the small hit winning suggestion effect is displayed and the speaker is displayed. From 8L and 8R, the winning sound corresponding to the determined small hit winning suggestion effect type is output (see steps 052IWS323 and S324).
For example, when the small hit winning suggestion effect A is executed, the winning display of the sound A is output from the speakers 8L and 8R while the winning display is displayed in the image display device 5 in the blue display color.

Next, it is assumed that the number of prize balls has reached 2666 during the high-probability/second KT state, and the execution of the prize ball number display suggestive effect F has been decided based on the number of prize balls reaching 2666. In this case, as shown in FIG.
The character display 052IW014, etc. is displayed, and the award ball number display suggestive effect F is executed (see step 052IWS360).

In addition, in this example, the case where the prize sphere number display suggesting effect F is executed is shown.
A character display such as "OVER" is displayed, and the prize ball number indication suggestion effect D is executed. Further, for example, when the execution of the prize sphere number display suggestive effect E is decided, “25” is displayed on the image display device 5.
A character display such as “55 OVER” is displayed, and the prize ball number display suggestive effect E is executed.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 10-57 and 10-58, although illustration is omitted, for example, the execution of the prize sphere emphasis effect A is determined based on the number of prize spheres reaching 1000. In this case, the character display such as “1000 OVER” is displayed on the image display device 5, and the prize ball number emphasizing effect A is executed. Further, for example, when the execution of the prize sphere emphasis effect B is determined based on the number of prize spheres reaching 2000, in the image display device 5, “
A character display such as "2000 OVER" is displayed, and the prize ball number emphasizing effect B is executed. Further, for example, when the execution of the prize sphere emphasis effect C is decided based on the number of prize spheres reaching 3000, a character display such as “3000 OVER” is displayed on the image display device 5. , The prize ball number emphasis effect C is executed. Further, for example, when the execution of the prize sphere emphasis effect D is decided based on the number of prize spheres reaching 4000, a character display such as “4000 OVER” is displayed on the image display device 5. , The prize ball number emphasis effect D is executed. Further, for example, when the execution of the prize ball number enhancing effect E is determined based on the number of prize balls reaching 5000, a character display such as “5000 OVER” is displayed on the image display device 5. , The prize ball number emphasizing effect E is executed.

In this example, the number of prize balls is 456, 555, 666, 2456, 2555,
Or, in accordance with reaching 2666 pieces (in other words, the total of the game value given by the big hit game and the high probability/small hit in the second KT state), the award ball number display suggestion effect A to a different selection ratio. Although the case where F is executed is shown, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example,
Depending on the number of small hits that occurred during the high probability/second KT state and the number of times of variable display executed during the high probability/second KT state, the prize ball number display suggestive effects A to F are executed at different selection ratios. However, various modes are conceivable.

Next, while the variable display of one special symbol is being executed, the control of the variable display when a small hit occurs in the variable display of the other special symbol will be described. FIG. 10-59 is an explanatory view for explaining the control of the variable display when a small hit occurs in the variable display of the other special symbol while the variable display of the one special symbol is being executed.

During the variable display of the first special symbol to be a big hit, when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol, the variable display of the first special symbol is a sure change big hit (in this example, 10R
In the case of a big hit variation that is a sure change big hit or 6R probability change big hit, see Fig. 10-59 (
As shown in A), the variable display of the first special symbol is continued even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed. Specifically, during the small hit game, the update of the first variable time timer is interrupted and the variable display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small hit game is finished, the value of the accessory control process flag is again updated to a value corresponding to the accessory control normal process (step S120), and the update of the first variation time timer is restarted (step 052IWS1120A, (See Y in step 052IWS1128A).

On the other hand, if the variation display of the first special symbol is a big hit variation that is a normal big hit (6R normal big hit in this example), as shown in FIG. 10-59(B), the small hit symbol is a stop display. When it is done, the variable display of the first special symbol is also forcibly stopped and displayed in the off symbol (step 0).
52IWS1128A N, see step 052IWS1129A).

In addition, when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol during the variable display of the first special symbol that is out of sync or the small hit, as shown in FIG. 10-59(C), Even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the first special symbol is continued. Specifically, during the small hit game, the update of the first variable time timer is interrupted and the variable display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small hit game is finished, the value of the accessory control process flag is again updated to a value corresponding to the accessory control normal process (step S120), and the update of the first variation time timer is restarted (step 052IWS1120A, Step 052 IWS1127A N).

During the variable display of the second special symbol to be a big hit, when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol, the variable display of the second special symbol is a sure change big hit (in this example, 10R
In the case of a big hit variation that is a sure variation big hit, a 6R certainty variation big hit, or a 2R certainty variation big hit, as shown in FIG. The display continues. Specifically, during the small hit game, the update of the second variable time timer is interrupted and the variable display of the second special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small hit game is finished, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated again to a value corresponding to the accessory control normal processing (step S120), and the update of the second variable time timer is restarted (step 052IWS1).
120B, see Y in step 052IWS1128B).

On the other hand, when the variable display of the second special symbol is a big hit variation that is a normal big hit (2R normal big hit in this example), as shown in FIG. 10-59(E), the small hit symbol is a stop display. When it is done, the variable display of the second special symbol is also forcibly stopped and displayed in the off symbol (step 0).
52IWS1128B N, see step 052IWS1129B).

When the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol during the variable display of the second special symbol, which is a deviation or a small hit, as shown in FIG. 10-59(F), Even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the second special symbol is continued. Specifically, during the small hit game, the update of the second variable time timer is interrupted and the variable display of the second special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small hit game is finished, the value of the accessory control process flag is again updated to a value corresponding to the accessory control normal processing (step S120), and the update of the second variable time timer is restarted (step 052IWS1120B, (See N in step 052IWS1127B).

The control method in the case of a small hit in the variable display of the other special symbol during the execution of the variable display of the one special symbol is not limited to the aspect shown in this example. Hereinafter, a modified example of the control method when a small hit occurs in the variable display of the other special symbol while the variable display of the one special symbol is being executed will be described.

(Modification 1)
FIG. 10-60 is a flowchart showing a first special symbol variation process (step S112A) in the first modification. In FIG. 10-60, steps 052IWS1120A to S are executed.
The processing of 1127A is similar to those shown in FIG. 10-19, but in the first modification, the determination processing of step 052IWS1128A shown in FIG. 10-19 does not exist.

In the modified example 1, if the variable display of the first special symbol being executed is a big hit, the CPU
103 shifts to the processing of step S1129A as it is, and performs control to transmit the first compulsory symbol determination designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS1129A).
.. 10-60, the processing of step 052IWS1130A is performed as shown in FIG.
The processing is the same as that shown in FIG.

FIG. 10-61 is a flowchart showing a second special symbol variation process in the first modification. 10-61, the processes of steps 052IWS1120B to S1127B are similar to those shown in FIG. 10-22, but in the first modification, the determination process of step 052IWS1128B shown in FIG. 10-22 does not exist. ..

In the first modification, if the variable display of the second special symbol being executed is a big hit, the CPU
103 shifts to the processing of step S1129B as it is, and performs control to transmit the second compulsory symbol determination designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS1129B).
.. Note that in FIG. 10-61, the process of step 052IWS1130B is performed as shown in FIG.
It is similar to the process shown in 2.

FIG. 10-62 is an explanatory diagram for explaining control of variable display when a small hit occurs in variable display of the other special symbol during execution of variable display of one special symbol in the first modification.

During the variable display of the first special symbol that is a big hit, if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol, is the variable display of the first special symbol a big change of a big hit? Regardless of whether it is a big hit variation that is usually a big hit, as shown in FIG. 10-62(A), when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the variation display of the first special symbol is also forced to be a deviating symbol. Stop display (N in step 052IWS1127A, step 052IWS112)
9A).

On the other hand, during the variable display of the first special symbol that is out of place or a small hit, when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol, as shown in FIG. 10-62(B), Even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the first special symbol is continued. Specifically, during the small hit game, the update of the first variable time timer is interrupted and the variable display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small hit game is finished, the value of the accessory control process flag is again updated to a value corresponding to the accessory control normal process (step S120), and the update of the first variation time timer is restarted (step 052IWS1120A, Step 052 IWS1127A N).

During the variable display of the second special symbol that is a big hit, if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol, is the variable display of the second special symbol a big change that is a sure change big hit? Regardless of whether it is a big hit variation that is usually a big hit, as shown in FIG. 10-62(C), when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the variation display of the second special symbol is also forced to be a deviating symbol. Stop display (N in step 052IWS1127B, step 052IWS112)
9B).

On the other hand, when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol during the variable display of the second special symbol that is out of alignment or the small hit, as shown in FIG. 10-62(D), Even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the second special symbol is continued. Specifically, during the small hit game, the update of the second variable time timer is interrupted and the variable display of the second special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small hit game is finished, the value of the accessory control process flag is again updated to a value corresponding to the accessory control normal processing (step S120), and the update of the second variable time timer is restarted (step 052IWS1120B, (See N in step 052IWS1127B).

(Modification 2)
FIG. 10-63 is a flowchart showing a first special symbol variation process (step S112A) in the second modification. 10-63, in steps 052IWS1120A-S.
The processing of 1126A is similar to those shown in FIG. 10-19, but in the second modification, the processing of step 052IWS1127C is included instead of the determination processing of steps 052IWS1127A and S1128A shown in FIG. 10-19. ..

In Modification 2, if the variable display of the first special symbol that is being executed is a big hit, the process is ended as it is. On the other hand, if the variable display of the first special symbol that is being executed is not a big hit, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the first compulsory symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS1129A). Note that in FIG. 10-63, the process of step 052IWS1130A is the same as the process shown in FIG. 10-19.

FIG. 10-64 is a flowchart showing a second special symbol variation process in Modification 2. 10-64, the processes of steps 052IWS1120B to S1126B are similar to those shown in FIG. 10-22, but in the second modification, the determination process of steps 052IWS1127B and S1128B shown in FIG. 10-22 is performed. Instead, step 052I
Including the processing of WS1127D.

In the second modification, if the variable display of the second special symbol that is being executed is a big hit, the process ends. On the other hand, if the variable display of the second special symbol that is being executed is not a big hit, the CPU 103 controls to send the second compulsory symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS1129B). 10-64, the process of step 052IWS1130B is the same as the process shown in FIG. 10-22.

FIG. 10-65 is an explanatory view for explaining control of variable display when a small hit occurs in variable display of the other special symbol during execution of variable display of one special symbol in the modified example 2.

During the variable display of the first special symbol that is a big hit, if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol, is the variable display of the first special symbol a big change of a big hit? Regardless of whether it is a big hit variation that is usually a big hit, as shown in FIG. 10-65(A), the variation display of the first special symbol is continued even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed. In particular,
During the small hit game, the update of the first variable time timer is interrupted and the variable display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small hit game is finished, the value of the accessory control process flag is again updated to a value corresponding to the accessory control normal process (step S120), and the update of the first variation time timer is restarted (step 052IWS1120A, Step 052IWS1
(See Y at 127C).

On the other hand, during the variable display of the first special symbol that is out and small hit, when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol, as shown in FIG. 10-65(B), When the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the first special symbol is also forcibly stopped and displayed with the deviating symbol (step 052IWS1127C, N, see step 052IWS1129A).
..

During the variable display of the second special symbol that is a big hit, if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol, is the variable display of the second special symbol a big change that is a sure change big hit? Regardless of whether it is a big hit variation which is usually a big hit, as shown in FIG. 10-65(C), the variation display of the second special symbol is continued even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed. In particular,
During the small hit game, the update of the second variable time timer is interrupted and the variable display of the second special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small hit game is finished, the value of the accessory control process flag is again updated to a value corresponding to the accessory control normal process (step S120), and the update of the second variable time timer is restarted (step 052IWS1120B, Step 052IWS1
127D, Y).

On the other hand, when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol during the variable display of the second special symbol that is out of alignment or the small hit, as shown in FIG. 10-65(D), When the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the second special symbol is also forcibly stopped and displayed with the deviating symbol (step 052IWS1127D, N, see step 052IWS1129B).
..

Further, as a control method in the case where a small hit occurs in the variable display of the other special symbol while the variable display of one special symbol is being executed, other than those shown in the modified examples 1 and 2, for example, When the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol during the variable display of the first special symbol, which is forced to stop, while the variable display of the first special symbol which is the small hit is displayed. When the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol, the variation may be continued.

Further, for example, when the small hit pattern is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol during the variable display of the first special symbol which is the 10R certainty variation big hit, the forced stop is stopped while the 2R certainty variation big hit is given. When the small hitting symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol during the variable display of the 1 special symbol, the variation may be continued.

Further, for example, during the normal state (low probability / low base state), when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol, the variable display of the second special symbol that is being executed is deviated and changed, Either the small hit variation or the big hit variation may be configured to be forcedly stopped. With such a configuration, in this example, the transition to the low-probability/low-base state is made when the variable display is completed 50 times in the low-probability/high-base state (see FIG. 10-29), 5
When the variable display of 0 times is completed and the state is changed to the low probability/low base state, the second pending storage is 1 to 4
When a large number of second holding storages are accumulated, which are large hits, it is possible to prevent a big hit at an unintended timing by forcibly disengaging and stopping. Further, particularly in the gaming machine configured to be controllable in the KT state as in this example, the normal state (low probability/
By performing a right-handed operation in the low base state), while making the start winning in the second starting winning opening which is easy to start winning and performing the variable display of the second special symbol, making the starting winning in the first starting winning opening It is also effective as a preventive measure against such a strategy because it is possible to use a strategy to display variable display of 1 special symbol.

As described above, various modes are conceivable as a control method when a small hit occurs in the variable display of the other special symbol while the variable display of the one special symbol is being executed.

(Modification 3)
Further, in the characteristic portion 052IW, in the case of performing the variable display of the first special symbol and the case of performing the variable display of the second special symbol, by the same control, the control to stop and display the deviating symbol is performed. Although the case (see FIG. 10-59) is shown, different control may be used. Figure 10-
66 is a flowchart showing a second special symbol variation process in the third modification. In the modified example 3, the first special symbol variation process is the same as the process shown in FIG. 10-19. 10-66, the processing of steps 052IWS1120B to S1125B is performed by referring to FIG.
These are the same as those shown in -22, but in Modification 3, the determination processing of steps 052IWS1126B to S1128B shown in FIG. 10-22 does not exist. Therefore, modification 3
Then, if the big hit symbol is not derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A (step 0)
52IWS1125B N), the CPU 103 ends the process as it is.

FIG. 10-67 is an explanatory view for explaining control of variable display when a small hit occurs in variable display of the other special symbol during execution of variable display of one special symbol in Modification 3.

As shown in FIGS. 10-67 (A) and (C), in the third modification, the small hit in the variable display of the second special symbol during the variable display of the first special symbol that becomes the deviance, the small hit, and the probability variation big hit. When the symbols are stopped and displayed, similarly to FIGS. 10-59 (A) and (C), the variable display of the first special symbol is continued even if the small hit symbols are stopped and displayed. In addition, as shown in FIGS. 10-67 (D) and (F), the small hit symbol stops in the variable display of the first special symbol during the variable display of the second special symbol that is a deviation, a small hit, and a probability variation big hit. When it is displayed, it is shown in FIGS. 10-59 (D) and (F).
Similarly, the variable display of the second special symbol is continued even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-67(B), in Modification 3, when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol during the variable display of the first special symbol which is usually the big hit, Similarly to FIG. 10-59(B), when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the first special symbol is also forcibly stopped and displayed as a falling symbol.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-67(E), in Modification 3, when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol during the variable display of the second special symbol which is usually the big hit, In contrast to FIG. 10-59(E), the variable display of the second special symbol is continued even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed.

As shown in FIG. 10-67, in Modification 3, the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. The control to stop and display is different.

In the modified example 3, when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol during the execution of the variable display of the first special symbol which is usually the big hit, the normal big hit is stopped. While the variable display of the first special symbol is displayed during execution of the variable display of the second special symbol, the case where the variable display is continued is shown when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, but it is limited to such an aspect. Absent. For example, on the contrary, when the small hit pattern is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol while the variable display of the first special symbol that is usually a big hit is being executed, the variable display is continued, while the normal big hit is When the small hitting symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol during execution of the variable display of the second special symbol, it may be configured to be forcedly stopped. Further, for example, (regardless of whether it is a probable variation big hit or normal big hit) If the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol while the variable display of the first special symbol which is a big hit is being executed, it is forcibly removed. While stopping, (regardless of whether it is a probable big hit or a normal big hit) It changes if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol while the variable display of the second special symbol that is a big hit is being executed. The display may be continued. In such a manner, the control for forced disengagement stop may be different between when performing the variable display of the first special symbol and when performing the variable display of the second special symbol.

(Modification 4)
FIG. 10-68 is a flowchart showing a first special symbol variation process (step S112A) in Modification 4. In Fig. 10-68, steps 052IWS1120A to S are executed.
The processing of 1128A is similar to those processing shown in FIGS.

In Modification 4, in step 052IWS1128A, neither the 10R certainty variation big hit nor the 6R certainty variation big hit (that is, the 6R normal big jackpot) is displayed. When the variation display of the first special symbol is being executed, the CPU 103 sets the probability variation flag to It is confirmed whether or not it is set (step 052IWS1131A). If the probability variation flag is not set (that is, if it is not the probability variation state), the processing is ended as it is. If the probability variation flag is set (that is, if the probability variation state), the CPU 103 performs control to transmit the first compulsory symbol determination designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS1129A). Note that the processing of step 052IWS1130A is the same as the processing shown in FIG.

In Modification 4, by executing the determination process of step 052IWS1131A, during the variable display of the first special symbol which is usually a big hit, when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol, The variable display of the first special symbol is not forcibly stopped and displayed in the deviating symbol, but the variable display of the first special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed in the deviating symbol when the probability change state is in progress. On the other hand, even during the variation display of the first special symbol which is usually a big hit, the variation display of the second special symbol is continued even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed unless the probability variation state.

FIG. 10-69 is a flowchart showing a second special symbol variation process in Modification 4. 10-69, the processes of steps 052IWS1120B to S1128B are similar to those shown in FIG. 10-22.

In Modification 4, in step 052IWS1128B, neither the 10R probability variation big hit, the 6R probability variation big hit, nor the 2R probability variation big hit (that is, the 2R normal variation big hit) is first
When the variable display of the special symbol is being executed, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the probability variation flag is set (step 052IWS1131B). If the probability variation flag is not set (that is, if it is not the probability variation state), the processing is ended as it is. If the probability variation flag is set (that is, if the probability variation state), the CPU 103 causes the effect control C.
Control to send the second compulsory symbol confirmation designation command to the PU 120 (step 052IW
S1129B). The process of step 052IWS1130B is the same as the process shown in FIG.

In Modification 4, by executing the determination process of step 052IWS1131B, when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol during the variable display of the second special symbol which is usually a big hit, The variable display of the second special symbol is not forced to be stopped and displayed as a detached symbol, but the variable display of the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed as a detached symbol when the probability change state is in progress. On the other hand, even during the variation display of the second special symbol that is usually a big hit, the variation display of the first special symbol is continued even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed unless it is in the probability changing state.

In Modification 4, whether or not the probability variation flag is set (whether or not the probability variation state is set)
Although the case has been described in which the control for forcibly stopping and displaying the symbol is performed, the invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, it may be configured to perform control to forcibly stop and display a symbol depending on whether or not the special drawing time saving flag is set. Also, for example, high probability/
Only in the low base state (the high probability flag is on, the high base flag is off), the control for forcibly stopping and displaying the symbol may be performed. Like that, in some form,
It may be configured so as to perform control to forcibly stop and display the symbols according to the current game state.

In addition, as described above, when configured to perform control to forcibly stop and display with a symbol only in the high probability/low base state, it is possible to prevent a big jackpot from being normally displayed on the variable display of one identification information, It is possible to prevent the second KT state (small hit RUSH) from being interrupted.

As described above, according to the characteristic part 052IW, it is possible to set any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values “1” to “6”) having different advantages for the player. is there. In addition, it is possible to control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit game state), and it is possible to control to a special state (for example, a small hit game state) that is a state different from the advantageous state. It is possible to control to a special state (for example, KT state) where value is easily added. Then, in response to the game medium (for example, the game ball) passing through the specific region (for example, the special winning opening), the setting suggestive effect (for example, the small hit winning suggestion effect) can be executed.
Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion production.

Specifically, in the present example, the suggestion effect at the time of winning the small hit can be executed based on the fact that the game ball has won the special winning opening during the high probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH). However, during the small hit RUSH, the frequency of winning the special winning opening is particularly high, so it is possible to focus on the setting suggestive effect (in this example, the suggestive effect at the time of winning the small hit) and improve the interest of the setting suggestive effect. be able to.

In this example, the case where the setting suggestion effect (in this example, the small hit prize suggestion effect) is executed based on the fact that the game ball has won the special winning opening as the specific area is shown. I can't stop. For example, even if it is configured to be able to execute the setting suggestion effect based on the winning of the game ball to the start winning hole (the winning ball device 6A, the variable winning ball device 6B), the general winning hole 10 and the special winning hole as the specific area. Good. Further, the setting suggestion effect may be configured to be executable based on the entry of the game ball into the outlet as the specific area. Further, for example, the passage gate 4 is used as the specific area.
The setting suggestion effect may be configured to be executable on the basis of the game ball passing through the gates such as 1.

Further, according to the characteristic part 052IW, it is possible to set any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values “1” to “6”) having different degrees of advantage for the player. In addition, it is possible to control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit game state), and it is possible to control to a special state (for example, a small hit game state) that is a state different from the advantageous state. It is possible to control to a special state (for example, KT state) where value is easily added. Further, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect (for example, a prize sphere number indication suggestion effect), and the easiness of execution of the setting suggestion effect differs depending on the length of the period in which the special state is controlled (for example, FIG. 10-43). As shown in, when the number of prize balls reaches 456, it is possible to execute the award ball number indicating suggestion effect A with a probability of 3%, and when the number of prize balls reaches 555, there is a probability of 2%. The number display suggesting effect B can be executed, the prize ball number indicating suggestion effect C can be executed with a probability of 1% when the number of prize balls reaches 666, and 5 when the number of prize balls reaches 2456. Probability of the number of prize balls displayed with a probability of% D
When the number of prize balls reaches 2555, there is a 3% chance of executing the prize ball indication suggestion effect E, and when the number of prize balls reaches 2666, there is a 2% probability of winning. It is possible to execute the ball number display suggestive effect F). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion production.

In this example, the number of prize balls is 456 as the “length of the period controlled in the special state”,
It shows a case where the prize ball number display suggesting effect is executed at the timing when it reaches 555 pieces, 666 pieces, 2456 pieces, 2555 pieces and 2666 pieces (in other words, a period until a certain specific game value is given). However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, "the length of the period controlled to the special state" is the length of the period controlled to the advantageous state (in this example, the jackpot gaming state),
It may be the length of the period controlled to the special state (in this example, the small hitting game state), or the length of the total period of these.

In addition, when the length of the period controlled to an advantageous state (for example, the jackpot gaming state) is used as the “length of the period controlled to the special state”, the length of the period from the fanfare of the jackpot game to the ending is used. Alternatively, the length of the period of only the round game during the big hit game may be used. In this case, for example, as the big hit with a longer period from the fanfare of the big hit game to the ending, the prize ball number display suggesting effect may be executed at a higher rate.
Further, for example, in the case of a big hit with a small number of rounds during the big hit game, the prize ball number display suggesting effect may be executed at a higher rate than a big hit with a large number of rounds.

In addition, for example, as the “length of the period controlled to the special state”, the number of small hits that occur during the high probability/second KT state or the number of times of the variable display executed during the high probability/second KT state is executed. Accordingly, the award ball number display suggesting effect may be configured to be executed. In this case, for example, the prize ball number display suggesting effect may be executed at a higher rate as the number of small hits is higher, or the prize ball number displaying suggestion effect may be executed at a higher rate as the number of times of execution of the variable display is increased. .. Further, for example, the award ball number indicating suggestion effect may be executed at a high rate at the timing when the high probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH) ends, and various values may be set as the “length of the period controlled to the special state”. Various modes are possible.

Generally, in game machines, when the number of prize balls reaches a certain number, “XXXXX Over”
When displaying such as, "1000 OVER" and "
It is displayed in units with a certain limit, such as in units of 1000 prize balls such as "2000 OVER". On the other hand, the prize ball number indication suggestion effect shown in this example is a timing different from the normal timing of the number of prize balls reaching 456, 555, 666, 2456, 2555 and 2666. Since it is executed in, it is possible to expect a high setting while giving a sense of incongruity to the generation timing of the award ball number indication suggestive effect, and it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

Further, according to the characteristic portion 052IW, when the specific display result (for example, the big hit symbol) is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, it is possible to control to the advantageous state (for example, the big hit game state). Further, when a special display result (for example, a small hitting pattern) different from the specific display result is displayed as a variable display result, it is possible to control to a special state (for example, a small hitting game state). Further, the display result of the variable display is determined by using the determination value for determining the display result of the variable display (for example, the determination value for the big hit determination, the determination value for the small hit determination). The judgment value includes a specific judgment value (for example, a judgment value for jackpot judgment) for deciding to display the specific display result as the display result of the variable display, and a special display result as the display result of the variable display. And a special judgment value (for example, a judgment value for a small hit judgment) for deciding to derive and display. In addition, a plurality of setting values with different numbers of specific determination values (for example, setting values “1” to “6
)). Further, the number of special determination values is common regardless of the set value (see FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4). Therefore, it is possible to realize appropriate game playability.

Further, according to the characteristic portion 052IW, setting suggestive effect can be executed in response to the control to the special state (for example, a small hit occurs during the high probability/second KT state and a game ball is won in the special winning opening). Based on that, it is possible to execute the suggestion effect when winning the small hit and the suggestion effect for displaying the number of prize balls). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion effect in association with the control to the special state.

In this example, the case where the setting suggestion effect (in this example, the suggestion effect at the time of winning the small hit, the indication suggestion of the number of prize balls) is executed based on the fact that the game ball has won the special winning opening, is shown. However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, while the small hit is changing, or when the special variable winning ball device 17 is controlled to the open state, the setting suggestion effect may be executed at the start of the small hit game. Further, for example, the setting suggestion effect may be executed by changing the small hit notification mode when a small hit occurs. In this way, any form may be used as long as the setting suggestion effect is executed in response to the control for the small hit.

In addition, according to this characteristic section 052IW, when being controlled in the advantageous state and in the special state, the variable means (for example, the special variable winning ball device 7, the special variable winning ball device 17) is played. It is possible to control the medium (for example, a game ball) into an easy-to-enter state (for example, open state) where it is easy to enter and an inaccessible state where it is difficult or impossible to enter (for example, closed state). Further, the setting suggestion effect can be executed in response to the variable means being controlled to be in the easy entry state (for example, the special variable winning ball device 7 and the special variable winning ball device 17 are in the open state and are large. Based on the occurrence of winning game balls to the winning opening and special winning opening, it is possible to execute suggestion production at the time of winning the small hit and display suggestion of the number of prize balls). Therefore, the interest of the setting suggestion effect can be improved in association with the control of the variable means.

In this example, in the case of executing the setting suggestion effect (in this example, the suggestion effect at the time of winning the small hit, the indication suggestion of the number of prize balls) based on the fact that the game ball has won the big prize hole or the special prize hole. However, it is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, when executing the opening effect when the special variable winning ball device 7 or the special variable winning ball device 17 is controlled to be in the open state, the setting suggestion effect is executed by changing the effect mode of the opening effect. It may be configured as follows. In this way, the setting suggesting effect may be executed in any form in response to the variable means being controlled to the easy entry state.

In addition, according to this feature section 052IW, when the control of the game state is switched (for example, at the start or end of the big hit game, from the low probability/first KT state to the normal state (low probability/low base state)
Setting suggestion effect can be executed (for example, step 052IWS6).
At 24, the display mode (for example, display color) of right-handed display is changed). Therefore, the interest of the setting suggestion effect can be improved in association with the switching of the control of the game state.

In this example, as "when the control of the game state is switched", when the big hit game starts or ends, when the low probability/first KT state shifts to the normal state (low probability/low base state), it is set Although the case where the suggestive effect is configured to be executable is shown, the invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, during the high probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH) during the big hit game transition, or from the big hit game to the high base state (high probability/first KT state or low probability/first KT state) The setting suggestion effect may be configured to be executable during the effect period. Further, for example, a gaming machine configured to perform a variable display a predetermined number of times during a high base state or to shift to a high probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH) based on occurrence of a predetermined number of small hits. In, in the production period when transitioning from the high base state to the high probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH), the setting suggestion production may be configured to be executable, and various settings may be made as “when the control of the game state is switched”. Various modes are possible.

Further, in this example, the case where the setting suggestion effect is executed by changing the display form of the right-handed display and the left-handed display is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a form. For example, the setting suggestion effect may be executed by changing the effect mode of the fanfare effect at the start of the big hit or the ending effect at the end of the big hit, and various modes are possible.

Further, according to the characteristic part 052IW, according to the number of times of control to the special state during the special state, the total game value given by the special state during the special state, or the number of executions of the variable display during the special state, The setting suggestion effect can be executed with different selection ratios (for example, the number of prize balls is 456, 555, 666, 2456, 2555, or 2666).
Depending on the number of individual balls reached, the prize ball number indication suggestive effects A to F are executed at different selection rates. Alternatively, for example, depending on the number of small hits that occur during the high probability/second KT state or the number of times that the variable display is executed during the high probability/second KT state, a prize ball number display suggesting effect A with different selection ratios is obtained. ~
It may be configured to execute F. ). Therefore, the interest of the setting suggestion effect can be improved in association with the number of times of control to the special state, the total game value, or the number of times of variable display execution.

In addition, according to the characteristic part 052IW, as the special state, an advantageous special state (for example, the second K
It is possible to control a T state) and a disadvantageous special state (for example, the first KT state) which is disadvantageous to the player as compared with the advantageous special state. Further, it is possible to execute the setting suggestion effect with different selection ratios when the game medium passes through the specific area during the advantageous special state and when the game medium passes through the specific area during the disadvantageous special state (for example, Only when the game ball is a small hit in the second KT state and a special winning hole is won in the special winning opening, the suggestion effect at the time of winning the small hit and the suggestion effect for displaying the number of prize balls can be executed). Therefore, the interest of the setting suggestion effect can be improved in association with the type of special state.

In this example, only when the game ball is won in the special winning opening during the second KT state, the small hit winning suggestion effect and the prize ball number indication suggesting effect are configured to be executable. It is not limited to various forms. For example, even when a game ball is won in the special winning opening during the first KT state, it is configured to be able to execute the small hit winning suggestion effect and the prize ball number indication suggesting effect, and the special winning opening during the second KT state. Depending on whether it is a prize or a game ball is won in the special winning opening during the first KT state, it is possible to execute the small hit winning suggestion effect and the prize ball number indication suggesting effect at different ratios. You may comprise. In addition, for example, even when an irregular game ball is won in the special winning opening during the non-KT state, the small hit winning suggestion effect and the prize ball number display suggesting effect may be executed. ..

In the case of the above configuration, when a special winning opening or irregular winning occurs in the first KT state (high base state), or when a special winning opening occurs in the second KT state Compared with the above, it may be configured to execute the small hitting prize suggestion effect and the prize ball count indication suggestion effect at a higher rate, or the small hit prize suggestion effect and the prize ball number indication suggestion effect at a lower rate. It may be configured to execute.

In addition, in this characteristic part 052IW, the value of the prize ball number counter and the prize ball number display during the big hit game based on the 10R sure change big hit, the 6R sure change big hit, and the 6R normal big hit and the high probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH) Is updated, and the value of the prize ball number counter is not updated during the big hit game based on the 2R probability change hit and the 2R normal big hit and during the high base state (high probability/first KT state, low probability/first KT state) (however, In addition to not resetting the prize ball counter), as a general rule, the prize ball count display is hidden, and the variable display is terminated 50 times in the low probability/first KT state and the normal state (low probability/low base state) is reached. Although the case where the value of the prize ball number counter is controlled to be reset at the time of the shift has been shown, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. The value of the prize ball number counter may be updated even during a big hit game based on the 2R probability varying big hit or the 2R normal big hit.

In addition, in the present example, because of the configuration as described above, for example, high probability/second K
After finishing the T state (small hit RUSH) and shifting to the high base state (high probability/first KT state, low probability/first KT state), a 10R certainty jackpot or a 2R certainty jackpot occurs during the high base state. When the high probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH) is entered again, the value of the prize ball counter is updated and the prize ball number display is displayed while the prize balls in the previous small hit RUSH are inherited. can do.

In addition, not only in the mode of displaying the number of prize balls as shown in this example, for example, when the probability of 10R probability big hit is changed to the high probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH), the high probability/second KT state. The (small hit RUSH) state and the big hit game immediately before that may be set as one section, and the number of prize balls in the section may be totaled to display the total value. Further, for example, the setting suggestion effect suggesting the current setting value may be executed by changing the display mode (display color in this example) of the totalized value.

Further, in the characteristic part 052IW, the current setting value is set to “1” as “setting suggestion effect”.
The case has been shown in which the small hitting winning suggestion effect and the award ball number indication suggesting effect are executed in a mode that suggests any one of "" to "6", but the invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, instead of suggesting the current setting value, setting suggestion production may be executed in a mode that suggests whether or not a setting change that changes the setting value when the power is turned on to the gaming machine is suggested. Good. As such, the “setting suggestion effect” may be something that makes a suggestion regarding the setting in some form.

Further, according to the characteristic portion 052IW, the variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and the variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) can be executed in parallel. , It is possible to control to an advantageous state (eg, big hit game state) advantageous to the player when a specific display result (eg, big hit pattern) is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, and is special as a display result of the variable display. It is possible to control to a special state (for example, a small hitting game state) different from the advantageous state when the display result (for example, a small hitting symbol) is derived and displayed. Further, the specific display result includes a first specific display result (for example, a probability variation big hit symbol) and a second specific display result (for example, a normal big hit symbol), and the one in which the first specific display result is derived and displayed is It is more advantageous for the player than the second specific display result is derived and displayed (for example, the probability change state is controlled after the big hit game is finished). Further, while the variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information, which is the variable display corresponding to the first specific display result, is being performed, the special display result is displayed in the variable display of the other identification information. Based on the derived display, the display result of the variable display of the one identification information is not derived and displayed (for example, the update of the first variable time timer or the second variable time timer is interrupted, and the first special symbol or 2 The variable display of special symbols is continuously executed)
.. In addition, during the variable display of the identification information of one of the first identification information and the second identification information and the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result, the special display result is displayed in the variable display of the other identification information. Based on the derivation display, the variable display of the one identification information is derived and displayed with a predetermined display result (for example, deviating symbol) (for example, the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is deviating symbol). It will be forced to stop). Therefore, control that considers the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display can be realized.

Specifically, when the normal big hit (non-probable strange big hit) is displayed in the variable display corresponding to the remaining suspension of one of the identification information, even though the second KT state (small hit RUSH) or the positive change state is entered, The second KT state (small hit RUSH) or the probability variation state will end immediately, and there is a risk that the interest in the game will decrease. On the other hand, if the variation display corresponding to the remaining suspension of the identification information on one side is forcibly and uniformly discontinued and the symbol is stopped and displayed (forcibly disengaged), even if the variation display is a certainty big hit, it will be disengaged. As a result, the game value given to the player in the advantageous state (big hit game state) is reduced, which is not preferable. Therefore, in the characteristic part 052IW, the variable display that is a normal big hit (non-probable variation big hit) is forcibly disengaged, while the variation display that is a certain big hit is extended by changing (interrupting the measurement of the fluctuation time). , It is possible to improve the interest in the game while suppressing a decrease in the game value given to the player.

In this example, as a mode that "variable display of one identification information is not stopped", the update of the first variation time timer or the second variation time timer is interrupted, and the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to such an aspect. For example,
The variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is interrupted (temporarily stopped), and the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol which have been interrupted after the small hitting game may be restarted. Good. It is only necessary that the variable display is not completely stopped in some form.

Further, according to the characteristic portion 052IW, it is possible to control to a special state (for example, the second KT state) in which a game value (for example, a prize ball) due to the special state is easily given. Therefore, by providing a situation in which a game value is likely to be imparted due to the special state, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

In addition, according to the characteristic portion 052IW, a state different from the advantageous state, that is, the non-specific state (
For example, it is possible to control to a specific state (for example, a high probability state (probability change state)) that is easily controlled to be an advantageous state compared to a low probability state). In addition, the first specific display result is derived and displayed, and is controlled to a specific state (for example, the probability variation state is controlled after the jackpot game based on the probability variation jackpot is controlled), and the second specific display result is derived and displayed. Based on the fact, it controls to a non-specific state (for example, it does not control to a probability changing state after the end of the big hit game based on the normal big hit). Therefore, it is possible to realize the control in consideration of whether the control is performed in the specific state.

In addition, according to the characteristic portion 052IW, a state different from the advantageous state, that is, the non-specific state (
For example, it is possible to control to a specific state (for example, a high probability state (probability change state)) that is easily controlled to be an advantageous state compared to a low probability state). In addition, when controlled to an advantageous state,
For example, it is possible to control to a specific state on the basis of a game medium (for example, a game ball) passing through the V area 052IW104). When the first specific display result is derived and displayed, the game medium passes through the specific region at a high rate when controlled in the advantageous state as compared with the case where the second specific display result is derived and displayed. (See FIGS. 10-11). Therefore, it is possible to realize control in consideration of whether or not the game medium easily passes through the specific area.

Further, according to the characteristic part 052IW, the special display result can be derived and displayed regardless of whether the first identification information is variably displayed or the second identification information is variably displayed ( 10-3 and 10-4). Further, based on the fact that the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the second identification information while the variable display of the first identification information is being performed corresponding to the second specific display result, the first identification information is derived. Variable display of information is derived and displayed by a predetermined display result (see FIG. 10-67(B)). Further, when the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the first identification information while the variable display of the second identification information is being performed corresponding to the second specific display result, the second identification information is displayed. The variable display of No. is not controlled to be derived and displayed as a predetermined display result (see FIG. 10-67(E)). Therefore, in addition to the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display, it is possible to realize the control in consideration of the variable display of the first identification information or the variable display of the second identification information.

In addition, according to the characteristic portion 052IW, a state different from the advantageous state, that is, the non-specific state (
For example, it is possible to control to a specific state (for example, a high probability state (probability change state)) that is easily controlled to be an advantageous state compared to a low probability state). Further, the variable display execution means is a variable display of the identification information of one of the first identification information and the second identification information and is a variable display corresponding to the second specific display result when being controlled to the specific state. During execution of, the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the other identification information, and the variable display of the one identification information is derived and displayed with the predetermined display result (FIGS. 10-68, 10-). 69). In addition, when the variable display of the identification information of one of the first identification information and the second identification information, which is the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result, is being performed when the non-specific state is controlled, When the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the other identification information, the control of deriving and displaying the variable display of the one identification information with the predetermined display result is not performed (see FIGS. 10-68 and 10-69). ). Therefore, in addition to the advantage degree of the display result of the variable display, it is possible to realize the control in consideration of whether or not the display state is controlled to the specific state.

Further, according to the present characteristic portion 052IW, the first identification information (eg, the first special symbol) based on the game medium (eg, the game ball) entering the first starting area (eg, the first starting winning opening). ) Variable display is possible, and based on the fact that the game medium has entered the second starting area (for example, the second starting winning opening), the variable display for the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) is executed. It is possible. Also, variable means (for example, special variable winning) that can be changed to a first state (for example, open state) in which the game medium can enter and a second state (for example, closed state) in which the game medium is difficult or inaccessible A ball device 17). In addition, after the variable display of either the first identification information or the second identification information is executed, an advantageous state advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot gaming state)
It is possible to control to one of a special state (for example, a small hitting game state) having a lower degree of advantage than the advantageous state, and when the special state is controlled, the variable means is controlled to the first state. Also,
The first starting area is provided so that a game medium that moves on a predetermined path (for example, the area on the left side of the game area) of the moving path on which the game medium can move can enter, and the variable means is a specific path of the moving path. A game medium that moves in the right area of the game area, for example, is provided so that it can enter. In addition, a specific notification (for example, FIG. 10-56 (1
), (2) right-handed notification) can be executed, and when the special state is controlled after the variable display of the first identification information is executed, the specific notification is not executed (for example, FIG. Three
)reference). Therefore, it is possible to appropriately notify the promotion of the launch of the game medium.

Specifically, as shown in the characteristic part 052IW, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel, and the small hit type of the first special symbol side It is configured so that the winning ratio (advantage) to the special winning opening is lower than the small hit type on the side of the second special symbol, and the second special when the small hit occurs in the variable display of the first special symbol. When the variable display of the symbols is configured to be forcedly stopped and stopped, if the right hit notification is executed for the small hit on the side of the first special symbol with a low winning rate (advantage), it is substantially It is not preferable because the player wastes the game ball in spite of almost no expectation of winning in the special winning opening, and rather gives a disadvantageous launch promotion notification. Therefore, in this example, while the right hitting notification is executed for the small hit on the second special symbol side, the right hitting notification is not executed for the small hit on the first special symbol side. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of disadvantages caused by the player's wasteful hitting, and it is possible to realize appropriate notification.

Further, according to the characteristic part 052IW, the first hold storage means (for example, the first hold storage buffer) capable of storing the information related to the variable display of the first identification information as the hold storage, and the variable display of the second identification information. And a second reserved storage means (for example, a second reserved storage buffer) capable of storing information regarding the reserved storage. Also, the display result of the variable display of the first identification information or the second
As a display result of the variable display of the identification information, when a specific display result (for example, a big hit symbol) is derived and displayed, it can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state), and a variable display of the first identification information is displayed. As a result or a display result of the variable display of the second identification information, a special display result (
For example, it is possible to control to a special state (for example, a small hitting game state) when the small hitting pattern) is derived and displayed. Further, it is possible to control to a special state (for example, KT state) in which the frequency of the variable display of the second identification information becoming the special display result is increased. Further, based on the fact that when the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed in parallel, the special display result is derived and displayed as the display result of one variable display, As a display result of the other variable display, a predetermined display result (for example, a deviating pattern) different from the specific display result and the special display result is derived and displayed. Therefore, the variable display can be forcibly ended, and the pending storage can be smoothly consumed.

In addition, according to the characteristic part 052IW, it is possible to give a predetermined value when controlled to a special state (for example, pay out 10 prize balls based on winning of a game ball into a special winning opening), It is possible to give a value higher than a predetermined value when controlled to an advantageous state (for example, pay out 15 prize balls based on winning of a game ball to the special winning opening). Further, as the specific notification, a first specific notification (for example, the right-handed indicator 26 and the right-handed notification LED 37 shown in FIGS. 10-56 (1) and (2) are lit) and more visible than the first specific notification It is possible to execute the second specific notification having high property (for example, the right-handed display 052IW007 shown in FIG. 10-56(1)). Further, when the control is performed in the advantageous state, the first specific notification and the second specific notification are executed (
10-56(1)), when the special display is controlled after the variable display of the second identification information is executed, the first specific notification is executed, and the second specific notification is not executed (FIG. 10-56). (2)
reference). Therefore, it is possible to realize the notification corresponding to the value that can be given.

Further, according to the characteristic part 052IW, it is possible to control a plurality of types of special states (for example, small hits A to C). In addition, when the variable state of the first identification information is executed and then the special state is controlled, it is more advantageous than when the variable state of the second identification information is executed and then the special state is controlled. Control is performed in a special type of low degree (for example, small hit A). When the special state is controlled after the variable display of the second identification information is performed, the specific notification is performed (see (2) and (3) in Fig. 10-56). Therefore, it is possible to realize appropriate notification in consideration of the player's advantage.

Further, according to the characteristic part 052IW, it is possible to execute a variable display effect (for example, a variable display of the decorative pattern) corresponding to at least the variable display of the first identification information. Further, it is possible to execute a variable display effect in a common mode when the special state is controlled and when the special state is not controlled (
For example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and a small hit occurs, the non-reach miss symbol is forcibly displayed as a stop). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the recognizability to the player of being controlled to the special state after the variable display of the first identification information is executed. In addition, the reserved storage stored in the second reserved storage means can be smoothly consumed.

Further, according to the characteristic portion 052IW, the delay means for delaying the movement of the game medium on the upstream side of the variable means in the specific route (for example, the restriction piece provided in the variable winning ball device 6B).
Equipped with. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the target from being aimed at the timing at which the control to the special state is performed after the variable display of the second identification information is normally performed. Therefore, it is possible to strengthen countermeasures against the game machine.

The delay means is not limited to the mode shown in this example. For example, on the upstream side of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 provided on the right side of the game area, as a delay means, a passage member for moving the game ball to meander to the left and right is provided. You may.

Further, according to the characteristic part 052IW, the effect is produced based on the information from the game control means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103)) and the game control means for controlling the progress of the game. Production control means for controlling (for example, production control CPU 120)
) And. Further, the game control means controls the execution of the notification by the notification means (for example, the right-handed indicator 26) for performing a predetermined notification. In addition, the production control means executes a specific notification (for example, turning on the right-handed notification LED 37) in response to the notification by the notification means. Therefore, it is possible to realize appropriate notification while reducing the processing load of the effect control means.

In this example, regardless of whether the variable display of the first special symbol is executed or the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the right-handed notification is executed during the big hit game. Although the case is shown, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, a special variable winning ball device (left big winning opening) is provided on the left side of the game area, and a special variable winning ball device (right big winning opening) is also provided on the right side of the playing area. If the variable display of the symbol is a big hit, the left big winning opening is opened during the big hit game, and if the big display is a big display with the changing display of the second special symbol, the right big winning opening is opened during the big hit game. When applied to the gaming machine configured as described above, when the big hit in the variable display of the second special symbol, the right hitting notification is executed during the big hit game, while the variable display of the first special symbol is displayed. In the case of a big hit, the right hit notification may not be executed during the big hit game. Further, in the case of such a configuration, if the big hit in the variable display of the first special symbol, it may be configured to execute the left hitting notification during the big hit game. That is, the specific notification execution means may be configured to execute the specific notification when the variable means (in this example, the right special winning opening) is controlled to be in an advantageous state of a type in which the control target is set. With such a configuration, when a big hit occurs in the variable display of the first special symbol, the left hitting notification is executed during the big hitting game to prevent the player from mistakenly performing the right hitting operation. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the disadvantage of the player.

Further, in the present example, the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning port) is provided on the right side of the game area, so the case of executing the right hitting notification even during the KT state has been described. It is not limited to various forms. For example, when the second start winning port is applied to the gaming machine provided on the left side of the game area, the right-handed notification is not executed during the KT state, the high base state, or the time saving state. Good.

In addition, in the present example, the right-handing notification is executed by displaying the right-handing display 052IW007 on the display screen of the image display device 5 in addition to turning on the right-handing indicator 26 and the right-handling notification LED 37 only during the big hit game. However, the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, even in the second KT state (during small hit RUSH), in order to execute the first variable display after the end of the big hit game, in addition to turning on the right hit indicator 26 and the right hit notification LED 37 The right-handed notification may be executed by displaying a right-handed display 052IW007 on the display screen of the image display device 5. Alternatively, in this case, for example, in the ending period at the end of the big hit game, the right-handed indicator 26 and the right-handed notification LE
In addition to the lighting of D37, a right-handed display 052IW0 is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5.
You may comprise so that right-handed notification may be performed by displaying 07.

Further, in this example, the right-handed display displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 is not limited to the mode shown in this example. For example, in addition to the right-handed display 052IW007 having a relatively large size as shown in FIG. 10-56(1), a symbol display (for example, right-facing triangle display) indicating right-handed display is displayed on the image display device 5. Thus, the right-handed notification may be executed.

Further, the method of small hit control is not limited to the mode shown in this example. For example, a plurality of special variable winning ball device is provided, and the special variable winning ball device (special winning opening) to be opened is configured to be different depending on the type of small hit, and the small display is a small hit in the variable display of the first special symbol. It may be configured such that the selection ratio of the small hit type is different depending on whether the small hit occurs in the variable display of the second special symbol. In this case, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, it is easy to select the small hit type (or the small hit type of the open mode with a low winning rate) opened by the special variable winning ball device with the small number of prize balls. When executing the variable display of the second special symbol, it is easy to select the small hit type (or the small hit type of the open mode with a high winning rate) that the special variable winning ball device with a large number of prize balls opens. You may comprise.

Further, in this example, when a small hit occurs in the variable display of the second special symbol, the right hit notification is given during the small hit game (see FIG. 10-56(2)), and the variable display of the first special symbol is displayed. In the case where a small hit occurs in the case, the right hit notification is not performed during the small hit game (see FIG. 10-56 (3)), but when the small hit occurs in the variable display of the second special symbol However, the right-handed notification may not be performed in some cases. For example, when a small hit occurs when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in a situation where the left hit operation should be performed in the normal state, the right hit notification is not performed during the small hit game. You may.

Further, according to the characteristic portion 052IW, when a specific display result (eg, big hit symbol) is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, it is possible to control to an advantageous state (eg, big hit game state) advantageous to the player. Is. Also, when a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) different from the specific display result is displayed as a variable display result, it is possible to control to a special state different from the advantageous state (for example, a small hit game state). Is. Further, by using the judgment value for determining the display result of the variable display (for example, the judgment value for the big hit judgment, the judgment value for the small hit judgment),
Determine the display result of variable display. Further, it is possible to control to a non-specific state (for example, a non-probable variation state) and a specific state (for example, a probable variation state) that is easier to control to an advantageous state than the non-specific state.
The judgment value includes a specific judgment value (for example, a judgment value for jackpot judgment) for deciding to display the specific display result as the display result of the variable display, and a special display result as the display result of the variable display. And a special judgment value (for example, a judgment value for a small hit judgment) for deciding to derive and display. In addition, a plurality of setting values with different numbers of specific determination values (for example, setting value “1
It is possible to set it to any of the set values of "" to "6"). Further, the number of special determination values is common regardless of the set value, and is common when controlled to the non-specific state and controlled to the specific state (FIGS. 10-3 and 10). -4). Therefore, it is possible to realize appropriate game playability.

Specifically, if the lottery probability other than the jackpot winning probability and the type distribution change depending on the setting value, the difference in the degree of advantage (difference in payout performance) becomes too remarkable depending on the setting value, and the gambling probability may become excessively high. There is. Therefore, in the characteristic part 052IW, the number of special determination values is set to be common regardless of the set value (the small hit winning probability is set to be common), so that the difference in the advantage degree is prevented from becoming excessively large depending on the set value. However, it prevents gambling from becoming too high.

In addition, according to this feature section 052IW, the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information can be executed in parallel (for example, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol). And can be executed in parallel). Further, it is possible to control to a special state (for example, KT state) in which the frequency of the variable display of the second identification information becomes a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol). Therefore, in the gaming machine that can be controlled in the special state, it is possible to realize appropriate game playability.

In addition, according to the feature section 052IW, as the special state, the first special state (for example, the first K
T state) and a second special state (e.g., second KT state) having a higher degree of advantage than the first special state. Therefore, in the gaming machine that can be controlled to the second special state, it is possible to realize appropriate game playability.

Further, according to the characteristic part 052IW, it is possible to execute the special suggestion effect corresponding to the advantage of the special state (for example, the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect shown in FIG. 10-55). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in the game by suggesting the degree of advantage of the special state.

Further, according to the characteristic part 052IW, a predetermined display result (for example, deviating pattern) different from the specific display result (for example, big hit symbol) and the special display result (for example, small hit symbol) is derived as the display result of the variable display. When the displayed variable display is executed, it is possible to execute a set value suggesting effect that suggests a set value (for example, the set value suggesting effect shown in FIG. 10-54). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in the game by executing the set value suggestion effect.

In this example, the case where the small hit RUSH continuation suggesting effect and the set value suggesting effect are executed in the variable display which is out of sync is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect and the set value suggestion effect may be executed during the big hit game or the small hit game, and various modes are possible.

Further, according to the characteristic part 052IW, it is possible to control a plurality of types of special states (for example, small hits A to C). In addition, the type of special state is determined using a special type determination value (for example, a small hit type determination value) for determining the type of special state. Further, the number of special type determination values is common regardless of the set value (see FIG. 10-6). Therefore, more appropriate game play can be realized.

Specifically, in the feature part 052IW, the number of special type determination values is common regardless of the set value (the small hit type is distributed in common), so that the difference in the advantage degree becomes excessive depending on the set value. It prevents it from becoming too big, and prevents gambling from becoming too high.

It should be noted that in this example, as shown in FIG. 10-6, the case where the small hit type allocation is the same regardless of whether the setting value is “1” to “6” is shown. It is not limited to various forms. For example, the determination rate of the small hit type may be changed depending on which of the set values "1" to "6", and the advantage may be varied depending on the set value.

Further, according to the characteristic part 052IW, it is possible to control to a plurality of types of advantageous states (for example, 10R probability variation big hit, 6R probability variation big hit, 6R normal variation big hit, 2R probability variation big hit, 2R normal variation big hit). Further, the type of the advantageous state is determined using the advantageous type determination value (for example, the jackpot type determination value) for determining the type of the advantageous state. The number of advantageous type determination values is common regardless of the set value (see Fig. 10-5). Therefore, more appropriate game play can be realized.

Specifically, in the present characteristic unit 052IW, the number of advantageous type determination values is common regardless of the set value (the big hit type is commonly assigned), so that the difference in the advantageous degree is excessively large depending on the set value. It prevents the gambling from becoming excessively high.

It should be noted that in this example, as shown in FIG. 10-5, regardless of whether the setting value is “1” to “6”, the case where the jackpot type allocation is the same is shown. It is not limited to the mode. For example, the determination ratio of the jackpot type may be changed depending on which of the set values "1" to "6", and the advantage may be varied depending on the set value.

Further, according to the characteristic part 052IW, the variable display mode is determined using the variable display mode determination value (for example, the variation pattern determination value) for determining the variable display mode. Further, the number of variable display mode determination values is common regardless of the set value (see FIG. 10-10). Therefore, more appropriate game play can be realized.

Specifically, in the characteristic part 052IW, the number of variable display mode determination values is set to be the same regardless of the set value (the distribution of the variation patterns is set to be common), so that the difference in the degree of advantage becomes excessive depending on the set value. It prevents it from becoming too big, and prevents gambling from becoming too high.

In particular, if the selection ratio of the fluctuation pattern varies depending on the set value, the period from one small hit control to the next small hit control will change, and even if the small hit winning probability is common, it is advantageous for elements other than the big hit lottery This is not preferable because the degree (difference in payout performance) is greatly different, but in the characteristic part 052IW, by making the selection ratio of the variation pattern common regardless of the set value,
We try to prevent such problems.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 10-10, the case where the allocation of the variation patterns is the same regardless of which of the set values “1” to “6” has been shown. It is not limited to the mode. For example, by varying the determination rate of the variation pattern depending on which of the set values “1” to “6” and providing the difference in the variation time, the variation efficiency is changed by the setting value. It may be configured such that the degree of advantage varies depending on the value.

Further, according to the characteristic portion 052IW, when a specific display result (eg, big hit symbol) is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, it is possible to control to an advantageous state (eg, big hit game state) advantageous to the player. Is. Also, when a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) different from the specific display result is displayed as a variable display result, it is possible to control to a special state different from the advantageous state (for example, a small hit game state). Is. Further, by using the judgment value for determining the display result of the variable display (for example, the judgment value for the big hit judgment, the judgment value for the small hit judgment),
Determine the display result of variable display. In addition, the determination value is a specific determination value for determining to display the specific display result as the display result of the variable display (for example, a determination value for jackpot determination).
And a special judgment value (for example, a judgment value for small hit judgment) for deciding to display the special display result as the display result of the variable display, and a specific display result and a special display result as the display result of the variable display. And a predetermined determination value (for example, a determination value for deviation determination) for determining a predetermined display result different from. In addition, a plurality of setting values (
For example, it can be set to any one of the set values “1” to “6”). Further, the number of special determination values is common regardless of the set value (see FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4). Further, the predetermined determination value is included in the determination values corresponding to all the set values, and the number of the predetermined determination values differs depending on the set value (see FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4). Therefore, it is possible to increase the difficulty of guessing the set value and improve the interest in the game.

Further, according to the characteristic part 052IW, it is possible to control to a non-specific state (for example, a non-probable variation state) and a specific state (for example, a probable variation state) that is easier to control to an advantageous state than the non-specific state.
Further, the predetermined judgment value is included in the judgment values corresponding to the specific states of all the set values (FIG. 10-3).
And FIG. 10-4). Therefore, it is possible to increase the difficulty of estimating the set value during the specific state.

Further, according to the characteristic portion 052IW, the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information can be executed in parallel (for example, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol). Variable display can be performed in parallel). Further, the number of special determination values corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information is larger than the number of special determination values corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information, and the variable display of the second identification information in the specific state is performed. The corresponding judgment value includes a predetermined judgment value (see FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4). Therefore, it is possible to increase the difficulty of estimating the set value using the display result of the variable display of the second identification information in the specific state.

Further, according to the characteristic part 052IW, it is possible to control to a special state (for example, KT state) in which the display result of the variable display of the second identification information is increased to the special display result. In addition, when the variable display is executed in which the predetermined display result (for example, the out-of-order pattern) is controlled and displayed in the special state, the set value suggesting effect that suggests the set value (for example, the setting shown in FIG. 10-54 is set. Value suggestion production) can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in the game by executing the set value suggestion effect.

Further, according to the present characteristic part 052IW, it is possible to perform variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol). Further, when a specific display result (for example, a big hit symbol) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, it is possible to control to an advantageous state advantageous for the player (for example, a big hit game state). Also, as a display result of the variable display, when a special display result different from the specific display result (for example, a small hit pattern) is derived and displayed, a special state different from the advantageous state (for example, a small hit game state)
Controllable. Further, the display result of the variable display is determined by using the determination value for determining the display result of the variable display (for example, the determination value for the big hit determination, the determination value for the small hit determination). The judgment value includes a specific judgment value (for example, a judgment value for jackpot judgment) for deciding to display the specific display result as the display result of the variable display, and a special display result as the display result of the variable display. And a special judgment value (for example, a judgment value for a small hit judgment) for deciding to derive and display. In addition, a plurality of setting values with different numbers of specific determination values (for example, setting value “1”)
Up to "6"). The number of special determination values among the determination values corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information is common regardless of the set value (see FIG. 10-4), and the determination corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information is performed. The number of special judgment values differs between the value and the judgment value corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information (see FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4). Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the monotonousness of the game while realizing the appropriate game playability.

In the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017-148127, the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display with respect to the control for deriving the variable display of the identification information with the predetermined display result (forced disengagement stop) Could not be realized in consideration of Therefore, this feature part 052
The IW also has a characteristic configuration of the gaming machine shown in (Means A1) to (Means A6) below for the purpose of providing a gaming machine capable of realizing control in consideration of the degree of advantage of the variable display result. It is disclosed.

(Means A1) A gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine capable of playing a game, in which variable display of first identification information (eg, first special symbol) and second identification information (eg, second special information) Variable display execution means capable of executing variable display of (pattern) in parallel (for example, the portion that executes steps S25A and S25B in the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103)), and the display of variable display As a result, when a specific display result (for example, big hit symbol) is derived and displayed, advantageous state control means (for example, game control microcomputer 100() that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous for the player (for example, big hit game state) Specifically, the CPU
103) in step 103)), and a special state different from the advantageous state when a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display (for example, a small hit game). Special state control means capable of controlling the state) (for example, step S126 in the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103))
To a part for executing S128), the variable display execution means specially performs variable display of the other identification information during execution of variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information. Based on the derived display of the display result, the first control that does not derive and display the display result of the variable display of the one identification information (for example, the update of the first variation time timer or the second variation time timer is interrupted, The variable display of the 1 special symbol or the second special symbol is continuously executed), and the second control for deriving and displaying the variable display of the identification information on the one side with a predetermined display result (for example, the off symbol) (for example, the off symbol) It is possible to display and stop the symbol (for example, the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed with the symbol), and in one variable display of the identification information. Which of the first control and the second control is executed differs depending on the display result that is derived and displayed (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) is a determination result of steps 052IWS1128A and S1128B). The steps 052IWS1129A, S1130A, S1129B, and S1130B are executed by, for example, in the modified example 1, the gaming control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) determines the steps 052IWS1127A, S1127B, and steps 052IWS1129A, S1130A, and S1129B. , S1130B. For example, in the modified example 2, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) executes steps 052IWS1129A, S1130A, S1129B, and S1130B according to the determination results of steps 052IWS1130C and S1130D.) It is characterized by With such a configuration, it is possible to realize control in consideration of the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display.

(Means A2) In the means A1, special state control means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 ((for example, game control microcomputer 100( Specifically, step 052 in the CPU 103)
(A part that executes IWS 2208). According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest in the game by providing a situation in which the game value due to the special state is easily given.

(Means A3) In the means A1 or the means A2, the first specific display result (
For example, there is a probability variation big hit symbol) and a second specific display result (for example, a normal big hit symbol), which is a state different from the advantageous state and which is in an advantageous state as compared with a non-specific state (for example, a low probability state). Specific state control means (for example, game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103)) that can be controlled to a specific state that is easily controlled (for example, high probability state (probability change state))
Step 052 IWS2206 in), the specific state control means is
It is controlled to a specific state based on the first specific display result being derived and displayed (for example, it is controlled to a probable state after the jackpot game based on the probability variation big hit), and the second specific display result is derived and displayed. It may be configured to control to a non-specific state on the basis (for example, not to control to a probability changing state after the end of the big hit game based on the normal big hit). According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize the control in consideration of whether the control is performed in the specific state.

(Means A4) In any one of the means A1 to the means A3, the specific display result includes the first
There is a specific display result (for example, probability variation big hit pattern) and a second specific display result (for example, normal big hit pattern), which is a state different from the advantageous state and is compared with the non-specific state (for example, low probability state). Specific state control means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, a high probability state (probability change state)) that can be easily controlled to an advantageous state
The CPU 103) includes a portion for executing step 052IWS2206), and the specific state control means is configured to control the specific region (for example, V region 052IW1) when being controlled to the advantageous state.
04) can be controlled to a specific state based on the passage of a game medium (eg, a game ball) (eg, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103)).
Executes steps 052IWS2404, S2405, S2204 to S2206).
, When the first specific display result is derived and displayed, compared to when the second specific display result is derived and displayed, the game medium passes through the specific region at a high rate when being controlled to the advantageous state. (As shown in FIG. 10-11(1), in the big hit game based on the probability variation big hit, the opening period of the V area opening/closing plate 052IW101 is long. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-11(2), it is based on the normal big hit. In the big hit game, the opening period of the V area opening/closing plate 052IW101 is extremely short.) may be configured. With such a configuration, it is possible to realize control in consideration of whether or not the game medium easily passes through the specific area.

(Means A5) In any one of the means A1 to A4, the specific display result is the first
There is a specific display result (for example, probability variation big hit pattern) and a second specific display result (for example, normal big hit pattern), and the second specific display result is derived and displayed when the first specific display result is derived and displayed. Is more advantageous to the player (for example, it is controlled to a probability change state after the end of the big hit game), and the variable display executing means executes the variable display of the first identification information and the variable of the second identification information. In any case of executing the display, it is possible to derive and display the special display result (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) executes steps 052IWS64A and S64B). -3, FIG. 10-4)), while the variable display of the first identification information is being performed corresponding to the second specific display result, the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the second identification information. Based on the above, the variable display of the first identification information is derived and displayed with a predetermined display result (for example, in the modification 3, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) displays N in step 052IWS1128A). At this time, steps 052 IWS1129A and S1130A are executed.
)reference. ), when the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the first identification information while the variable display of the second identification information is being performed corresponding to the second specific display result, the second identification information is displayed. The control for deriving and displaying the variable display of the predetermined display result is not performed (for example, in the modification 3, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) does not perform the processing of steps 052IWS1126B to S1128B. 10-66, FIG. 10-6
See 7(E). ). According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize the control in consideration of the variable display of the first identification information or the variable display of the second identification information, in addition to the advantage degree of the display result of the variable display.

(Means A6) In any of the means A1 to A5, the specific display result is
There is a specific display result (for example, probability variation big hit pattern) and a second specific display result (for example, normal big hit pattern), and the second specific display result is derived and displayed when the first specific display result is derived and displayed. Compared to a non-specific state (for example, a low-probability state), which is different from the advantageous state Specific state control means capable of controlling to a specific state that is easily controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a high probability state (probability variation state)) (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, C
(PU103) part for executing step 052IWS2206), the variable display execution means is a variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information when being controlled to a specific state. While executing the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result,
Based on the derivation display of the special display result in the variable display of the other identification information, the variable display of the one identification information is derived and displayed with a predetermined display result (for example, in modification 4, the game control microcomputer 100). (Specifically, the CPU 103) executes step 052I.
When Y in WS1131A and S1131B, steps 052IWS1129A and S1130
Execute A. See Figures 10-68 and 10-69. ), while being controlled to the non-specific state, during the variable display of the identification information of one of the first identification information and the second identification information and corresponding to the second specific display result, When the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the other identification information, the control of deriving and displaying the variable display of the one identification information with the predetermined display result is not performed (for example, in modification 4, for game control). Microcomputer 100
(Specifically, the CPU 103) returns N in step 052IWS1131A, S1131B.
If so, the process does not proceed to steps 052IWS1129A and S1129B. See Figures 10-68 and 10-69. ). With such a configuration, it is possible to realize control in consideration of whether or not the display is controlled to a specific state, in addition to the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display.

In the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017-148127, the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display with respect to the control for deriving the variable display of the identification information with the predetermined display result (forced disengagement stop) Could not be realized in consideration of Therefore, this feature part 052
The IW also has a characteristic configuration of the gaming machine shown in (Means B1) to (Means B6) below for the purpose of providing a gaming machine that can realize control considering the degree of advantage of the variable display result. It is disclosed.

(Means B1) A gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine capable of playing a game, and a variable display of first identification information (eg, first special symbol) and second identification information (eg, second special information). Variable display execution means capable of executing variable display of (pattern) in parallel (for example, the portion that executes steps S25A and S25B in the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103)), and the display of variable display As a result, when a specific display result (for example, big hit symbol) is derived and displayed, advantageous state control means (for example, game control microcomputer 100() that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous for the player (for example, big hit game state) Specifically, the CPU
103) in step 103)), and a special state different from the advantageous state when a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display (for example, a small hit game). Special state control means capable of controlling the state) (for example, step S126 in the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103))
The part for executing S128 to S128), the variable display execution means performs the special display result regardless of whether the first identification information is variably displayed or the second identification information is variably displayed. Can be derived and displayed (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) executes steps 052IWS64A and S64B. FIG. 10-3,
See Figure 10-4. ), while the variable display of the identification information of one of the first identification information and the second identification information is being performed, the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the other identification information. The first control that does not derive and display the display result of the variable display of information (for example,
Update of the first variable time timer or the second variable time timer is interrupted, the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is continuously executed), and a predetermined variable display of the identification information of the one Second control to derive and display as a result (for example, the off symbol) (for example, display the off symbol and stop (for example, the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed on the off symbol) It is possible to execute, and which of the first control and the second control is executed depends on the display result derived and displayed in the variable display of one identification information (for example, the game control microcomputer 100). (Specifically, the CPU 103) executes step 052.
According to the determination result of IWS1128A, S1128B, step 052 IWS1129A,
S1130A, S1129B, and S1130B are executed. For example, in the modified example 1, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) executes the step 052.
According to the determination result of IWS1127A, S1127B, step 052 IWS1129A,
S1130A, S1129B, and S1130B are executed. For example, in the modified example 2, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) has a step 052.
According to the determination result of IWS1130C, S1130D, step 052 IWS1129A,
S1130A, S1129B, and S1130B are executed. ) Is characterized. With such a configuration, it is possible to realize control in consideration of the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display.

(Means B2) In the means B1, special state control means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100((for example, game control microcomputer 100( Specifically, step 052 in the CPU 103)
(A part that executes IWS 2208). According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest in the game by providing a situation in which the game value due to the special state is easily given.

(Means B3) In the means B1 or the means B2, the specific display result is the first specific display result (
For example, there is a probability variation big hit symbol) and a second specific display result (for example, a normal big hit symbol), which is a state different from the advantageous state and which is in an advantageous state as compared with a non-specific state (for example, a low probability state). Specific state control means (for example, game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103)) that can be controlled to a specific state that is easily controlled (for example, high probability state (probability change state))
Step 052 IWS2206 in), the specific state control means is
It is controlled to a specific state based on the first specific display result being derived and displayed (for example, it is controlled to a probable state after the jackpot game based on the probability variation big hit), and the second specific display result is derived and displayed. It may be configured to control to a non-specific state on the basis (for example, not to control to a probability changing state after the end of the big hit game based on the normal big hit). According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize the control in consideration of whether the control is performed in the specific state.

(Means B4) In any one of the means B1 to the means B3, the specific display result is the first
There is a specific display result (for example, probability variation big hit pattern) and a second specific display result (for example, normal big hit pattern), which is a state different from the advantageous state and is compared with the non-specific state (for example, low probability state). Specific state control means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, a high probability state (probability change state)) that can be easily controlled to an advantageous state
The CPU 103) includes a portion for executing step 052IWS2206), and the specific state control means is configured to control the specific region (for example, V region 052IW1) when being controlled to the advantageous state.
04) can be controlled to a specific state based on the passage of a game medium (eg, a game ball) (eg, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103)).
Executes steps 052IWS2404, S2405, S2204 to S2206).
, When the first specific display result is derived and displayed, compared to when the second specific display result is derived and displayed, the game medium passes through the specific region at a high rate when being controlled to the advantageous state. (As shown in FIG. 10-11(1), in the big hit game based on the probability variation big hit, the opening period of the V area opening/closing plate 052IW101 is long. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-11(2), it is based on the normal big hit. In the big hit game, the opening period of the V area opening/closing plate 052IW101 is extremely short.) may be configured. With such a configuration, it is possible to realize control in consideration of whether or not the game medium easily passes through the specific area.

(Means B5) In any one of the means B1 to the means B4, the specific display result is the first
There is a specific display result (for example, probability variation big hit pattern) and a second specific display result (for example, normal big hit pattern), and the second specific display result is derived and displayed when the first specific display result is derived and displayed. Is more advantageous to the player (for example, it is controlled to a probable change state after the big hit game is finished), and the variable display execution means is a variable display of the first identification information and corresponds to the second specific display result. During execution of the variable display, the variable display of the first identification information is derived and displayed based on the special display result derived in the variable display of the second identification information (for example, in the modification 3, Game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103)
Is 0 in step 052IWS1128A, step 052IWS1129A, S1
Execute 130A. See Figure 10-67(B). ), when the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the first identification information while the variable display of the second identification information is being performed corresponding to the second specific display result, the second identification information is displayed. The control for deriving and displaying the variable display of the predetermined display result is not performed (for example, in the modification 3, the game control microcomputer 100 (
Specifically, the CPU 103) does not perform the processing of steps 052IWS1126B to S1128B. See FIGS. 10-66 and 10-67(E). ).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize the control in consideration of the variable display of the first identification information or the variable display of the second identification information, in addition to the advantage degree of the display result of the variable display.

(Means B6) In any one of the means B1 to B5, the specific display result is the first
There is a specific display result (for example, probability variation big hit pattern) and a second specific display result (for example, normal big hit pattern), and the second specific display result is derived and displayed when the first specific display result is derived and displayed. Compared to a non-specific state (for example, a low-probability state), which is different from the advantageous state Specific state control means capable of controlling to a specific state that is easily controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a high probability state (probability variation state)) (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, C
(PU103) part for executing step 052IWS2206), the variable display execution means is a variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information when being controlled to a specific state. While executing the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result,
Based on the derivation display of the special display result in the variable display of the other identification information, the variable display of the one identification information is derived and displayed with a predetermined display result (for example, in modification 4, the game control microcomputer 100). (Specifically, the CPU 103) executes step 052I.
When Y in WS1131A and S1131B, steps 052IWS1129A and S1130
Execute A. See Figures 10-68 and 10-69. ), while being controlled to the non-specific state, during the variable display of the identification information of one of the first identification information and the second identification information and corresponding to the second specific display result, When the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the other identification information, the control of deriving and displaying the variable display of the one identification information with the predetermined display result is not performed (for example, in modification 4, for game control). Microcomputer 100
(Specifically, the CPU 103) returns N in step 052IWS1131A, S1131B.
If so, the process does not proceed to steps 052IWS1129A and S1129B. See Figures 10-68 and 10-69. ). With such a configuration, it is possible to realize control in consideration of whether or not the display is controlled to a specific state, in addition to the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display.

Note that the structure shown by the characteristic part 052IW can be appropriately combined with the structure shown by the characteristic part 21TM to form a gaming machine. For example, the configuration for changing the set value indicated by the characteristic portion 21TM is applied to the characteristic portion 052IW so that the setting value suggesting effect can be executed or the small hit RUSH continuous suggesting effect can be executed. , Right hitting notification can be executed, over-winning suggestion effect can be executed, small hit winning suggestion effect can be executed, prize ball number display suggestion effect can be executed You may do it. In addition, for example, the configuration that can change the set value shown in the characteristic unit 21TM is applied to the characteristic unit 052IW, and while the variable display of one special symbol is being executed, it is a small hit in the variable display of the other special symbol. In that case, the variable display of one of the special symbols may be discontinued, and the variable display may be forcibly stopped and displayed or the variable display may be continued.

Further, when the configuration shown by the characteristic part 021TM is applied, as shown in FIG. 9-5, the setting value may be suggested by changing the mode of the ending effect.
In this case, for example, in the ending effect, a mode transition notification including a small hit RUSH, a chance mode, etc. is executed, a card forgetting prevention notification such as a prepaid card is executed, or a manufacturer logo is displayed. It is configured to suggest the set value by changing the display mode of the mode transition notification, the card forgetting prevention notification, the manufacturer logo display, and the display mode of the image displayed at the same time. You may.

It should be noted that the patent document (JP-A-2018-033787) and the patent document (JP-A-2010).
-200902), it is possible to implement a setting suggestion effect in a game that is configured to be controllable in a special state by combining the gaming machines. However, the interest of the game cannot be sufficiently improved only by executing the setting suggestion effect in the game that is controllable in the special state. Therefore, for the purpose of providing a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of the setting suggestion effect, the present characteristic part 052IW will be shown below (means C).
Characteristic configurations of the gaming machine shown in 1) to (means C7) are also disclosed.

(Means C1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is capable of playing a game, and is set to any one of a plurality of set values (for example, set values "1" to "6") having different advantages for the player. It is a gaming machine that can be set to a value, and advantageous state control means (for example, executing steps S122 to S125 in the gaming control microcomputer 100) that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit gaming state). Part) and a special state control means (for example, a part that executes steps S126 to S128 in the game control microcomputer 100) that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a small hitting game state) that is a state different from the advantageous state. , Special state control means capable of controlling to a special state (for example, KT state) in which a game value is easily given by the special state (for example, step 052I in the game control microcomputer 100)
WS2208, S2210, S2211, S2212, S2213)),
A setting suggestion effect executing means capable of executing a setting suggestion effect (for example, a small hit winning suggestion effect) in response to a game medium (for example, a game ball) passing through a specific area (for example, a special winning opening). For example, the part for executing 052IWS323, S324 in the effect control CPU 120) is provided. With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion effect.

(Means C2) In the means C1, the advantageous state control means is capable of controlling to an advantageous state (eg, jackpot gaming state) when a specific display result (eg, jackpot pattern) is derived and displayed as a display result of variable display. Yes, the special state control means controls to a special state (for example, a small hitting game state) when a special display result (for example, a small hitting pattern) different from the specific display result is displayed as a variable display result. Display result determining means for determining the display result of the variable display using a determination value for determining the display result of the variable display (for example, a determination value for the big hit determination, a determination value for the small hit determination). (For example, a portion that executes steps 026IWS59A, S64A, S59B, S64B in the game control microcomputer 100), and the determination value is used to determine that a specific display result is displayed as a variable display display result. A specific judgment value (for example, a judgment value for big hit judgment) and a special judgment value (for example, a judgment value for small hit judgment) for deciding to derive and display a special display result as a display result of variable display are provided. A plurality of setting values that are included and have different numbers of specific determination values (for example, setting values “1” to “6”)
Setting means that can be set to any one of the setting values (for example, the portion that executes steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620 in the game control microcomputer 100)
And the number of special determination values may be common regardless of the set value (see FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4). With such a configuration, it is possible to realize appropriate game playability.

(Means C3) In the means C1 or the means 2C, the setting suggestion effect executing means can execute the setting suggestion effect in response to the control to the special state (for example, a small hit during the high probability/second KT state). Based on the fact that a game ball has won in the special winning opening, it is possible to execute a small hit winning suggestion effect and a prize ball number indication suggesting effect). With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion effect in association with the control to the special state.

(Means C4) In any one of the means C1 to C3, the variable means (for example, the special variable winning ball device 7, the special variable winning a prize, when the advantageous state is controlled and the special state is controlled). Variable means capable of controlling the ball device 17) into an easy entry state (eg, open state) in which a game medium (eg, game ball) easily enters and an inaccessible state (eg, closed state) in which difficult or impossible entry is possible. The control means (for example, the portion that executes steps S122 to S124, S126, and S127 in the game control microcomputer 100) is provided, and the setting suggestion effect execution means corresponds to the fact that the variable means is controlled to the easy entry state. , Setting suggestion production can be executed (for example, the special variable winning ball device 7 and the special variable winning ball device 17 are in the open state, and the winning of the game ball to the special winning opening or the special winning opening occurs. Based on that, it is possible to execute a small hit winning suggestion effect and an award ball number display suggesting effect). With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion effect in association with the control of the variable unit.

(Means C5) In any one of the means C1 to C4, the setting suggestion effect executing means, when the control of the game state is switched (for example, at the start or end of the big hit game, from low probability/first KT state to normal) It is configured to be able to execute a setting suggestion effect (when changing to a state (low probability/low base state)) (for example, changing the display mode (for example, display color) of right-handed display in step 052IWS624). May be. With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion effect in association with the switching of the control of the game state.

(Means C6) In any one of the means C1 to C5, the setting suggestion effect executing means, the number of times of control to the special state during the special state, the total game value given by the special state during the special state, or Depending on the number of executions of the variable display during the special state, the setting suggestion effect can be executed with different selection ratios (for example, the number of prize balls is 456, 555, 6).
In response to reaching 66, 2456, 2555, or 2666, the prize ball number display suggestive effects A to F are executed at different selection ratios. Alternatively, for example, according to the number of small hits that have occurred during the high probability/second KT state or the number of times that the variable display has been executed during the high probability/second KT state, a prize ball number display suggesting effect A with a different selection ratio is obtained. ~F may be configured to be performed.
). According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion effect in relation to the number of times of control to the special state, the total game value, or the number of times of variable display execution.

(Means C7) In any one of the means C1 to the means C6, the special state control means, as a special state, is an advantageous special state (for example, the second KT state) and is disadvantageous to the player as compared with the advantageous special state. It is possible to control to a disadvantageous special state (for example, the first KT state), and the setting suggestion effect executing means plays a specific area when the game medium passes through the specific area during the advantageous special state and during the disadvantageous special state. It is possible to execute the setting suggestion effect with a different selection ratio when the medium passes (for example, only when the game ball is won in the special winning opening as a small hit during the second KT state, a small hit is suggested. It is possible to execute an effect or a prize ball number display suggesting effect). With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion effect in association with the type of special state.

(Explanation regarding the characteristic part 020SH)
Next, the gaming machine related to the characteristic unit 020SH will be described. The gaming machine related to the characteristic part 020SH is a gaming machine capable of playing a game. In this embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine 1 capable of playing a game will be described as an example.

The gaming machine related to the characteristic part 020SH includes a game state control means, a variable display execution means, a pre-start determination means, a hold storage means, a setting means, and an effect execution means. The game state control means, the variable display execution means, the pre-start determination means, the hold storage means, and the setting means are realized by, for example, the CPU 103 of the main board 11. The effect execution means is realized by, for example, the effect control CPU 120 of the effect control board 12.

The game state control means controls the game state. The game state control means can control an advantageous state, a special state, a special state, and a non-special state. The advantageous state is an advantageous state advantageous to the player, for example, a big hit game state. The special state is a gaming state different from the advantageous state, for example, a small hit gaming state.

The special state is a state that is easily controlled to the special state, and is, for example, the second KT state. The second KT state is a gaming state in which a small hit is likely to occur, and a gaming ball is easy to win in a special winning opening. The non-special state is a gaming state in which it is more difficult to control the special state than the special state, and is, for example, the first KT state. The first KT state is a gaming state in which a small hit is likely to occur, but it is difficult for a gaming ball to win a special winning opening. The second KT
Although the state and the first KT state may be compared, the frequency of occurrence of a small hit may be equal, but the second
In the KT state, the time for which the small hit game is controlled (for example, the opening time) is longer, so it is easier to control for the small hit game.

In the gaming machine related to the characteristic part 020SH, the advantageous state and the special state are states in which variable display (also referred to as “variable display”) is not performed. The state in which the variable display is not performed is, specifically, the identification information (big hit pattern) indicating the advantageous state is derived and displayed, and the identification information is stopped and displayed, or the identification information indicating the special state (small The winning symbol) is derived and displayed, and the identification information is stopped and displayed. For example, in a configuration in which the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are simultaneously executed in parallel, the state in which variable display is not performed is one symbol (
(Special symbol) is in the stop display where the big hit or small hit design is derived and displayed,
For the other symbol, it also includes the case where variable display is being suspended.

Further, in the gaming machine related to the characteristic part 020SH, the effect execution means is in the special state (second KT
When the state is controlled to a special state (small hitting game state), a special effect corresponding to the control of the special state can be executed. When the special state is controlled in the special state (second KT state), the game ball easily wins in the special winning opening. For this reason, the effect execution means executes, for example, a special effect informing the small hit game.

On the other hand, the effect executing means, when controlled to the special state in the non-special state (first KT state), can execute a suggestion effect that is different from the special effect and suggests advantageous contents for the player. . Even if the special state is controlled in the non-special state (first KT state), the game ball rarely wins the special winning opening. Therefore, in the non-special state, the effect executing means does not execute the special effect.

The suggestion effect is, for example, a pending change suggestion effect, a set value suggestion effect, a probability change notification effect, and the like, which will be described later. However, the suggestive effect is not limited to these, and may be, for example, the maximum number of consecutive games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 today, the total number of variable displays, the total number of prize balls, or the like. It may be. Further, the content advantageous to the player, which is suggested by the suggestion effect, may be any information that the player wants to know in playing the game, and, for example, the content suggesting that the player is in a disadvantageous state ( For example, a suggestion that the set value is low) is also included.

Further, in the gaming machine related to the characteristic part 020SH, the effect execution means can perform variable display of the decoration identification information corresponding to the variable display of the identification information. The decoration identification information is, for example, a decorative pattern. Further, the effect executing means displays the special display result as the display result of the decoration identification information when the special state is controlled to the special state. The special display result is, for example, a combination of decorative patterns indicating a small hit (for example, “1, 3, 5”). When the special state is controlled in the special state, the effect executing means may display a specific character indicating that the special state is controlled.

Further, the effect executing means, when being controlled to the special state in the non-special state, displays a predetermined display result different from the special display result as the display result of the decoration identification information. The predetermined display result is, for example, a combination of decorative patterns indicating a loss. The combination of lost symbols may be randomly determined for each variable display.

In addition, in the gaming machine related to the characteristic part 020SH, the pre-start determination means determines whether or not the display result of the variable display is the display result indicating that the variable display is controlled to the advantageous state for the variable display that has not been started yet. To do. The determination performed by the pre-start determination unit is, for example, a pre-reading determination, specifically, a determination having the same content as various determinations performed when starting the variable display, and a determination performed before the various timings. is there. Various determinations include, for example, a big hit determination, a big hit type determination, a variation pattern determination, and the like.

The production execution means can execute suggestion production for making a suggestion regarding the pre-starting determination means. The suggestion regarding the pre-start determination means is, for example, a suggestion of an effect performed based on the determination result of the look-ahead determination.

Further, in the gaming machine related to the characteristic part 020SH, the hold storage means stores information regarding variable display as hold storage information. The pending storage information is, for example, information that has been determined by the pre-start determination means, but may include information that has not been determined. The effect execution means displays the hold storage information stored in the hold storage means as a hold display. For example, the effect executing means holds and displays the hold storage information in a display mode according to the determination result by the pre-start determining means. The display mode of the hold display includes a normal display mode and a special display mode having a higher expectation than the normal display mode.

Further, the effect execution means can execute an effect effect that acts on the hold display in the suggestion effect. Specifically, the effect execution means can execute, as the hold change suggestion effect, an effect effect that suggests that the display mode of the hold display may change. For example, the action effect is an effect in which the pending display of the target that may change is clarified and some action is performed on the pending display of the target. Specifically, the action effect is, for example, an effect in which an object hits the target hold display, or a lightning effect strikes the target hold display. In the gaming machine related to the characteristic part 020SH, there are a case where the display mode of the hold display changes and a case where the display mode of the hold display does not change. The effect in which the effect mode is performed and the display mode of the hold display does not change is a so-called gase effect (hereinafter, may be referred to as “gase hold change suggestion effect”). Note that the suggestion effect for making a suggestion regarding the pre-start determination means is not limited to the pending change suggestion effect. For example, if the pending storage information that is prefetched as a big hit is stored, or if there is a loss SP (
(Super) Display the background image or character image that suggests that the pending storage information with a high expectation of a big hit is stored when the pending storage information that is prefetched as a variation pattern of reach is stored. It may be a production.

Further, in the gaming machine related to the characteristic part 020SH, the setting means can set any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player. The set value is a plurality of values set corresponding to the winning probability of the big hit, for example, a value set to any one of “1” to “6”. The production execution means is a suggestion production (hereinafter, referred to as “the suggestion production” that makes a suggestion regarding the setting means.
It is possible to execute the “setting value suggestion production”). The setting value suggesting effect is an effect that causes the player to guess the setting value by using the background image and the character image, for example. The set value suggestion effect may be an effect indicating the set value itself. In the characteristic part 020SH, the set value suggestive effect is more likely to be executed when the set value is higher than when the set value is low.

In the gaming machine related to the characteristic part 020SH, the non-special state is the first non-special state,
There is a second non-special state that is easier to control to an advantageous state than the first non-special state. The first non-special state is an indeterminate change state (low probability state), and is, for example, a low probability/first KT state. Second
The non-special state is a probability change state (high-probability state), and is, for example, a high-probability/first KT state.
The effect execution means can execute the common effect when it is controlled to the first non-special state and when it is controlled to the second non-special state. The common effect is, for example, an effect controlled in a common effect mode (“chance time mode” in the embodiment relating to the characteristic part 020SH). The effect mode is, for example, an effect in which a specific effect image, a specific BGM, or the like, which is different from the normal one, is executed over one or a plurality of variable displays. The effect image here is, for example, a background image, a character image, a hold image, an active display image, an interface image, a decorative pattern image in a display mode, or the like.

Further, the suggestive effect is an effect that suggests that the second non-special state is controlled (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “probable change suggestive effect”). The probability variation suggestion effect is, for example, an effect that displays an image (for example, a specific background image, a specific character image, a character image, etc.) indicating that the second non-special state is controlled.

Further, in the gaming machine related to the characteristic part 020SH, the effect execution means can execute a plurality of types of suggestive effects in different modes as the suggestive effect. As described above, the plurality of types of suggestive effects are the pending change suggestive effect, the set value suggestive effect, the probability change suggestive effect, and the like. Further, there are a plurality of types of suggestive effects for each suggestive effect. For example, in the case of the hold change suggestion effect, there may be an effect in which the hold display is likely to change and an effect in which the hold display is unlikely to change.
Further, for example, in the case of the set value suggestion effect, there are modes that suggest that the possibility of being set high is high, modes that suggest that the possibility of being set low is high, and the like. In the case of the probability variation suggestive effect, there are modes that suggest that the probability of being controlled to the probability variation state is high, modes that suggest that the probability of being controlled to the probability variation state is low, and the like.

The advantage of the content suggested to the player varies depending on which type of suggestion effect is executed in the characteristic part 020SH. For example, in the set value suggestion effect, when a set value suggestion effect that suggests that the setting is likely to be high is executed, a set value suggestion effect that suggests that the setting is likely to be low is performed. This is more advantageous to the player as compared to the case where the game is broken. Further, for example, in the probability variation suggestion effect, if the probability variation suggestion effect indicating that the probability of being controlled to the probability variation state is high is executed, it is suggested that the probability of being controlled to the probability variation state is low. Compared with the case where the probability variation suggestion effect of the aspect is executed, the player has a higher advantage.

Further, in the gaming machine related to the characteristic part 020SH, the variable display executing means can execute the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information in parallel. Features 020SH
The gaming machine according to is provided with a first variable winning means. The first variable winning means is, for example, a variable winning ball device 6B (see FIG. 1) having a second starting winning opening. The first variable winning means is a first state (open state) in which the game medium easily passes the starting area, and a second state in which the game medium hardly passes the starting area.
It can be changed to a state (closed state).

The gaming state control means can control the first variable winning means to a predetermined state in which the first variable winning means easily changes to the first state. The predetermined state is, for example, a non-special state, specifically, the first KT state (a gaming state in which a small hit game in which gaming balls hardly win a prize is repeatedly executed). The effect execution means can execute the suggested effect when the special state is controlled in the predetermined state.

Further, the gaming machine related to the characteristic part 020SH includes a second variable winning means. The second variable winning means is, for example, a special variable winning ball device 17 (see FIG. 1) having a special winning opening for a small hit. The second variable winning means can be changed between an easy winning state (open state) in which the game balls are easy to win and a difficult winning state (closed state) in which the game balls are difficult to win. The second variable winning means can be changed to an easy winning state in a special state (small hitting game state). The effect execution means executes the suggested effect in response to the change of the second variable winning means to the easy winning state. In particular,
For example, the effect executing means executes the suggested effect in synchronization with the opening timing of the second variable winning means.

Further, in the gaming machine related to the characteristic part 020SH, when the effect executing means is controlled to the special state (small hit) in the special state (for example, the second KT state), based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the special area, It is possible to execute a predetermined effect corresponding to the passage of the special area of the game medium. Specifically, the special area is an area (for example, a V area or a discharge area) through which the game balls that have won the special variable winning device 7 pass. The game ball that has passed through the special area is detected by the second count switch 24 provided in the special winning opening. Thereby, the prize balls are paid out. The predetermined effect is, for example, an effect indicating a winning of the special variable winning device 7, or an effect of adding the number of prize balls paid out by the winning.

Further, the effect executing means, when controlled to the special state in the non-special state (for example, the first KT state), does not execute the predetermined effect regardless of whether or not the game medium has passed through the special area. Specifically, the effect executing means executes the suggested effect without executing the predetermined effect when the special state is controlled in the non-special state.

(Regarding transition of game state and effect mode after big hit game in characteristic part 020SH)
Next, with reference to FIG. 11A, transition of the game state after the big hit game in the characteristic unit 020SH and transition of the effect mode according to the game state will be described. FIG. 11-1 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the transition of the game state and the effect mode after the big hit game related to the characteristic part 020SH. As shown in FIG. 11A, in the characteristic part 020SH, the normal mode is controlled in the normal state (low probability/low base state). Also, in the high probability/low base state, a small hit RU
Controlled to SH mode. Also, in the high probability/high base state and the low probability/high base state, the chan time mode is controlled. That is, in the high-probability/high-base state and the low-probability/high-base state, common effects are executed.

Further, as for the effect during the big hit game, a common effect may be executed when the big hit game based on the 6R certainty variation big hit is executed and when the big hit game based on the 6R normal big hit is executed. That is, a combination of common decorative symbols is stopped and displayed in the 6R probability variation big hit and the 6R normal big hit, and a common big hit effect may be executed during each big hit game.
As a result, whether the big hit game based on the 6R probability variation big hit is executed (is it controlled to a high probability/high base state), or the big hit game based on the 6R normal big hit is executed (to a low probability/high base state) It can be made impossible for the player to determine (whether it is controlled).

In the characteristic part 020SH, in the KT state (first KT state and second KT state), the normal big hit determined in the big hit type determination is not determined to be the 6R normal big hit in principle, but is determined to be the 2R normal big hit. Therefore, in the KT state, when the 2R big hit game is executed, the player knows that the low probability/high base state has been transitioned or that the low probability/high base state has been continued. Therefore, when the big hit game based on the 2R normal big hit is executed in the KT state, an effect (a big hit effect and an effect mode separately prepared) for informing the low probability/high base state may be executed.

In addition, when the big hit game based on the 6R certainty variation big hit in the KT state is executed, the player knows that the high probability/high base state has been transitioned or that the high probability/high base state has been continued. . For this reason, when the big hit game based on the 6R certainty variation big hit is executed in the KT state, an effect (a big hit effect and an effect mode separately prepared) for notifying the high probability/high base state may be executed. In other words, the chance time mode may be controlled only in the case of so-called first hit, that is, when transitioning from the normal state to the high probability/high base state or to the low probability/high base state. It may be limited to the case.

In the jackpot type determination, the 6R regular jackpot may be determined instead of the 2R regular jackpot. As a result, in the KT state, a big hit game based on the 6R normal big hit and a big hit game based on the 6R certainty variation big hit are executed in common, thereby performing any kind of big hit game. Was executed (
It is possible to prevent the player from determining (whether the high probability/high base state is controlled or the low probability/high base state is controlled).

(An example of the effect mode setting process related to the characteristic part 020SH)
Next, an example of the effect mode setting process related to the characteristic part 020SH will be described with reference to FIG. 11-2. FIG. 11-2 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect mode setting process related to the characteristic part 020SH. The effect mode setting process is a process executed in the special figure hit waiting process of S173 in the effect control process process shown in FIG.

In FIG. 11B, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a big hit start designation command has been received (step 020SHS11). When the big hit start designation command (the first big hit start designation command or the second big hit start designation command) is received (step 020SHS11: YES), that is, when the big hit occurs, the CP for effect control
U120 judges whether it is a probability variation big hit (step 020SHS12). When it is not the probability variation big hit (step 020SHS12: NO), that is, when it is the 2R normal big hit or the 6R normal big hit, the effect control CPU 120 determines to control the effect mode to the chance time mode (step 020SHS14), A series of processing ends. In the case of the 2R normal big hit, the effect control CPU 120 may determine an effect mode (an effect mode separately prepared) for notifying the low probability/high base state.

On the other hand, in step 020SHS12, if it is a probability variation big hit (step 020SHS
HS12: NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is a 6R certainty variation big hit (step 020SHS13). 6R probability variation big hit (step 020SHS13
: YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines to control the effect mode to the chance time mode by shifting to step 020SHS14. That is, the effect control CPU 120 executes a common effect (chance mode) in the case of the normal big hit and in the case of the 6R probability variation big hit. On the other hand, when it is not the 6R probability variation big hit (step 020SHS1
3: NO), the CPU 120 for effect control determines to control the effect mode to the small hit RUSH mode (step 020SHS15), and ends the series of processes.

In step 020SHS11, when the big hit start designation command is not received (
(Step 020SHS11: NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the small hit start designation command has been received (step 020SHS16). When the small hit start designation command is received (step 020SHS16: YES), the effect control CPU 12
0 ends the series of processes. On the other hand, if the small hit start designation command has not been received (step 020SHS16: NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a predetermined period has elapsed (step 020SHS17). In step 020SHS17, the effect control CPU 120 does not receive a command designating to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state, and waits for the reception of the command (“in step 020SHS17”).
(Corresponding to “predetermined period”) has elapsed.

In step 020SHS17, when the predetermined period has not elapsed (step 020
SHS17: NO), production control CPU120 ends a series of processing. When the predetermined period has elapsed (step 020SHS17: YES), that is, when it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "miss", the effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the effect high base number counter to "0". Or not (step 020SHS18). When the value of the high base number counter for production is "0" (step 020SHS18: YES)
The production control CPU 120 ends the series of processes. When the value of the effect high base number counter is not "0" (step 020SHS18: NO), the effect control CPU 120 subtracts "1" from the effect high base number counter (step 020SHS19).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the value of the effect high base number counter has become “0” (step 020SHS20). When the value of the production high base number counter is not "0" (step 020SHS20: NO), the production control CPU 12
0 ends the series of processes. On the other hand, when the value of the effect high base number counter becomes “0” (step 020SHS20: YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines to control the effect mode to the normal mode (step 020SHS21), and a series of steps. The process ends.

In the effect mode setting process shown in FIG. 11-2, the process of steps 020SHS12 to 14 is common when the high probability/high base state or the low probability/high base state is controlled after the jackpot game is executed. It is controlled to the chance time mode which is a production. For this reason,
It is possible to prevent the player from deciding whether the high probability/high base state is controlled or the low probability/high base state is controlled.

(Example of display control processing corresponding to variable display related to characteristic part 020SH)
Next, with reference to FIG. 11C, an example of the variable display correspondence display (hold display and active display) control processing related to the characteristic portion 020SH will be described. FIG. 11-3 shows a characteristic part 020SH.
5 is a flowchart showing an example of a variable display compatible display control process according to the present invention. The variable display correspondence display control process is a process executed in the prefetching advance notice setting process of S161 in the effect control process process shown in FIG.

In FIG. 11C, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the start winning award designation command is received (step 020SHS31). When the start winning award designation command (the first valid starting award winning designation command or the second valid starting award winning designation command) has not been received (step 020SHS31: NO), the effect control CPU 120 ends the series of processes. When the start winning award designation command is received (step 020SHS31: YES), the initial color which is the display mode when the hold display is started is determined (step 020SHS32).
), the final color which is the final display mode of the variable display correspondence display (hold display and active display) is determined (step 020SHS33). The initial color determination table and the final color determination table described below are used in the determination of the initial color and the final color.

(Initial color determination table and final color determination table for variable display)
FIG. 11D is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an initial color determination table and a final color determination table for variable display correspondence display. In FIG. 11D, (A) shows the initial color determination table, and (B)
) Indicates a final color determination table. In (A), the display mode indicates the display mode when the variable display corresponding display (hold display) is started. Further, in (B), the display mode shows the display mode of the variable display corresponding display (active display) to be finally displayed.

In the characteristic part 020SH, the display mode of the variable display corresponding display is such that the variable display is being executed, the variable display is started (during so-called hold shift), or the small hit game is being executed in the chance time mode. It can be changed at the change timing. In (A) and (B), there are four display modes, "red", "green", "blue", and "gray". The display mode of "ash" is a normal display mode. The display modes of "red", "green", and "blue" are special display modes different from the normal display modes.

Further, in (A) and (B), the variation pattern indicates any one of "big hit", "SP (super) reach loss", and "other loss". Here, in the characteristic part 020SH, mainly in the chance time mode (high-probability/high-base state or low-probability/high-base state), a description will be given. Therefore, in FIG. The variation patterns (variation patterns shown in FIGS. 10-8(E) and 10-9(H)) used in the state or the low probability/high base state will be described as an example.

The variation pattern of “big hit” is, for example, the second variation pattern #13, which has a variation time of 2 minutes.
#28. In the second variation patterns #13 and #28, a decorative design showing a big hit is stopped and displayed after SP reach. The variation pattern of “SP reach loss” is, for example, a variation time of 2
The second variation patterns #09, #12, #24, and #27. Second variation pattern #0
In 9, #12, #24, and #27, the decorative pattern indicating the loss is stopped and displayed after the SP reach. The variation pattern of "other loss" is, for example, the second variation with a variation time of 1 second or 5 seconds.
The fluctuation patterns are #07, #08, #22, and #23.

Further, the "other loss" variation pattern is the second variation pattern #10, #11, #25, # which is selected when the variation time is 1 second or 5 seconds and it is determined that the small hit is made. 26
including. Second variation pattern #07, #08, #22, #2 having a variation time of 1 second or 5 seconds
In 3 and the second variation patterns #10, #11, #25, and #26, the variable display mode of the decorative pattern does not become the SP reach mode, and the fixed decorative pattern of the combination of the lost symbols is stopped and displayed. In addition, in the second variation patterns #07, #08, #22, #23 and the second variation patterns #10, #11, #25, #26 with the variation time of 1 second or 5 seconds, the normal reach effect is produced. The fixed decorative design of the combination of the loss of the reach mode may be stopped and displayed.

As shown in (B), in the case of the variation pattern of "big hit", the display mode of the final color is "red".
Is most easily selected, then “green” is most easily selected, then “blue” is most easily selected, and “ash” is most difficultly selected. Further, as shown in (B), in the case of the variation pattern of "SP reach loss", "green" is most easily selected as the display mode of the final color, "red" is easily selected next, and "blue" is next selected. It is easy to select, and "ash" is the most difficult to select. Further, as shown in (B), in the case of the variation pattern of "other loss",
As for the display mode of the final color, "grey" is most easily selected, "blue" is most easily selected, "green" is most easily selected, and "red" is most difficultly selected. Therefore, when the jackpot expectation of the display mode is represented by an inequality sign, “red”>“green”>“blue”>“grey”.

On the other hand, as shown in (A), in any of the variation patterns, "grey" is most easily selected, "blue" is most easily selected, and "green" is then selected as the initial color display mode. It is easy to get rid of, and "red" is the most difficult to select. As a result, at the timing of changing the display mode, it is possible to gradually change from the display mode having low expectations to the display mode having high expectations. Further, comparing (A) and (B) with respect to the variation pattern of "other loss", (B) has a display mode ("blue" and "green") with a higher degree of expectation.
Is easier to select. As a result, even in the case of the variation pattern of "other loss", it is possible to gradually change from a display mode with low expectations to a display mode with high expectations. In addition, in the characteristic part 020SH, the so-called effect deterioration in which the display mode is changed to a display mode with low expectation does not occur.

Returning to FIG. 11C, when the effect control CPU 120 determines the initial color and the final color, it compares the expected degree of the display manner of the determined initial color and the final color, and determines the final degree rather than the expected degree of the display manner of the initial color. It is determined whether or not the degree of expectation of the color display mode is high (step 020SHS34). When the expectation degree indicated by the final color display mode is lower than the expectation degree indicated by the initial color display mode (step 020SHS34: NO), the effect control CPU 120 starts variable display correspondence display according to the initial color display mode. (Step 020SHS37). If the expectation level indicated by the final color display mode is lower than the expectation level indicated by the initial color display mode, and if a change effect that changes the display mode of the variable display correspondence is performed, the effect will be lowered. Therefore, the change effect is not performed by shifting to step 020SHS37.

On the other hand, in step 020SHS34, when the expectation level indicated by the final color display mode is higher than the expectation level indicated by the initial color display mode (step 020SHS34: YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines the final color display mode. , In a predetermined storage area provided in the RAM 122 (step 020SHS35).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 sets a change flag indicating that a change effect for changing the display mode of the variable display correspondence display is performed (step 020SHS36). Next, the effect control CPU 120 starts the variable display correspondence display (hold display) in the display mode of the initial color (step 020SHS37), and ends the series of processes.

(An example of suggestive effect execution processing performed by the effect control CPU 120 when the small hit game state is controlled)
Next, with reference to FIG. 11-5 and FIG. 11-6, an example of a suggestion effect execution process performed by the effect control CPU 120 when the small hitting game state is controlled will be described. Fig. 11-5
And FIG. 11-6 shows the CPU 120 for effect control when the game is controlled in the small hitting game state.
It is a flow chart which shows an example of the suggestion production execution processing which is performed. 11-5 and 11-
The suggested effect execution process shown in 6 is a process executed in the special figure hit waiting process of S173 in the effect control process process shown in FIG.

In FIG. 11-5, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a small hit start designation command has been received (step 020SHS51). When the small hit start designation command has not been received (step 020SHS51: NO), the effect control CPU 120 ends the series of processes. When the small hit start designation command is received (step 020SHS5
1: YES), it is determined whether or not the effect mode is controlled to the chance time mode (first KT state) (step 020SHS52). When the effect mode is controlled to the chance time mode (step 020SHS52: YES), the effect control CPU 120
It is determined whether or not the effect mode is controlled to the small hit RUSH mode (step 020).
SHS53).

When the production mode is controlled to the small hit RUSH mode (step 020SHS53
: YES), the effect control CPU 120 makes settings for executing an effect (effect to notify the small hit) according to the small hit RUSH mode (step 020SHS54), and ends the series of processes. On the other hand, when the effect mode is not controlled to the small hit RUSH mode (step 020SHS53: NO), that is, when the effect mode is controlled to the normal mode, the effect control CPU 120 causes the effect (missing) according to the normal mode. Rendering: The decorative pattern that is stopped and displayed due to the combination of loses is continuously displayed) is set (step 020SHS55), and a series of processes is ended.

In step 020SHS52, when the effect mode is controlled to the chance time mode (step 020SHS52: YES), the effect control CPU 120 sets a change flag indicating that a change effect that changes the display mode of the variable display correspondence display is performed. It is determined whether or not it has been performed (step 020SHS56). When the change flag is not set (step 020SHS56: NO), the effect control CPU 120 causes step 020S.
Move to HS63. On the other hand, if the change flag is set (step 020SHS
56: YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the display mode of the hold display at the present time is the final color (step 020SHS57).

When the display mode of the hold display at the present time is the final color (step 020SHS57:YE
S), the CPU 120 for effect control moves to step 020SHS63. On the other hand, when the display mode of the hold display at the present time is not the final color (step 020SHS57: NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines the presence or absence of the hold change suggestion effect (step 020SHS5).
8). In the determination of the presence or absence of the pending change suggesting effect, a pending change suggesting effect determination table described below is used.

FIG. 11-7 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a determination table for various suggestive effects. Figure 11-7 (
A) shows a pending change suggestive effect determination table. The hold change suggestion effect determination table is a table for determining one of “with hold change suggestion effect” and “without hold change suggestion effect”. “With hold change suggestion effect” means that after performing the hold change suggestion effect (
For example, at the start of the next variable display), a series of change effects in which the display mode of the hold display is changed are shown. "No hold change suggestion effect" indicates that the hold change suggestion effect is not performed and the display mode of the hold display does not change (no change effect is performed).

In FIG. 11-7(A), the determination rate of “with hold change suggestion effect” is higher than the determination rate of “without hold change suggestion effect”. For this reason, in the small hitting game state, when the hold display does not change to the display mode of the final color, the hold change suggesting effect is easily performed. It should be noted that the display mode of the hold display is changed to the display mode showing the expectation degree that is one step higher by performing the hold change suggestion effect. Specifically, for example, if the display mode of the hold display at the present time is "gray", it changes to "blue", and if the display mode of the hold display at this time is "blue", it changes to "green". I will.

The display mode of the pending display after the change is not limited to the display mode in which the expectation is increased by one step, and may be the display mode in which the expectation is increased by two steps or the display mode in which the expectation is increased by three steps. Good. Specifically, the display mode for changing the display mode of the hold display may be a display mode that is less than or equal to the degree of expectation indicated by the final color. For example, when there are a plurality of display modes before reaching the display mode of the final color. (For example, if the initial color is "gray" and the final color is "red"), select one from multiple display modes ("blue", "green", "red"). You may do so.

Further, in the embodiment relating to the characteristic part 020SH, regarding whether or not to perform a change effect that changes the display mode of the variable display corresponding display, for example, when performing a variable display or a small hit game,
Although it is decided to decide each time, it is not limited to this. For example, a scenario (story) indicating the timing of performing the change effect until reaching the final color may be determined in advance, and by referring to the scenario, whether or not to perform the change effect may be determined. Further, by including the transition of the display mode in the scenario, by referring to the scenario, whether or not the change effect is performed and the color after the change may be determined.

Returning to FIG. 11-5, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to carry out the hold change suggestion effect (step 020SHS59). When the pending change suggestion effect is not performed (step 020
SHS59: NO), the effect control CPU 120 moves to step 020SHS63. On the other hand, when performing the pending change suggestion effect (step 020SHS59: YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the display mode after the change of the pending display is the final color (step 020SHS60). Specifically, in step 020SHS60, a CP for effect control
The U 120 refers to the display mode of the final color stored in the predetermined storage area of the RAM 122, and determines whether the display mode of the pending display after the change is the final color.

When the display mode of the hold display after the change is not the final color (step 020SHS60: NO
), CPU120 for production control transfers to step 020SHS62. On the other hand, when the display mode of the pending display after the change is the final color (step 020SHS60: YES), the effect control CPU 120 resets the change flag (step 020SHS61). Then, the effect control CPU 120 makes settings for executing the pending change suggestion effect (step 020SHS62), and ends the series of processes. It should be noted that the pending change suggestion effect is a series of effects including a first incentive effect, a second inspiring effect, and an action effect, for example, which will be described later with reference to FIG. 11-10.

In FIG. 11-6, in step 020SHS64, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not there is a set value suggestion effect (step 020SHS63). In the determination of the presence or absence of the set value suggestive effect, a set value suggestive effect determination table described below is used.

FIG. 11-7(B) shows a set value suggestive effect determination table. The set value suggestive effect determination table is a table for determining the presence or absence of the set value suggestive effect and the type of the set value suggestive effect for each set value. In FIG. 11-7(B), “setting value” indicates any of “1” to “6”.

Also, the "type" of the set value suggestive effect is "the odd number setting suggestion" which indicates that the set value is an odd number setting, "the even number setting suggestion" which indicates that the set value is an even number setting, and the set value Is "4
“There are four or more set values,” which indicates that the value is “or more”. The "odd setting suggestion" effect is an effect that can be determined when the set value is an odd number (any one of "1", "3", and "5"). The effect of "even number setting suggestion" is an effect that can be determined when the set value is an even number (either "2", "4", or "6"). For the production of "indication of 4 or more setting values", the setting value is 4 or more (
This is an effect that can be determined in the case of "4", "5", or "6").

Further, the set value suggesting effect has different effect modes depending on the type, for example, different background images. The background image is, for example, an image showing morning in the case of the effect of "odd setting suggestion", an image showing daytime in the case of the effect of "even number suggestion", and an effect of "implication of setting value 4 or more". If
It is an image showing night.

As shown in the setting value suggesting effect determination table, "no setting value suggesting effect" is determined at the highest rate regardless of whether the "setting value" is "1" to "6". As a result, the set value suggestion effect can be prevented from being performed frequently, and the player can be prevented from easily guessing the set value.

In addition, the effect of "odd setting suggestion" is determined at a higher rate as the "setting value" increases to "1", "3", and "5". Therefore, it is possible to suggest that the setting value is likely to be "5" by performing the effect of "indication of odd number setting". Similarly, the effect of "even number suggestion" is as the "set value" increases to "2", "4", "6",
Determined at a high rate. Therefore, it is possible to suggest that the setting value is likely to be "6" by performing the "indication of even number setting" effect. Further, the effect of “indication of setting value 4 or more” is determined at a higher rate as the “setting value” becomes higher at “4”, “5”, and “6”. Therefore, the effect of “indication of setting value 4 or more” is performed, and thus the setting value becomes “
It can be suggested that it is likely to be “6”.

Returning to FIG. 11-6, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to perform the set value suggestion effect as a result of determining the presence or absence of the set value suggestion effect in step 020SHS63 (step 020SHS64). When performing a setting value suggestion effect (step 020SHS64: YES)
The effect control CPU 120 makes settings for executing the set value suggestion effect (step 0).
20SHS65), and a series of processing ends. In addition, the setting value suggestive effect is, for example,
As will be described later with reference to FIGS. 11-12, this is a series of effects including a first fanning effect and a second fanning effect. On the other hand, when the set value suggestion effect is not performed (step 020SHS64: NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines the presence or absence of the probability variation effect (step 020SHS66). In determining whether or not there is a probability variation inducement effect, a probability variation inducement determination table described below is used.

FIG. 11-7(C) shows a probability variation suggestion effect determination table. The probability variation suggestion effect determination table is a table for determining the presence or absence of the probability variation suggestion effect and the type of the probability variation suggestion effect for each of the high probability state and the low probability state. In FIG. 11-7(C), the “probability state” is a probabilistic state (high probability/high base state) “high probability” and a non-probable state (low probability/high base state) “low probability variation”. Indicates either In addition, the types of probabilistic suggestion productions are "high probability", which indicates that there is a high probability that the probability is high, and "high probability", which is lower than "high probability". There are three types: "suggesting possibility" and "suggesting possibility" that the probability of the high probability state is lower than "suggesting possibility".

As shown in the probability variation suggestion effect determination table, the "probability state" is "high probability" and "low probability".
In either case, “no probability change suggestive effect” is determined at the highest rate. This allows
It is possible to prevent the probability change suggestive effect from being performed frequently, and to prevent the player from easily guessing whether the player is controlled to a high probability state or a low probability state. ..

Further, as shown in the probability variation suggestion effect determination table, when the "probability state" is "high probability", the proportion of "no probability probability suggestion effect" is lower than in the case of "low probability", That is, the probability that any kind of probability change suggestive effect is determined is high. Thereby, it is possible to suggest that the probability change control is highly likely to be controlled in the high probability state.

When the "probability state" is "high probability", the effect of "indicating a high possibility" is most easily determined, and the effect of "indicating a high possibility" is then easily determined, which indicates "low possibility". Is difficult to determine. When the "probability state" is "low probability", the effect of "indicating a small possibility" is most likely to be determined, and then the effect of "indicating a possibility" is most likely to be determined, which indicates "high possibility". Is difficult to determine. In this way, it is possible to suggest that there is a high possibility that the high-probability state is controlled when the effect of "indicating a high possibility" is performed. In addition, if the production of "indication of possibility" is performed, is it controlled to a high probability state?
It is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine whether or not it is controlled to a low probability state. Further, when the effect of "indicating a small possibility" is performed, it is possible to suggest that the possibility of being controlled to the low probability state is high.

Returning to FIG. 11-6, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to perform the probability variation suggestion effect as a result of determining whether or not the probability variation suggestion effect is performed in step 020SHS66 (step 02).
0SHS67). When the probability variation suggestion effect is performed (step 020SHS68: YES), the effect control CPU 120 performs setting for executing the probability variation suggestion effect (step 020SH).
S69), and a series of processing ends. The details of the probable change suggestion production are shown in FIG. 11-13.
As will be described later using, it is a series of effects including a first fanning effect and a second fanning effect. on the other hand,
When the probability variation suggestion effect is not performed (step 020SHS68: NO), the effect control CPU 1
20 determines whether or not all the final colors of the pending storage during the pending display are determined to be gray (
Step 020SHS69). Specifically, in step 020SHS69, the effect control CPU 120 refers to the display mode of the last color of each hold storage stored in the predetermined storage area of the RAM 122, so that the last color of the hold storage being displayed is determined. Judge whether all are determined to be gray.

When the final color of the pending storage in the pending display is not determined to be all gray (step 020S)
HS69: NO), that is, when it is determined that at least one of the hold memories in the hold display is the special display mode, the effect control CPU 120 causes the first fan effect (( of FIG. 11-10). (See C)) is set (step 020SHS73),
A series of processing ends. On the other hand, if all the final colors of the pending storage during the pending display are determined to be gray (step 020SHS69: YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines the presence or absence of the goose pending change suggesting effect (step 020SHS70). Gase hold change suggestion production,
It is a pending change suggestion effect that is executed even if the display mode of the pending display does not change,
As a result, the pending change suggestion effect is a series of effects that become a gaffe effect. In the determination of the presence/absence of a goose hold change suggestion effect, a goose hold change suggestion effect determination table described below is used.

FIG. 11-7(D) shows a gaze hold change suggestion effect determination table. The gasse hold change suggestion effect determination table is a table for determining one of “with gaze hold change suggestion effect” and “without gase hold change suggestion effect”. "There is a change suggestion change on hold"
Indicates that the display mode of the hold display does not change after performing the hold change suggesting effect (for example, at the start of the next variable display). “No goose hold change suggestion effect” indicates that the hold change suggestion effect is not performed and the display mode of the hold display does not change (the change effect is not performed).

The determination rate of “with gasse hold change suggestion effect” is higher than the determination rate of “without gase hold change suggestion effect”. Therefore, in the small hitting game state, the effect can be made lively by the goose hold change suggesting effect.

In the characteristic part 020SH, as the galleries effect, a gasse hold change suggestion effect is executed, but it may be possible to execute a gasse set value suggestion effect that is not performed as if the set value suggestion effect is performed. It is also possible to be able to execute a gasse probability change suggestion effect that does not appear to be performed when the suggestion effect is performed.

Returning to FIG. 11-6, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to perform the goose hold change suggestion effect as a result of determining whether or not the goose hold change suggestive effect is made in step 020SHS70 (step 020SHS71). In the case of performing an effect suggesting a change in the hold-in-game (step 020S
(HS71: YES), the effect control CPU 120 makes settings for executing the goose hold change suggestion effect (step 020SHS72), and ends the series of processes. Note that, the details of the gasse hold change suggesting effect are a series of effects including a first fanning effect, a second fanning effect, and an action effect, which will be described later with reference to FIGS. 11-11. On the other hand, in the case where the gasse hold change suggestion effect is not performed (step 020SHS71: NO), the effect control CPU 120 sets the step 020.
Move to SHS74.

By the above process, during the chance time mode (high probability/high base state or low probability/
In the small hit game state in (high base state), hold change suggestion effect, set value suggestion effect,
It is possible to execute any one of the probabilistic suggestion effects and the suggestion effects.

(Example of change effect execution process of variable display corresponding display performed by effect control CPU 120 during variable display)
Next, with reference to FIG. 11-8, an example of the change effect execution process of the variable display corresponding display performed by the effect control CPU 120 during the variable display will be described. FIG. 11-8 is a flowchart showing an example of the change effect execution process of the variable display corresponding display performed by the effect control CPU 120 during the variable display. The change effect execution process of the variable display corresponding display shown in FIG. 11-8 is a process executed in the variable display start waiting process of S171 in the effect control process process shown in FIG.

In FIG. 11-8, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a change flag indicating that a change effect for changing the display mode of the variable display correspondence display is set is set (step 020SHS101). When the change flag is not set (step 020SH
(S101: NO), the CPU 120 for effect control ends a series of processes. On the other hand, when the change flag is set (step 020SHS101: YES), the effect control CPU
The determination unit 120 determines whether the display mode of the variable display correspondence display at the present time is the final color (step 020SHS102).

When the display mode of the variable display correspondence display at the present time is the final color (step 020SHS1
02: YES), the effect control CPU 120 ends the series of processes. On the other hand, when the display mode of the variable display correspondence display at the present time is not the final color (step 020SHS102: NO)
), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the target variable display correspondence display is active display (step 020SHS103). When the target variable display correspondence display is the active display (step 020SHS103: YES), the effect control CPU 120 makes settings for forcibly executing the display mode of the final color for the active display (step 020SHS107). ).

Here, in step 020SHS107, since the display mode of the active display is changed from the current display mode to the display mode of the final color, the expectation level may be changed to a display mode in which the level of expectation is increased by one step. In some cases, the display may change to a display mode in which the degree is increased by two steps or more. On the other hand, when the target variable display compatible display is not the active display (step 020SH
S103: NO), and it is determined whether to change the display mode of the hold display (step 020).
SHS 104). In addition, the rate of determining to change the display mode of the hold display is, for example, the determination rate of changing the hold display with a hold change suggesting effect during a small hit game (FIG. 11-7 (A
The ratio is the same as the determination ratio of the pending change suggesting effect shown in ): 70/100), but may be different.

Then, when the effect control CPU 120 does not change the display mode of the hold display as a result of the determination in step 020SHS104 (step 020SHS105: NO), the effect control CPU 120 ends the series of processes. On the other hand, when changing the display mode of the hold display (
(Step 020SHS105: YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the display mode after the change of the hold display is the final color (step 020SHS106). Specifically, in step 020SHS106, the effect control CPU 120 refers to the display mode of the final color stored in the predetermined storage area of the RAM 122, and determines whether the display mode of the pending display after the change is the final color. To judge.

When the display mode of the pending display after the change is the final color (step 020SHS106: YE
S), the setting for executing the change effect of changing to the display mode of the final color is performed for the hold display (step 020SHS107). And CPU120 for production control resets a change flag (step 020SHS108), and complete|finishes a series of processes. Step 02
In 0SHS106, when the display mode of the changed hold display is not the final color (step 020SHS106: NO), the effect control CPU 120 changes the changed display display mode to a display mode with a one-step higher expectation. Make settings for execution (step 02
0SHS109), and a series of processing ends.

It should be noted that the change effect that changes the display mode of the hold display during the variable display and the effect that changes the display mode of the hold display with the hold change suggestion effect during the small hit game are different effects. Specifically, the hold change suggestion effect is not performed in the effect of changing the display mode of the hold display during the variable display.

(Example of transition of effect screen during small hit RUSH mode)
Next, an example of the transition of the effect screen in the small hit RUSH mode will be described with reference to FIG. 11-9. In addition, in FIG. 11-9, during the small hit RUSH mode (high probability/second
Shows the transition of the effect screen when the small hit game is executed in the (KT state). FIG. 11-9 is an explanatory view showing an example of the transition of the effect screen in the small hit RUSH mode.

FIG. 11-9(A) shows a variable display in the small hit RUSH mode. Specifically, the decorative design 020SH200 and the small design 020SH201 are variably displayed on the image display device 5. In the small hit RUSH mode, only the small design 020SH201 may be displayed without displaying the decorative design 020SH200. In displaying the screen shown in (A), the CPU 120 for effect control controls the display result and the variation pattern (for example, the second variation pattern #32 in FIG. 10-9) specified by the effect control command received from the main board 11.
) Or based on the game state, display result of variable display of decorative pattern (fixed decorative pattern), mode of variable display of decorative pattern, reach effect and various notice effects, execution of various effects such as effect mode according to game condition Whether or not, its mode, execution start timing, etc. are determined, and variable display of the decorative design is executed based on the determination result.

Further, in (A), a total prize ball number display 020SH204 is displayed. Total prize ball display 0
20SH204 shows the total number of prize balls in consecutive chan including the small hit RUSH mode. Also,(
In A), in the upper right of the display area of the image display device 5, a notification image including the characters “right hit” is displayed as a notification image corresponding to the right hit notification. It should be noted that this notification image may include an image showing a right-pointing arrow in order to encourage rightward stroke. Further, in FIG. 11-9, the hold display and the active display are not displayed, but these may be displayed. On the screen shown in (A), when the variable display stop timing comes, the screen changes to the screen shown in (B).

FIG. 11-9(B) shows a screen at the time of fluctuation stop when it is determined that the small hit is in the small hit RUSH mode. Specifically, the image display device 5 displays a small hit notification image 020SH202 indicating a small hit, and the small symbol 020SH201 is stopped at a fixed symbol "1, 3, 5" which is a combination indicating a small hit game. It is displayed. In displaying the screen shown in (B), the effect control CPU 120, for example, from the effect control pattern to the decorative pattern 020SH2.
In response to the end code indicating the variable display end of 00 (and the small pattern 020SH201) being read, or receiving a command from the main board 11 to stop and display the fixed decorative pattern 020SH200, etc. The fixed decorative pattern 020SH200, which is the display result of the decorative pattern 020SH200, is stopped and displayed. In (B), when the symbol fixed period elapses, the screen transitions to the screen shown in (C).

FIG. 11-9 (C) shows the screen during the small hit game in the small hit determination in the small hit RUSH mode. Specifically, in the small hitting game state, when there is a prize in the special winning opening, the image display device 5 shows a winning effect image 020SH203 showing the number of prize balls (for example, 10 balls).
Is displayed. Further, the total prize ball number display 020SH204 shows a number obtained by adding 10 balls in comparison with (B) of FIG. 11-9.

FIG. 11-9 (D) shows a screen at the time of winning the special winning opening of the second ball during the small hit game. In the small hitting game state, if there is a winning in the special winning opening of the second ball, the image display device 5
In addition, a winning effect image 020SH203( showing the number of prize balls (for example, 10 balls) is displayed.
(Two images in total) are displayed. In addition, the total prize ball number display 020SH204 indicates a number obtained by adding 10 balls as compared with (C) of FIG. 11-9. The same applies to the third and subsequent balls, and when a special winning opening is won, the image display device 5 further displays a winning effect image 020S.
H203 is additionally displayed.

When displaying the screens shown in (C) and (D), the effect control CPU 120 has the second KT state flag set when the special winning opening winning award designation command (effect control command) is set (that is, , High probability/during the second KT state), 10 is added to the value of the prize ball number counter and the winning effect image 020SH203 is displayed on the image display device 5. When the small hit game ends, the screen changes to (E) and the next variable display is started.

As shown in FIG. 11-9, when it is determined that the small hit game is executed in the small hit determination in the small hit RUSH mode, the small hit notification image 020SH202 and the small symbol 020SH201 indicating the small hit are stopped and displayed, During the small hitting game, the winning effect image 020SH203 is displayed according to the winning in the special winning opening. That is, high probability/second KT
In the state, when the small hit game state is controlled, the small hit notification image 020SH202, the small symbol 020SH201, and the winning effect image 020SH203 corresponding to the control of the small hit game state are displayed. Therefore, the interest of the small hit game in the small hit RUSH mode can be improved.

(Example of transition of suggestive production during chance time mode)
Next, an example of suggestive effects during the chance time mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-10 to 11-13. In addition, in FIG. 11-10 to FIG. 11-13, the transition of the effect screen when the small hit game is executed during the chance time mode (high probability/during the first KT state or low probability/during the first KT state) Show. Note that in the description of FIGS. 11-10 to 11-13, the same content as that described in FIG. 11-9 will be denoted by the same reference numeral, and description thereof will be omitted.

(One example of transition of effects for changing the display mode of the hold display during the chance time mode)
FIG. 11-10 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the transition of the effect of changing the display mode of the hold display during the chance time mode. FIG. 11-11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the transition of the galleries effect of the effect of changing the display mode of the hold display during the chance time mode. Note that FIG. 11-1
0 and (A) to (E) of FIGS. 11-11 show similar screens.

11A and 11A show variable display during the chance time mode. Specifically, the image display device 5 includes a decorative pattern 020SH200 and a small pattern 0.
20SH201 is variably displayed. Further, on the image display device 5, an active display 020SH205 and a hold display 020SH206 are displayed as variable display corresponding displays. In the chance time mode, only the small symbol 020SH201 may be displayed without displaying the decorative symbol 020SH200. In (A), the variable display compatible display is
Both show the usual display mode (for example, "gray").

In displaying the screen shown in (A), the effect control CPU 120 causes the display result and the variation pattern (for example, FIG. 10-) specified by the effect control command received from the main board 11.
Based on the second variation pattern #11 of 8 or the second variation pattern #26 of FIG. 10-9) and the game state, variable display of decorative symbols is executed. Further, when displaying the variable display corresponding display, the effect control CPU 120 determines the display mode of the variable display corresponding display based on the determination result of the prefetching notice effect, and changes the display mode according to the result of the determination. Display Corresponding display is displayed. When the variable display stop timing is reached on the screen shown in (A), (B)
Transition to the screen of.

FIGS. 11-10 and 11-11(B) show screens at the time of fluctuation stop when it is determined that the small hit is in the small hit determination in the chance time mode. Specifically, the image display device 5 is determined to be a small hit, but since a prize ball cannot be expected, the decorative pattern 020SH200 and the small hit notification image 020SH202 are both patterns showing a combination of a loss. It is stopped and displayed in the small hit notification image 020SH202 (Fig. 11-1).
0 (see (B)) is not displayed. In (B), when the symbol confirmation period elapses, (
The screen changes to that shown in C).

FIG. 11-10 and FIG. 11-11 (C) show a screen during the small hitting game in the chance time mode (inclination effect 1: step 1). Specifically, in the small hitting game state during the chance time mode, a suggestion effect (holding change suggestion effect, set value suggestion effect, and probability change suggestion effect) may be performed. Is displayed. The first fanning effect image 020SH211 is, for example, an image showing that a character appears. Further, the decorative pattern 020SH200 is deleted, and the small hit notification image 020S
H202 is stopped and displayed as it is with a symbol indicating a combination of the losses. In the small hitting game state during the chance time mode, there is almost no chance of winning the special winning opening. Even if the special winning opening is won in the small hitting game mode in the chance time mode, the winning effect image 020SH203 shown in FIG. 11-9(C) is not displayed.

FIG. 11-10 and FIG. 11-11 (D) show the screen during the small hit game in the chance time mode (inclination effect 2: step 2). Specifically, the image display device 5 includes (C
) The stirrer effect image 0 indicating that the suggestion effect (any one of the pending change suggestion effect, the set value suggestion effect, and the probability change suggestion effect) may be performed than the stirrer effect 1).
20SH212 is displayed. The second fanning effect image 020SH212 is an image that is a development of the first fanning effect image 020SH211, and is, for example, an image in which the character operates (an image in which the character swings a sword).

FIG. 11-10 and (E) of FIG. 11-11 show a pending change suggestive effect, and specifically,
The screen (action effect: step 3) during the small hit game in the chance time mode is shown. Specifically, the action effect image 020SH213 is displayed on the image display device 5. The action effect image 020SH213 is an image in which the second twist effect image 020SH212 is developed, and for example, the character acts on the hold display 020SH206 (the sword is on the hold display 020SH.
(Touching 206) image.

FIG. 11-10 (F) shows a change in the hold display in the chance time mode (step 4).
) Is shown. Specifically, on the image display device 5, the display mode of the hold display 020SH206 changes to a high-expectation display mode (for example, from "gray") at the timing of the hold shift 020SH214 at which the variable display of the decorative pattern 020SH200 is started. “Changed to “blue”) is displayed.
That is, as shown in (E), the action effect image 020SH213 in the small hitting game state.
Has acted on the hold display 020SH206, so that in (F) of FIG. 11-10,
A series of change effects in which the display mode of the hold display 020SH206 changes are performed. In addition, in FIG. 11-10, the display mode of the hold display 020SH206 is changed when the next variable display is started after the small hit game is finished, but it is not limited to this, for example, the small hit The display mode of the hold display 020SH206 may be changed during the game (before the start of the next variable display).

On the other hand, (F) of FIG. 11-11 shows a gaze effect (gase hold change suggestion effect) in which the display mode of the hold display in the chance time mode does not change. Specifically, decorative pattern 020SH
The case where the display mode of the hold display 020SH206 does not change to the high-expectation display mode even at the timing of the hold shift 020SH214 at which the variable display of 200 is started is shown. That is, as shown in (E), the effect display image 020SH213 (image showing a bow and arrow) has acted on the hold display 020SH206 in the small hitting game state, but the display mode of the hold display 020SH206 in (F) of FIG. 11-11. Will not change (the production will not develop).

As shown in FIG. 11-10 and FIG. 11-11, in the characteristic portion 020SH, when it is determined that the small hit game is executed in the small hit determination in the chance time mode, the decorative pattern 020SH200 and the small hit notification image 020SH202 Both are stopped and displayed with a symbol showing a combination of the loses, and during the small hitting game, a pending change suggesting effect (display of the effect effect image 020SH213) that suggests a content advantageous to the player can be executed. Also,
By the hold change suggestion effect or the goth hold change change suggestion effect shown in FIGS. 11-10 and 11-11, a change in the display mode of the hold display can be expected, and the small hit game state is controlled in the chance time mode. It is possible to effectively utilize the period of time. Therefore, the interest can be improved.

In addition, in (C) of FIG. 11-11, the first stirrer effect image 020SH211 is displayed, but the second stirrer effect image 020SH212 shown in (D) and the effect effect image 020SH213 shown in (E) are not displayed. In some cases. Further, in (D), there may be a case in which the second twist effect image 020SH212 is displayed but the action effect image 020SH213 is not displayed. Further, in (E), the action effect image 020S
In some cases, H213 does not act on the hold display 020SH206 (for example, an effect of displaying an image of a character flying to the upper left of the image display device 5).

Further, a first fanning effect image 020SH211, a second fanning effect image 020SH212,
For each image (or at least any one image) with the action effect image 020SH213, a plurality of display modes are prepared, and the hold display 020 is displayed according to these display modes.
The easiness of changing the display mode of the SH 206 may be different. Specifically, for each image, a display mode that is easily determined when the display mode of the hold display 020SH206 changes, and a display mode that is easily determined when the display mode of the hold display 020SH206 does not change,
Just prepare. Further, the display mode of the hold display 020SH206 may be changed without displaying the action effect image 020SH213, that is, without performing the hold change suggestion effect.

(An example of transition of set value suggestion effect in chance time mode)
FIG. 11-12 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the set value suggestive effect during the chance time mode. In addition, (A) to (D) of FIG. 11-12 are the same as ((A) to (D) of FIG.
The description is omitted because it is similar to A) to (D).

FIG. 11-12 (E) shows a screen (setting value suggestion effect) during the small hit game in the chance time mode. Specifically, the image display device 5 displays a set value suggestion image 020SH220 in which the background image indicates night. The night background image in the set value suggestion image 020SH220 is an image that suggests that the set value is 4 or more (see (B) in FIG. 11-7).
..

(F) of FIG. 11-12 shows that the small hit game is over and the next variable display is performed. It should be noted that in the set value suggestion effect shown in FIGS. 11-12, the set value suggestion image 020SH220 is displayed within the period in which the small hitting game state is controlled, but not limited to this, for example, the following Even after the variable display is started, the set value suggestion image 020SH220 may be continuously displayed.

As shown in FIG. 11-12, in the characteristic portion 020SH, when it is determined that the small hit game is executed in the small hit determination in the chance time mode, the decorative pattern 020SH2
00 and the small hit notification image 020SH202 are both stopped and displayed with a symbol indicating a combination of the loses, and the set value suggestion image 020SH220 is displayed during the small hit game. That is, in the characteristic part 020SH, in the high-probability/first KT state or the low-probability/first KT state, when the small hitting game state is controlled, a set value suggesting effect (setting value suggestion) that suggests a content advantageous to the player The display of the image 020SH220) can be executed. 11
By the set value suggesting effect shown in -12, it is possible to effectively utilize the period in which the small hitting game state is controlled in the chance time mode, and it is possible to improve the interest.

Even in the set value suggestion effect, a gasse effect may be performed as in the hold change suggestion effect. Specifically, in (C) of FIG. 11-12, there may be a case where the first fanning effect image 020SH211 is displayed, but the second fanning effect image 020SH212 shown in (D) is not displayed. Further, in (D), there may be a case where the second tilt effect image 020SH212 is displayed, but the set value suggestion image 020SH220 is not displayed.

Further, a first fanning effect image 020SH211, a second fanning effect image 020SH212,
A plurality of display modes are prepared for each image (or at least any one image) with the action effect image 020SH213, and the ease with which the set value suggestion effect is executed differs depending on these display modes. May be. Specifically, for each image, a display mode that is easily determined when the set value suggestive effect is executed and a display mode that is easily determined when the set value suggestive effect is not executed may be prepared.

(An example of transition of probabilistic change suggestion production in chance time mode)
FIG. 11-13 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of the probability variation suggestive effect during the chance time mode. In addition, (A) to (D) of FIG. 11-13 are (A) to (A) of FIG.
)-(D), the description is omitted. FIG. 11-13(E) shows a screen (probability change suggestion effect) during the small hit game in the chance time mode. Specifically, the image display device 5 displays a probability variation suggestion image 020SH230 in which three characters have appeared. The probability variation suggestion image 020SH230 in which three characters have appeared is an image showing that there is a high possibility that the high probability state is controlled (see (C) of FIG. 11-7).

(F) of FIG. 11-13 shows that the small hit game is over and the next variable display is being performed. In the probability variation suggestion effect shown in FIGS. 11-13, the probability variation suggestion image 020SH230 is displayed within the period in which the small hitting game state is controlled, but not limited to this, for example, the following variable display. The probability variation suggestion image 020SH230 may be continuously displayed even after the start of.

As shown in FIG. 11-13, in the characteristic portion 020SH, when it is determined that the small hit game is executed in the small hit determination in the chance time mode, the decorative pattern 020SH2
00 and the small hit notification image 020SH202 are both stopped and displayed with a symbol indicating a combination of the loses, and the probability variation suggestion image 020SH230 is displayed during the small hit game.
That is, in the characteristic portion 020SH, in the high-probability/first KT state or in the low-probability/first KT state, when the small hitting game state is controlled, the probability variation suggesting effect (probability variation suggestion image 020SH230 Is displayed) can be executed. By the probability variation suggestion effect shown in FIG. 11-13, it is possible to effectively utilize the period in which the small hitting game state is controlled in the chance time mode, and it is possible to improve the interest.

Even in the probability change suggestion effect, the same effect may be performed as in the hold change suggestion effect. Specifically, in (C) of FIG. 11-13, there may be a case where the first fanning effect image 020SH211 is displayed, but the second fanning effect image 020SH212 shown in (D) is not displayed. Further, in (D), there may be a case where the second twist effect image 020SH212 is displayed but the probability variation suggestion image 020SH230 is not displayed.

Further, a first fanning effect image 020SH211, a second fanning effect image 020SH212,
For each image (or at least any one image) with the action effect image 020SH213, a plurality of display modes are prepared, and the probability that the probability variation effect is executed differs depending on these display modes. May be. Specifically, for each image, a display mode that is easily determined when the probability variation suggestive effect is executed and a display mode that is easily determined when the probability variation suggestive effect is not executed may be prepared.

By each suggestive effect shown in FIGS. 11-10 to 11-13, it is possible to improve the interest in the small hitting game state in the chance time mode. Specifically, in the chance time mode in which the variable display of mainly 1.5 seconds is continuously executed, even if the small hit game of more than 1.8 seconds is executed, the small hit game is executed. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize that, and at the same time, it can be shown that the game is progressing smoothly. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable as if the game is stopped during the small hitting game in the first KT state, and in the first KT state, a light game (with good tempo). , A pleasant game) can be realized.

(About small hit opening timing and execution timing of various suggestive effects)
Next, the opening timing of the special variable winning ball device 17 in the small hit game and the execution timing of various suggestive effects will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 11-14 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the small hit opening timing and the execution timing of various suggestive effects. 11
-14, a variable display of the special symbol (second special symbol) determined to be a small hit in the small hit determination, and a small hit game (opening of the special variable winning ball device 17) executed thereafter are shown.

First, the variable display of special symbols and the small hit game will be described. As shown in FIGS. 11-14, in the first KT state, the variable display of the second special symbol is mainly executed. The variable display time (variation time) of the second special symbol in the first KT state is 1 second (second variation pattern #11 of FIG. 10-8, or FIG. 10 if the second reserved storage number is “1 or more”). -9 second variation pattern #26), and if the second number of pending storages is "0", 5 seconds (second variation pattern #10 in FIG. 10-8 or second variation pattern in FIG. 10-9). This is variation pattern #25). When the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped, the second special symbol (for example, a small hit symbol) is fixedly displayed until the symbol fixing period of 0.5 seconds (also referred to as a symbol fixing period) elapses.

Then, when the symbol determination period elapses, the small hit game state is controlled. The small hitting game state includes a fanfare period of 0.1 seconds, a predetermined opening period, and a small hitting ending period. Specifically, in the small hitting game state, after the small hitting fanfare period of 0.1 seconds has elapsed, the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened, and when a predetermined opening period (for example, 1.8 seconds) elapses,
The special variable winning ball device 17 is closed and the small hit ending period starts. When the small hit ending period has elapsed, the next variable display of the second special symbol is executed.

Next, the execution timing of the pending change suggesting effect (including the goose pending change suggesting effect) will be described. As shown in FIG. 11-14, when the small hit fanfare period elapses and the opening timing of the special variable winning ball device 17 comes, the first fanning effect (the first fanning effect image 0 in FIG. 11-10).
20SH211), a second fanning effect (display of a second fanning effect image 020SH212),
And action production (display of the image in which the action production image 020SH213 contacts the hold display 020SH206) is performed. Then, when changing the hold display (in the case of a hold change suggesting effect), the hold display changes at the timing when the next variable display of the second special symbol is executed (holding shift timing). On the other hand, in the case of the gasse hold change suggestion effect, the hold display does not change at the timing (timing of the hold shift) at which the next variable display of the second special symbol is executed, and the current display mode of the hold display is held.

In this way, in the characteristic portion 020SH, the effect of changing the display mode of the hold display over the small hit game and the variable display is performed. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine the shift from the small hit game state to the state in which the variable display is executed. Therefore, it can be shown that the game is progressing smoothly, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the progress of the game.

Next, the set value suggestion effect and the probability change suggestion effect will be described. In the description of FIGS. 11-14, the set value suggestive effect and the probability change suggestive effect are referred to as “set value suggestive effect and the like”. 11
As shown in -14, when the small hit fanfare period has elapsed and the opening timing of the special variable winning ball device 17 is reached, the first fanning effect (for example, the first fanning effect image 020S in FIG. 11-12) is generated.
H211 display), a second tilt effect (display of the second tilt effect image 020SH212), a set value suggestion effect, and the like (display of the set value suggestion image 020SH220, etc.) are performed. The set value suggestion effect and the like are executed until the closing timing of the special variable winning ball device 17, for example.

In this way, in the characteristic part 020SH, the set value suggesting effect and the like are performed in correspondence with the opening timing of the special variable winning ball device 17. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to pay attention to the opening of the special variable winning ball device 17, and to pay attention to the set value suggestion effect and the like. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the small hit game in which the game ball hardly wins, and it is possible to make the game appear to be progressing smoothly. Further, the period during which the small hitting game state is controlled can be effectively utilized by setting value suggestion effect, etc., and the interest during the small hitting game can be improved.

Further, in the characteristic part 020SH, each suggestion effect is made to start at the timing of opening the special variable winning ball device 17. Therefore, since each suggestion effect can be started immediately after shifting to the small hitting game state, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize that the small hitting game is being executed, and to the progress of the game. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

It should be noted that the timing at which each suggestive effect is executed may be a timing corresponding to the opening timing of the special variable winning ball device 17, specifically, if it is a timing including the opening of the special variable winning ball device 17. Good. For example, the start timing of each suggestive effect is not limited to the opening start timing of the special variable winning ball device 17, but may be the timing during the small hit fanfare period. As a result, since these effects can be started at the earliest timing after shifting to the small hitting game state, it is possible to make it more difficult for the player to recognize that the small hitting game is being executed.

Further, the start timing of each suggestive effect may be a timing during the symbol fixing period,
The timing may be during variable display of the second special symbol. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine the transition from the state in which the variable display is executed to the small hitting game state. Therefore, it can be shown that the game is progressing smoothly, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the progress of the game.

Further, the end timing of the set value suggestion effect is not limited to the closing timing of the special variable winning ball device 17, but may be the timing during the small hit ending period. As a result, since these effects can be executed until the end of the small hitting game state, the period during which the small hitting game state is controlled can be more effectively utilized.

Further, the end timing of each suggestive effect may be the timing during the variable display of the next second special symbol. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine the transition from the small hitting game state to the state in which the variable display is performed. Therefore, it can be shown that the game is progressing smoothly, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the progress of the game.

As described above, in the above-described embodiment, the interest of the game can be improved. Here, the supplement of interest will be specifically described. In the first KT state, for example, a shortening variation (1 second variation) and a small hitting game (decorative design stops with a lost design) are repeatedly executed. If no special effect is produced in the small hitting game state, it seems that the progress of the game is stopped in the small hitting game state. Therefore, in the first KT state (high base state), the game does not seem to proceed quickly and lightly, and the player may feel uncomfortable. Further, in the first KT state, the time during which the small hit game state is controlled may be wasted time for the player.

As described above, in the embodiment relating to the characteristic part 020SH, it is advantageous for the player when the small hitting game state is controlled in the first KT state (high probability/first KT state or low probability/first KT state). The suggestion effect suggesting the content (for example, one of the hold change suggestion effect, the set value suggestion effect, and the probability change suggestion effect) can be executed. Therefore, even if the small hit game is repeatedly executed in the first KT state in which the game balls hardly win the prize, it is possible to give the player the impression that the game is progressing smoothly, that is, the first KT.
It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the progress of the game by the small hit game in the state. In addition, since it is possible to effectively utilize the period during which the small hit game is executed in the first KT state, it is possible to prevent the period from becoming useless time for the player.

In addition, when the small hitting game state is controlled in the second KT state, an effect corresponding to the control of the small hitting game state (for example, display of the small hitting notification image 020SH202 and the winning effect image 020SH203 shown in FIG. 11-9). Made viable. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to improve the interest during the small hit game in the first KT state and the second KT state.

(Modification 1 of the characteristic part 020SH)
Next, a modified example 1 of the characteristic part 020SH will be described. In the above-described embodiment relating to the characteristic part 020SH, the configuration in which the characteristic part 020SH is applied to the so-called type of pachinko gaming machine 1 has been described. Instead of such a configuration, it is also possible to apply the characteristic portion 020SH to a so-called one-and-two mixed type pachinko gaming machine. Hereinafter, an example of specifications of a pachinko gaming machine of a mixed type will be described.

In the one-and-two mixed-type pachinko gaming machine, in the normal state (non-special state: low base state), mainly by left-handed, the variable display of the first special symbol (first special diagram game) is executed.
When the big hit symbol is derived and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol, the big hit game is executed.

In the determination based on the winning of the first starting winning opening, the small hit probability is constant regardless of the set value, and is 6298/65536 (about 1/100), for example. In addition, although the details will be described later, even if the small hit game is executed based on the winning in the first start winning hole, the game ball passes through a specific region (V region) in the special variable winning ball device 17. Things are almost unlikely to be expected.

In the determination based on the winning of the first starting winning opening, the jackpot probability differs depending on the set value. Here, an example of the jackpot probability for each set value based on the winning in the first starting winning opening will be shown below.

When the set value is "1", it is 329/65536 (about 1/199).
When the set value is "2", it is 346/65536 (about 1/189).
When the set value is "3", it is 366/65536 (about 1/179).
When the set value is "4", it is 387/65536 (about 1/169).
When the set value is "5", it is 412/65536 (about 1/159).
When the set value is "6", it is 439/65536 (about 1/149).

In the determination based on the winning of the first start winning opening, since the small hit probability is constant, by changing the loss probability according to the set value "1" to "6", the set value "1" ~ ". 6
It is possible to set the jackpot probability according to.

For example, in the first special figure game, when it is determined to execute the big hit game, according to the big hit type (with a predetermined probability), after the big hit game is executed, a special state (for example, a time saving state) is entered. .. When the big hit game is executed, depending on the kind of big hit, it may return to a normal state, for example, without shifting to a special state.

In the special state, for example, a game (mainly a second special figure game) is performed by a right-handed shooting operation aiming at the gate arranged on the right side of the game area and the second starting winning opening. The special state is a high base state, and specifically, the following controls (1) to (4) are performed.
(1) Control is performed such that the probability per ordinary figure is higher than in the normal state.
(2) The control is performed so that the opening time of the ordinary electric accessory is longer than that in the normal state.
(3) Control is performed to shorten the variation time of the universal figure game as compared with the normal state.
(4) Control is performed to shorten the variation time of the special symbol compared to the normal state.
As a result, the game ball easily enters the second starting winning opening, and the frequency of executing the second special figure game increases. The special state is controlled, for example, until the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times.

On the other hand, in the normal state, the controls (1) to (4) are not performed. Even if the player hits right in the normal state, the probability of hitting a normal figure is low, the opening time of the ordinary electric auditors is short, and the fluctuation time of the general game is long, so the second start winning hole To win
I can hardly expect it.

In the determination based on the winning of the second start winning opening, the small hit probability is constant regardless of the set value, and is, for example, 62986/65536 (about 96/100). The small hit probability in the determination based on the winning of the second starting winning opening and the small hit probability in the determination based on the winning of the first starting winning opening are different.

Further, in the determination based on the winning of the second starting winning opening, the jackpot probability varies depending on the set value. Here, an example of the jackpot probability for each set value based on the winning of the second starting winning opening will be shown below.

When the set value is "1", it is 329/65536 (about 1/199).
When the set value is "2", it is 346/65536 (about 1/189).
When the set value is "3", it is 366/65536 (about 1/179).
When the set value is "4", it is 387/65536 (about 1/169).
When the set value is "5", it is 412/65536 (about 1/159).
When the set value is "6", it is 439/65536 (about 1/149).

In the determination based on the winning of the second starting winning opening, since the small hit probability is constant, by changing the loss probability according to the set values "1" to "6", the set values "1" to "" 6
It is possible to set the jackpot probability according to.

As described above, in the determination based on the winning of the second starting winning opening, the small hit probability is 96/
Since it is 100, in the variable display in the special state (mainly the second special drawing game), the small hit symbol is easily derived and displayed. In the small hitting game state, the special variable winning ball device 17 arranged on the right side of the game area is opened, and the game ball is won in the special variable winning ball device 17 (small hitting attacker),
When a special area (so-called V area) provided in the special variable winning ball device 17 is passed, a big hit game is executed. Incidentally, in the small hitting game state in the special state, since the opening time of the special variable winning ball device 17 is longer than that in the normal state, it is easy to win the special variable winning ball device 17 and easily pass through the V area. Is becoming

In the special state (mainly the second special figure game), when the small hitting game state is controlled and the game ball passes through the V area until the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times, the special state is ended, The jackpot game is executed. Also, in the special state, even when it is determined that the big hit game is to be executed before the predetermined number of times of variable display is executed (even when the big hit symbol is derived and displayed)
Similarly, the special state is ended and the big hit game is executed. When the big hit game is executed, the special state is controlled again according to the big hit type (with a predetermined probability). in this way,
When the big hit game is executed in the special state (by the condominium), the player can expect many prize balls.

On the other hand, in the special state, even if the big hit game is executed before the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times, depending on the big hit type, it is not controlled to the special state and, for example, shifts to the normal state. In some cases. Also, in the special state, even when the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times, the normal state is entered. Specifically, in the special state, when the big hit game is not executed by the time the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, although the game ball is controlled to the small hit game state, the game ball has a special variable prize). If the player does not win in the ball device 17 or does not pass through the V area, or if the big hit symbol is not derived and displayed), the normal state is entered. As a result, the control of the special state ends, and the holiday home ends. Even in the pachinko gaming machine of the one-and-two-mix type, in the big hit game state and the small hit game state, for example, the variable display of the special symbol is not performed.

In such a pachinko gaming machine of mixed type 1, when the special hit state is controlled to the small hit game state, a special effect corresponding to the control of the small hit game state (special state) (for example, "small hit attacker"). (Display the image "Aim at the special variable winning ball device 17!") can be executed. This allows the player to expect a big hit in the small hit game in the special state.

Further, in the variable display of the first special figure game in the normal state (non-special state: low base state), a small hit symbol may be derived and displayed (small hit probability: about 1/100). In the small hit game in the normal state, the game is played by left-handing, and since the special variable winning ball device 17 is arranged in the right area, it is difficult to win the special variable winning ball device 17. .. Even if the player hits the ball to the right, it is difficult to win the special variable winning ball device 17 because the opening time of the special variable winning ball device 17 is short, and even if the player wins in the special variable winning ball device 17, V Since it is configured to hardly pass through the area, it is almost impossible to expect the game ball to pass through the V area.

In the modified example 1, in such a pachinko gaming machine of a mixed type, the normal state (
When the small hit game state (special state) is controlled in the non-special state), the characteristic portion 020S
The suggestive effect related to H may be executable. The suggestive effect is an effect that suggests a content advantageous to the player, and is, for example, an suggestive effect based on the determination result of the look-ahead determination, a set value suggestive effect, or the like. In addition, the suggestion effect based on the determination result of the look-ahead determination is, for example, a hold change suggestion effect, but is not limited to this, and an effect that suggests that hold storage information with a high expectation of a big hit is stored (for example, It is also possible to display a background image with a high degree of expectation or a character image).

Even in the special state, when the first reserved memory is stored, the small hit symbol may be derived and displayed in the variable display of the first special figure game. In this case, when it is configured to make it difficult for the small hit game to pass through the V area, when the small hit game is controlled, the suggestion effect related to the characteristic part 020SH may be executable.

According to the modified example 1, even if the small hitting game is executed in the normal state where the game balls hardly win the prize, it is possible to give the player the impression that the game is progressing smoothly, that is, the small state in the normal state. The winning game can prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the progress of the game. Therefore, according to the modified example 1, in the pachinko gaming machine of the one-and-two mixed type, it is possible to improve the interest during the small hitting game in the normal state. In addition, the one-and-two mixed-type pachinko gaming machine is not limited to the above-described specifications, and may have other specifications as long as a small hit game is executed in a normal state in which gaming balls hardly win.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification of the characteristic unit 020SH can be expressed as follows. It is a gaming machine capable of playing a game (pachinko gaming machine of a mixed type of one and two types), a gaming state control means for controlling a gaming state, and variable display of identification information (for example, a special symbol), and displayed A variable display executing means for deriving and displaying the result, and an effect executing means, the game state control means is an advantageous state advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit game state),
Special state different from the advantageous state (for example, small hit game state) and non-special state (for example,
A normal state) and a special state (feature 0 that is more easily controlled to the special state than the non-special state).
The special state according to the modified example 1 of 20SH: for example, a time saving state), the advantageous state and the special state are states in which the variable display is not performed, and the effect execution means is When the special state is controlled in the special state, it is possible to execute a special effect corresponding to the control of the special state (for example, display an image of "Aim at the small hit attacker (special variable winning ball device 17)!"). Yes, when being controlled to the special state in the non-special state, a suggestive effect that is a different effect from the special effect and suggests advantageous contents for the player (for example, a suggestive effect based on the determination result of the look-ahead determination or , Setting value suggestion production, etc.) can be executed.

(Modification 2 of Characteristic Part 020SH)
Next, a modified example 2 of the characteristic part 020SH will be described. In the above-described embodiment relating to the characteristic part 020SH, the configuration in which the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened once during the small hit has been described. In Modification 2, instead of such a configuration, or in addition to such a configuration, the special variable winning ball device 17 may be opened a plurality of times depending on the small hit type.

Specifically, the opening pattern of the special variable winning ball device 17 is a small hit C with the longest opening time.
In this case, the time is set to 1.8 seconds×1 time (see FIG. 10-14), but it is not limited to this. The opening pattern may be, for example, 0.9 seconds×2 times, 0.2 seconds×9 times, if the total opening time is 1.8 seconds or less when the opening time is the longest. Further, the suggestive effect of the content according to the opening pattern may be executable. Specifically, for example, a suggestive effect corresponding to opening for 0.9 seconds×2 times may be executed. In this way, even if the opening pattern is opened a plurality of times, the special variable winning ball device 17 can be realized by performing the suggestion effect according to the opening pattern.
It is possible to make it harder to focus on the opening of each and to focus on each suggestive effect.

(Modification 3 of Characteristic Part 020SH)
Next, a modified example 3 of the characteristic part 020SH will be described. In the above-described embodiment relating to the characteristic unit 020SH, the configuration in which the suggestive effect can be executed in the first KT state has been described. In Modification 3, instead of such a configuration or in addition to such a configuration, the suggestive effect may be executable in the normal state (low probability/low base state).

For example, in the normal state (low probability/low base state), the variable display of the first special symbol is mainly executed by winning the first starting winning opening, but the small hit probability in the small hit determination in this case is
As shown in FIG. 10-3, it is “6298/65536” (about 10%). It should be noted that the type of small hit due to winning in the first start winning opening is a small hit A (opening time: 0.2 seconds). Also,
When the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and it is a small hit (small hit A), the non-reach lost symbol is forcibly displayed to prevent the player from having excessive expectations. There is.

Therefore, in the modified example 3, the suggestive effect may be executable when the small hitting game state is controlled in the normal state. The small hit fanfare period and the small hit ending period may be set to be long in order to secure the time for executing the suggestive effect. As a result, the effect in the small hitting game in the normal state can be made useful for the player. Therefore, the period during which the small hit game is controlled in the normal state can be effectively utilized, and the interest of the small hit game in the normal state can be improved.

Note that the variable display based on the second pending storage may be executed after the transition from the low-probability/high-base state to the normal state. Specifically, immediately after the transition from the low-probability/high-base state to the normal state, variable display may be performed based on the second pending storage stored in the low-probability/high-base state before the transition. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, since the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be variably displayed at the same time, the small hit symbol is derived and displayed in the variable display based on the second reserved memory in the normal state. And when the small hit game is executed,
Variable display of the first special symbol may be executed. In this case, the variable display of the first special symbol is suspended during the period when the small hit game state is controlled, and the variable display of the first special symbol is restarted after the end of the small hit game. That is, the variable display of the first special symbol will be extended for the period of being controlled to the small hitting game state. In the modified example 3, it is also possible to perform the suggestive effect during the period in which the variable display of the first special symbol is extended. That is, the suggestive effect can be executed in the normal state (low probability/low base state). This makes the first
The period during which the variable display of special symbols is extended can be effectively used, and the interest can be improved.

(Modification 4 of Characteristic Part 020SH)
Next, a modified example 4 of the characteristic portion 020SH will be described. In the above-mentioned embodiment relating to the characteristic part 020SH, the configuration for executing the pending change suggesting effect that suggests the expectation level of the big hit has been described as the suggesting effect based on the determination result of the prefetching determination. In Modification 4, instead of or in addition to such a configuration, as a suggestive effect based on the determination result of the prefetch determination, a suggestive effect that suggests a big hit type when the prefetch determination is a big hit. May be executable.

For example, during the small hitting game in the high probability/first KT state, when the reserved memory that is prefetched to be a 2R normal big hit is stored, that is, from the high probability/first KT state to the low probability/first KT state. If it is known that the game is to be transferred, during the small hitting game, an unfortunate effect for the player (unfortunate effect) may be allowed to be executed. Specifically, for example, in the small hitting game before the variable display based on the pending storage determined to be the 2R normal big hit in advance is started, the background image is displayed dark, or the image of the skull mark is displayed on the background image. An effect such as displaying an effect image may be performed. Further, in this case, for the target pending storage, for example,
A hold change suggestion effect may be performed in which the hold display is changed to a hold display with an image of a skull mark.

On the other hand, during a small hit game in the high probability/first KT state or the low probability/first KT state, 1
It has been found that when the reserved memory that is prefetched to be the 0R certainty variation big hit or the 2R certainty variation big hit is stored, that is, the high probability/first KT state or the low probability/first KT state shifts to the second KT state. In this case, during the small hitting game, the player may be able to execute an effect (high-expectation effect) that is pleasing to the player. Specifically, for example, 10R probability variation big hit or 2
R In the small hitting game before the variable display based on the pending storage determined to be a probable big hit is started, the background image is displayed brightly (rainbow color), and the image of the angel mark and the effect are added to the background image. You may perform the effect of displaying an image. Further, in this case, for example, a pending change suggestion effect of changing the pending display to a pending display with an image of an angel mark may be performed on the target pending storage.

In addition, when the small hit game is executed a plurality of times before the variable display corresponding to the pending storage of the pre-read determination target is executed, a similar suggestion effect (in the small hit game of a plurality of times is executed.
A disappointing effect or a high-anticipation effect) may be performed, that is, a suggestion effect may be performed multiple times. In addition, in the case where the variable display is executed a plurality of times before the variable display corresponding to the reserved storage of the target is executed, in addition to the small hitting game state, the same suggestion can be made in the plurality of variable displays. You may give a performance. That is, such a suggestive effect may be continuously executed until the variable display based on the pending storage of the object for which the look-ahead has been determined is started.

(Modification 5 of Characteristic Part 020SH)
Next, a modified example 5 of the characteristic part 020SH will be described. In the above-described embodiment relating to the characteristic part 020SH, the rate of determining to change the display mode of the hold display during the variable display in FIG. 11-8 (in the description of the modification 5, “change determination rate during variable display”). That is, the same proportion as the determination rate for changing the hold display along with the hold change suggestion effect during the small hit game (determination rate for the hold change suggestion effect). In the fifth modification, the change determination rate during the variable display and the determination rate of the pending change suggestion effect may be different rates.

For example, the rate of determination of the pending change suggestive effect may be higher than the rate of change determination during variable display. This makes it easier to change the hold display accompanied by the hold change suggesting effect than the change of the hold display during the variable display, and it is possible to effectively utilize the period in which the small hitting game state is controlled.

Further, the change determination rate during the variable display and the determination rate of the pending change suggestive effect may be different rates depending on the result of the look-ahead determination (judgment of a big hit) for the target held storage information. For example, when it is determined that the big hit is executed by the look-ahead determination, the determination rate of the pending change suggestive effect is set to be higher than the change determination rate during the variable display, while the pre-read determination determines that there is a loss. In this case, the determination rate of the pending change suggestive effect may be lower than the variation determination rate during the variable display. Thereby, the change of the hold display accompanied by the hold change suggesting effect can be made to have a higher expectation than the change of the display mode of the hold display during the variable display. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the pending change suggestion effect during the small hit game.

In the first KT state (high probability/first KT state or low probability/first KT state), the hold display may be changed more easily than other gaming states (normal state or second KT state). That is, the chance time mode may be a mode in which the display mode of the hold display is most likely to change. Further, in this case, the determination rate of the pending change suggestive effect may be higher than the variation determination rate during the variable display. That is, among the effects for changing the display mode of the hold display, the effect of changing the display mode of the hold display with the hold change suggestion effect may be most easily executed during the small hit game. As a result, it is possible to effectively utilize the period during which the small hit game state is controlled in the chance time mode.

(Modification 6 of Characteristic Part 020SH)
Next, a modified example 6 of the characteristic part 020SH will be described. In the above-described embodiment relating to the characteristic part 020SH, the configuration for suggesting a change in hold on hold during the small hitting game is executed when the final color of the hold storage during hold display is all gray (see FIG. 11-6). 020SHS70: YE
S)). Modification 6 is, instead of such a configuration, or in addition to such a configuration, the gassing hold change suggesting effect during the small hitting game is stored in the hold storage during the hold display,
It may be possible to execute even when the pending storage in which the final color is determined to be a special display mode other than gray is stored.

In this case, the hold storage determined to have the final color of gray may be easier to perform the gasse hold change suggestion effect than the hold storage determined to have the special display manner. As a result, even when the reserved memory determined to be the special display mode is stored, the gust pending change suggestion effect can be performed for the reserved memory determined to be the display mode whose final color is gray. It is possible to excite the production during the game.

On the contrary, for the reserved memory determined to be the special display mode, it may be easier to perform the gase pending change suggestion effect than to the reserved memory determined to have the final color of gray. For example,
It is also possible to forcibly execute the gasse hold change suggestion effect and not execute the hold change suggestion effect for the hold memory in which the final color is determined to be the special display mode. In this case, in active display, the display mode is changed to the final color. As a result, the player's sense of expectation can be intentionally reduced at the stage of the hold display, and the expectation when the display mode is changed at the stage of the active display can be increased accordingly. Therefore, the interest of the pending change suggestion production can be improved.

(Modification 7 of Characteristic Part 020SH)
Next, a modified example 7 of the characteristic part 020SH will be described. In the above-described embodiment relating to the characteristic part 020SH, the configuration for performing the pending change suggestion effect, the set value suggestion effect, and the probability change suggestion effect has been described as the suggestion effect. In Modification 7, in place of such a configuration or in addition to such a configuration, an explanation suggestion effect regarding the progress of the game may be executable as a suggestion effect.

The explanation suggesting effect is, for example, an effect by a character image relating to the progress of the game in the chance time mode, and specifically, the explanation suggesting effect such as "may the game be switched to the normal mode in 50 times?" There is a possibility that it is controlled to a high probability state in the chance mode at the time of first hit (62% = "5
6/56+35"%: see FIG. 11-1), which is an explanation suggestion production such as "is the probability of probability change a little over 60%?"

Here, in the characteristic part 020SH, as a game state, a normal state, high probability/first KT
State, low probability/first KT state, and second KT state are controlled to any one of a plurality of game states, and since the game state changes, it is difficult for the player to grasp the content of the game. is there. Therefore, by making it possible to execute the explanation suggestion effect of the modified example 7, it is possible for the player to easily understand the game state or the like that can be shifted after the chance mode.
The interest of the game can be improved.

(Modification 8 of Characteristic Part 020SH)
Next, a modified example 8 of the characteristic part 020SH will be described. In the above-described embodiment relating to the characteristic unit 020SH, a configuration in which the characteristic unit 020SH is applied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 that is controlled to a high probability state until the next big hit when the big hit game based on the probability variation big hit is executed will be described. did. Instead of such a configuration, it is also possible to apply the characteristic part 020SH to a gaming machine (for example, a so-called ST machine) that is controlled in a high probability state until a prescribed number of times has passed. Here, one specification example of the pachinko gaming machine of the ST machine will be described.

For example, in the ST machine, when the probability variation big hit is executed, it is controlled to a high probability state until the specified number of times (ST number) of variable display is executed, and when the specified number of times of variable display is executed, Transition from the stochastic state to the low-probability state.

In addition, when the probability variation big hit is executed, a high base state (high probability/first K after the probability variation big hit game).
T state). The period (variable display count) controlled to the high probability/first KT state is a period (shift change count) according to the probability variation big hit symbol. When the transition change count is executed after the high probability/first KT state is controlled, the high base state (high probability/first KT state) shifts to the low base state (second KT state). The number of transition changes is, for example, a number smaller than the ST number.

As a result, it becomes possible to control in the second KT state until the number of STs has elapsed after the number of transitional fluctuations has passed, that is, a small hit game in which a prize can be expected is executed. The second
If the jackpot is not won even before the variable display of the ST number is executed in the KT state, the variable state of the ST number is executed to return to the normal state. Here, when the small hit game state is controlled in the second KT state, an effect corresponding to the control of the small hit game state (for example, the small hit notification image 020SH202 and the winning effect image 020 shown in FIG. 11-9).
The display of SH203) is executable.

Further, in the ST machine, when the normal big hit symbol is executed, it is controlled to a high base state (low probability/first KT state) after the normal big hit game. The period (variable display count) controlled to the low probability/first KT state is a period (shift change count) that normally corresponds to the jackpot pattern. Low probability/first KT
When the transition variation count is executed after being controlled to the high state, the high base state (low probability/first KT
State) to a low base state (normal state).

In the high-probability/first KT state and the low-probability/first KT state, a common effect (for example, chantime mode) may be executable. In the first KT state, although a small hit is likely to occur, it is difficult for the game ball to win the special variable winning ball device 17, that is, the winning ball cannot be expected.

In the modified example 8, in the first KT state (high probability/first KT state or low probability/first KT state) in the ST machine, when the small hitting game state is controlled, a suggestion suggesting a content advantageous to the player (For example, any one of the pending change suggestion effect, the set value suggestion effect, and the probability change suggestion effect) may be executed.

According to the modified example 8, even if the small hitting game in the first KT state in which the gaming balls hardly win the prize is repeatedly executed in the ST machine, the impression that the game is progressing smoothly is executed by executing the suggestion effect. Can be given to players. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the progress of the game due to the small hit game in the first KT state. In particular, in the pachinko gaming machine of the ST machine, it is possible to improve the interest during the small hitting game in the first KT state. The ST pachinko gaming machine is not limited to the above-described specifications, and may have other specifications as long as the small hit game in which the game balls hardly win is executed.

(Explanation of means relating to the characteristic part 020SH)
In relation to the above-mentioned characteristic part 020SH, the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be variably displayed at the same time, and there is known a pachinko gaming machine which frequently causes a small hit in the probability variation gaming state (for example, , Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2018-033787). However, if a small hit game in which the game balls hardly win the prize is executed, this period is a period in which the variable display is not performed, so that the player may be given an impression that the game is not progressing smoothly. is there. Specifically, for example, if a small hit game in which a game ball hardly wins is repeatedly executed,
In the small hitting game state, the special symbol is stopped and displayed each time, which may give the player the impression that the game is not proceeding smoothly. For this reason, the player may feel uncomfortable and the interest in the game may be reduced.

Therefore, the gaming machine of the means 1 relating to the characteristic part 020SH is a gaming machine capable of playing a game (
For example, in a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of playing a game, a game state control means for controlling a game state (for example, in a game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103) shown in FIG. 6) Variable display execution means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 4) that variably displays identification information (for example, a special symbol) and performs display of the display result by performing the steps S120 to S128). Specifically, the CPU 103
) In step S25A, S25B) and effect executing means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control), the game state control means is advantageous to the player (for example, big hit game state). And, a special state different from the advantageous state (for example, a small hit game state), a non-special state (first KT state), and a special state that is easier to be controlled to the special state than the non-special state (for example, the second KT State), the advantageous state and the special state are states in which the variable display is not performed, and when the effect execution means is controlled to the special state in the special state, the special state is set to the special state. Special effect corresponding to state control (for example, small hit notification image 020SH202, small pattern 020S shown in FIG. 10-9)
H201 and winning effect image 020SH203) can be executed, and when the non-special state is controlled to the special state, a suggestion effect which is different from the special effect and suggests advantageous contents for the player ( For example, the pending change suggestion effect shown in (E) of FIG. 11-11 can be executed.

According to such a configuration, even if the small hit game is repeatedly executed in the non-special state (for example, the first KT state), it is possible to give the player the impression that the game is progressing smoothly, that is, The small hit game in the non-special state can prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the progress of the game. In particular, according to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest during the small hitting game in the non-special state by the suggestive effect.

In addition, in the gaming machine described in the means 1, as the gaming machine of the means 2 related to the characteristic part 020SH, the effect performing means, corresponding to the variable display of the identification information, displays the decoration identification information (for example, a decorative pattern). It is possible to perform variable display, and when the special state is controlled in the special state, the special display result as the display result of the decoration identification information (for example, a fixed symbol "1, which is a combination indicating a small hit game, 3, 5") is displayed, and when the special state is controlled in the non-special state, a predetermined display result different from the special display result as the display result of the decoration identification information (combination of decorative patterns showing a gap) Is displayed.

According to such a configuration, in the non-special state, it is almost impossible to expect the winning of the game ball to the special winning opening during the small hitting game, so the predetermined display result (for example, the lost symbol) is forcibly displayed in a stopped state. This can prevent the player from expecting too much.

Further, as the gaming machine of the means 3 relating to the characteristic portion 020SH, in the gaming machine described in the means 1 or 2, for the variable display that has not been started yet, it is shown that the display result of the variable display is controlled to the advantageous state. A pre-start determination unit that determines whether or not a display result is obtained (for example, prefetch determination), and the effect execution unit provides the suggestion effect that provides a suggestion regarding the pre-start determination unit (for example, FIG. 11-10). It is possible to execute the hold change suggestion effect shown in (E).

With such a configuration, it is possible to perform the suggestive effect based on the determination result of the look-ahead determination, and thus it is possible to increase the expectation for the pending storage. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the small hit game in the non-special state.

Further, as the gaming machine of the means 4 relating to the characteristic part 020SH, in the gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to 3, a holding storage means for storing information regarding variable display as holding storage information is provided, and the effect execution means is , Displaying the hold storage information stored in the hold storage means as a hold display (for example, hold display 020SH206 shown in (A) of FIG. 11-10),
In the suggestion effect, an effect effect that acts on the hold display (for example, (E in FIG. 11-10).
It is possible to execute the action effect image 020SH213) shown in ), and there are a case where the display mode of the hold display changes and a case where the display mode of the hold display does not change.

According to such a configuration, a series of effects including an effect and an effect of changing the display mode of the hold display can be performed, so that the hold display can be focused and the expectation for the hold storage can be increased. .. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the small hit game in the non-special state.

Further, as the gaming machine of the means 5 related to the characteristic part 020SH, in the gaming machine described in any of the means 1 to 4, it is possible to set any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player. Different setting means, the effect execution means, the suggestion effect to make a suggestion about the setting means (for example, the set value suggestion image 020SH220 shown in (E) of FIG. 11-12)
Is feasible.

According to such a configuration, in the small hit game in the non-special state (for example, the first KT state), it is possible for the player to guess the set value. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the small hit game in the non-special state.

Further, in the gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to 5 as the gaming machine of the means 6 related to the characteristic part 020SH, the non-special state includes a first non-special state (for example, non-probability change state: low probability/ 1st KT state), and the 2nd non-special state (for example, probability change state: high probability / 1st KT state) which is easy to be controlled to the above-mentioned advantageous state rather than the 1st non-special state.
A common effect (chance time mode) can be executed when the first non-special state is controlled and when the second non-special state is controlled, and the suggestive effect is the second
It suggests that the non-special state is controlled (for example, the probability variation suggestion image 020SH230 shown in (E) of FIG. 11-13).

According to such a configuration, the common effect is executed when the high probability/the first KT state and the low probability/the first KT state are controlled, and the probability change suggestive effect is provided in the small hit game in the chantime mode. Since it is feasible, it is possible to make the player infer whether or not the probability change state is in the small hit game in the high probability/first KT state and the low probability/first KT state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the small hit game in the non-special state.

Further, in the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 6 as a gaming machine of the means 7 related to the characteristic part 020SH, the effect execution means, as the suggestive effect, a plurality of types of suggestive effects (for example, The odd number setting suggestion, the even number setting suggestion, and the suggestion of setting value 4 or more) shown in (B) of FIG. 11-7 can be executed, and depending on which kind of the suggestion effect is executed, the player The advantages of the suggested content are different.

According to such a configuration, since a plurality of types of suggestive effects can be executed, variations in the suggestive effects can be increased, so that the suggestive effects can be prevented from becoming monotonous effects. In addition, since the degree of advantage varies depending on the suggestion effect, the degree of attention of the player can be changed depending on the suggestion effect that is executed. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the interest in the small hit game in the non-special state.

Further, in the gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to 7 as a gaming machine of the means 8 related to the characteristic part 020SH, the variable display executing means variably displays the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol). And, the variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) can be executed in parallel, and the first state in which the game medium easily passes through the starting area (for example, the second starting winning opening) and , A second variable state in which the game medium is unlikely to pass through the starting area and is changeable (for example,
The variable winning ball device 6B) shown in FIG. 1 is provided, and the game state control means can control the first variable winning means to a predetermined state (for example, the first KT state) in which the first variable winning means easily changes to the first state.
The effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect when the special state (for example, the small hitting game state) is controlled in the predetermined state.

According to such a configuration, even if the small hit game in the first KT state in which the game balls hardly win the prize is repeatedly executed, it is possible to give the player the impression that the game is progressing smoothly, that is, the first The small hitting game in the 1KT state can prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the progress of the game. In particular, with such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest during the small hitting game in the first KT state.

Further, as the gaming machine of the means 9 relating to the characteristic part 020SH, in the gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to 8, a winning easy state (open state) in which the gaming ball is easy to win and a winning difficulty in which the gaming ball is difficult to win. In a difficult state (closed state), a second variable winning means (for example, the special variable winning ball device 17 shown in FIG. 1) that can be changed is provided, and the second variable winning means facilitates winning in the special state. It is possible to change the state, and the effect execution means executes the suggestion effect in response to the second variable winning means changing to the easy winning state (for example, the special variable winning ball device 17 opening timing). .

With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult to focus on the opening of the special variable winning ball device 17, and to focus on the suggestive effect. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the small hit game in which the game ball hardly wins, and it is possible to prevent the interest of the game from being lowered by the small hit game.

Further, in the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 9 as a gaming machine of the means 10 relating to the characteristic part 020SH, the gaming state control means is configured such that the gaming medium is in a specific area (for example, a special variable) in the special state. The advantageous state can be controlled based on the fact that a specific region: a so-called V region) has passed inside the winning ball device 17.

According to such a configuration, even if the small hit game in the normal state (non-special state) in which the game balls hardly win the prize is executed in the pachinko game machine of the one-and-two-mixed type with the characteristic portion 020SH, the game is smoothly played. Is given to the player, that is, the player can be prevented from feeling uncomfortable with the progress of the game due to the small hit game in the normal state. In particular, it is possible to improve the interest during the small hitting game in the normal state.

Further, in the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 10 as a gaming machine of the means 11 relating to the characteristic part 020SH, the effect executing means, when the special state is controlled to the special state, the game medium is Corresponding to the passage of the game medium through the special area based on the passage of the special area (for example, the discharge area) (for example, the game ball being detected by the second count switch 24 provided in the special winning opening) A predetermined effect (for example, a winning effect image 020SH203 shown in (C) of FIG. 11-11) can be executed, and when the game medium has passed through the special area when the special state is controlled in the non-special state. Regardless of whether or not the predetermined effect is performed.

According to such a configuration, in the second KT state, the player can be encouraged to win a prize in the special variable winning port, and the interest in the second KT state can be improved. On the other hand, in the small hit game in the first KT state, although the game ball rarely wins the special variable winning port, in order not to execute the predetermined effect, the winning in the small hit in the first KT state It is possible to prevent the player from expecting.

1 ... Pachinko game machine 2 ... Game board 3 ... Game machine frame 4A, 4B ... Special pattern display device 5 ... Image display device 6A ... Winning ball device 6B ... Variable winning ball device 7 ... Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R ... Speaker 9... Frame LED
10 General prize hole 11 Main board 12 Production control board 13 Voice control board 14 LED control board 15 Relay board 17 Special variable winning ball device 20 Normal pattern display 21 Gate switch 22A, 22B Start Mouth switch 23... 1st count switch 24... 2nd count switch 30... Hitting ball operation handle 31A... Stick controller 31B... Push button 32... Movable body 41... Passage gate 100... Game control microcomputers 101, 121... ROM
102, 122... RAM
103... CPU
104, 124... Random number circuit 105, 125... I/O
120... CPU for production control
123... Display control unit

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of playing a game,
Variable display execution means for performing variable display and deriving and displaying the display result,
An advantageous state advantageous for the player, a special state different from the advantageous state, a non-special state different from the advantageous state and the special state, and a special state that is more easily controlled to the special state than the non-special state A game state control means that can be controlled to
Determining means for determining whether to control to the advantageous state,
Determination means for determining whether to be controlled to the advantageous state before the determination of the determination means,
Production execution means,
Equipped with
The advantageous state and the special state are states in which the variable display is not performed,
The effect execution means,
When controlled to the special state in the special state, it is possible to execute a special effect corresponding to the control of the special state,
When the special state is controlled in the non-special state, based on the determination result of the determination means, it is possible to execute a suggestive effect that suggests that the advantageous state is controlled.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Images